Você está na página 1de 219

CENTURY 400 kV-Substation FITTING STÂLPU and

MOUTH Being

Bucharest/Romania

TRANSELECTRICA S.A.

November 2014

SPECIFICATION
The SINGLE-VOLUME

REVISION 02
SCHEDULE WORK
Objective: TH-400 kV STÂLPU FITTING Station and Being MOUTH.

Object: CENTURY
400 kV-AHMED and FITTING MOUTH
PHASE: CS
IALOMITA Station
CUSTOMER: CNTEE TRANSELECTRICA S.A. Contract:C 113/25.03.2010
PROJECT CODE: C673 Rolls CODE: DL4-01/C673RoLE FILE: 1
M.
COMPILED: ROMAN M. Checked: M. DAHIR Approved:
MECULESCU
REVISION: Date: 11.2014
NN
r. crt. Name Document code File No. Format Revision OBS.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
3ăUŢi by

CS. CENTURY 400 kV


Cernavoda-fitting
Stâlpu and Being
Mouth station.
1 W4E-C673RoLE/001 205 A4 02
Technical and
economic
documentation
memoir.
2 Environmental 35 A4
agreement
3 Opinion YEAR Apele 11 A4
Romane

Checked, Compiled,
Magalona Rafi MECULESCU

Customer: TRANSELECTRICA S.A.


Objective: CENTURY 400 kV CERNAVODA-FITTING STÂLPU
and
GURA IALOMIţEI Station

Object: CENTURY 400 kV CERNAVODA-FITTING STÂLPU and


GURA IALOMIţEI Station

VOLUME: SINGLE CONTRACT: C 113/25.03.2010 PROJECT CODE: C673RoLE CODE: DL4 SLIP-
01/C673RoLE: SPECIFICATION

Table of contents:
SPECIFICATION
1. General Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 4

2. Technical specifications
2.1. Technical specifications and characteristics of materials for columns ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... 10
2.2. Protecting the rustproof pillars ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 17
2.3. Technical specifications and characteristics of material for line conductors and accessories ... ... ... ... ... ... 31
2.4. Technical specifications and characteristics of material for earthing outlets ... ... ... ... ... ....50
2.5. Technical specifications and characteristics of material for the foundations of the pillars ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
.... 56
2.6. Technical specifications and characteristics of material for insulating chains ............................88
2.7. Technical specifications and characteristics of materials for OPGW wire ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ....107
2.8. Technical specifications and characteristics of materials for OPGW wire accessories ... ... ... ... ... ....124
2.9. Technical specifications and characteristics of material for antigalopare ... ... ... ... ... ....130

2.10. Technical specifications for monitoring systems on line .................................................... 142


2.11. Technical specifications for manufacture spacers... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .....146
2.12. Technical specifications for systems of buoyage night ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...156
3. Technical requirements for installation and reception
3.1. Purpose... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
... ... ... 163
3.2. Standards................................................................................................................163
3.3. Technical conditions... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
... ... 163
3.4. Technical requirements from mounting... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
... ... ... ... ... ... 164 3.5. Final checks and tests... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
... ... ... ... ... ... ... 197
3.6. Tolerance permitted for mounting works carried out ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 198
3.7. Security measures And CORY săQătate And work... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
199
3.8. The reception of the works ................................................................................................................ 205

APPENDICES

A. list of amounts of works


-
Lists of works. Section i. II 400 kV-Gura IalomiŢei
- Lists of works. Section II. Gura IalomiŢei II 400 kV-Stâlpu
B. Environmental Agreement (copy)
C. Opinion YEAR Apele Romane (review)
SPECIFICATION
1. General requirements

1.1. the purpose of the work

The volume of works includes design, manufacture, supply, testing, packaging, transport and delivery to the
construction site of the fittings and equipment as well as the execution of the installation II 400 kv DC.

1.2. NORMATIVE Instructions, technical data sheets, standards

The execution of line will comply with the following regulations:


- Regulatory framework for the construction of overhead power lines with voltage over 1000 V, NTE
003/04/00;
- Methodology for the sizing of metallic pillars, you TH EN 50341-1:2003/A1:2010; BS EN 50341-1:2012
- Normative regarding construction on fundarea lands susceptible to wetting, colapsibile;
- Normative regarding the maintenance works to transport electricity, on 016/8-1999;
- Regulation of mining technique of overhead electrical lines on the 127/83;
- Technical conditions and prescriptions and reception for 110, 220 and 400 kV, 3 LI 179-87;
- Guidance for the design of approximation and I.T. crossings II 110-400 kV over other plants, 1 LI-Ip 38-
89;
- Design and operating instructions on protection against influences brought about by the proximities of
overhead power lines, 3 RE-Ip 41-92;
- Guidebook for plant and design of earthing installations re-start 1 Ip 30-2004;
- Replacing wires guards at 110, 220 and TH 400 kV, 32-44 FT-81;
- The execution at the meteorological conditions, LI-46 FT.-84;
- Regulatory framework for the production of concrete and the execution of works of concrete, reinforced
concrete and prestressed concrete, 012/1-2007 US.
- Mounting the foundations II 110-400 kV double simple and multiple routing, FL 1-80;
- Execution of M.T. and I.T. with trails running parallel to the other lines in operation or in their vicinity,
FL 13-88;
- Removing metal pillars II 35-400 kV with cranes, IT (L) 7-89;
- Guidebook for choosing optimal solutions for channel buoying the pillars and the construction of
CENTURY, IRE-IP 69-91;
- The technological instructions for use bigilor, IT (L) 10-86;
- Mounting pillars Y 400 kV for simple circuit, IT (L) 7-89;
- Demolishing the foundations of the pillars of high voltage (kV 110-400), (L) 14-89;
- Normative regarding the choice of insulation, insulation coordination and surge protection power
installations, NTE 001/03/00;
- Operational procedure for the prevention and control of Corrosion in the Installations of the electricity
Transport TEL-07.21.
- 10/1995 law concerning quality in construction;
- Methodology for assessment of technical condition of the overhead power lines of 110 ÷ 400 kV for decision
making for upgrading or switching to capital repairs.
- Replacing the conductor guard at FT. 110-400 44-81 II kV;
- Technical specification relating to steel products, ST 009-2005
- Normative regarding the preparation and verification of documentation for construction, geotechnical, NP
074/2007
Mentioneza is that all the components of (columns, foundations, conductors, insulation, etc.) were
calculated And dimensioned on the basis of the provisions of en NTE 003/04/00, approved by the order
No. 32/NAER 2004.

1.3. Conditions of construction and environmental protection


With the work mentioned will be observed all the rules and regulations in order to reduce environmental influences.
Environmental management plan constitutes annex E1 of the draft.
Plan of intervention in the event of accidental pollution (annex E4 of the draft) will be prepared by the contractor.
1.3.1. Access paths
access to necessary agreement of the owners will be provided by the client to allow the contractor to perform
the work under the Contract.
Before you begin the activity on any property, the contractor shall obtain from the beneficiary a Program
Access. The contractor will also be responsible to notify landowners before work.
The recipient will reimburse owners for destroying the crop or property as well as for new roadways along
CENTURY, necessary for carrying out the work covered by this Contract.

1.3.2. Damage to crops and property


The contractor shall take all necessary steps to avoid the destruction of land, property, crop, etc., and will
ensure that appropriate supervision to ensure that damage to be minimal. All remaining materials will be
removed after installation, and will be left clean.
Where the contractor believes that for a normal work cannot be avoided any damage, it will notify the
recipient. If the beneficiary confirms that the occurrence of these damages is unavoidable, will be responsible
for compensation, and the contractor will continue the work according to the indications given by the
beneficiary.

1.3.3. the protection properties


The contractor shall limit the movement of personnel and equipment on land expropriated or approved
access routes to minimize damage to crops, orchards or properties and will make efforts to avoid degradation
land. Holes will be covered, terraces, damage roads, ditches and other related areas will be corrected, and
the land will be returned to the initial conditions.
The contractor will be responsible to the owners of land crossed by for any loss of personal property resulting
from the neglijenŢăşi will fix the immediate damage of personal property.

1.3.4. access
1.3.4.1 Overview

The recipient will provide the following amenities:


a) Access along the route II, required to allow the contractor to begin execution.
b) Right to carry materials access aisles provided that they do not oblige the recipient of the compensation excessive.
At the beginning of the work covered by this Contract, the contractor will have to start to examine the
Contract route and plans supplied by the client and will draw on these proposed access roads in all parts of
the line and type of transport to be carried out. HăUŢile will indicate the type of access that will be arranged,
if necessary, the use of existing access roads, existing public roads, roads that are not under the
administration of the State.
The contractor will hold deposits for materials and equipment. The contractor will negotiate with landowners
for land use as storage space.
1.3.4.2 roadways at TH
All lanes of access II will be conducted with minimum facilities.
doorways shall have a 3 m wide and will be carried out in such a way as to prevent the streams or soil
erosion.
The contractor will maintain access to ensure that the transport of the material is not affected.
1.3.4.3 existing access roads
Where the contractor uses roads managed by the State, for access to the construction site for the realisation
of the work are to ensure that drainage ditches are properly protected. Their intersection with new
approaches must be free, and the side of the road to be a warning sign for the public. Drenajele must not be
blocked.
If the contractor has approval to use existing roads that are not maintained by the State, he will obtain the
consent of the owners of land and will commit to maintain the road during construction of the line in such a
way that standard traffic obtained shall not be hindered in any way. He will play his way in conditions similar
to those prevailing at the beginning of the construction of the line and will perform the necessary restorations
benefited from.
Is attached to this specification, the ENVIRONMENTAL AGREEMENT No. 1/07.04.2014 issued by
the National Agency for environmental protection, for analysis by the contractor and respecting
of all its provisions during the desfăşurarii construction.

1.4. Quality Management

1.4.1. General
The contractor must certify that the services and supplies are in accordance with the quality requirements of the
contract and in addition to this, services and supplies, conforming to the principles of good workmanship
qualities.
The contractor, the manufacturer must be part of the list of accepted of TRANSELECTRICA s.a. CN and authorized by
ANRE.
Otherwise they must submit to the two authorities documents necessary for acceptance.
Quality assurance shall be implemented in accordance with the corresponding chapters from SR EN ISO
9001/2008. Quality Management program of the Contractor will include the systems and procedures
established to ensure compliance with the requirements of the contract.
This program will include the following:
- a stage of purchase or manufacturing materials/manufacturing technology in that it will not execute any
work făUă written consent from the Beneficiary or its representatives;
- a stage of purchase or manufacturing materials/manufacturing technology that requires careful
monitoring of the recipient for the announcement of the activity;
- a stage of the execution of the works to be determined determining phases where it is necessary
to announce the beneficiary to continue work.
Requirements of the specification are binding on the contractor and does not relieve him of doing other
activities it deems necessary to ensure the quality of works.

1.4.2. Quality Management


It will ensure in accordance with EN ISO 9001:2008. Will include the following details:
- organizational structure of the contractor;
- duties and responsibilities of the designated staff to ensure the quality of works;
- the system of purchase, receipt and verifying materials;
- the system for ensuring the quality of the execution of the work;
- control system documentation;
- plan audit Contractor;
- a list of administrative procedures and the work required to meet the
the quality requirements of the contract. These procedures will be made available to the beneficiary.

1.4.3. the quality control Plan


The contractor will procure from each Manufacturer quality Plans according to SR ISO 10005:2007 and will
submit detailed Plans for approval of Quality, within 1 month after the award of the contract. Quality plan will
expose the activities in a logical sequence and will have the following:
- a chart detailing the structure of the work, containing various tasks and covering the field of work;
- procedures relating to internal organization;
- procedures concerning the relationship with the Purchaser;
- references to procedures for specific quality manufacturer for each type of activity; -records related
inspection points.
Contractor's plan regarding the quality will be forwarded for approval to the beneficiary in good time before the start
of work.
A first responsibility in controlling and testing made the Contractor for each manufacturer. These reports shall include
at least the name of the contractor/Inspector/identification, the name of the Verifier, date of inspection/test activity,
technique used, which is standard aplicăşi degree of acceptance. The contractor shall inform the Purchaser of the
control Manufacturer about the field inspection, detailed and graph. The manufacturer will take care to provide any
necessary information and equipment, in respect of supplies and services reception.
Contractor and Manufacturer will take care of access to any facilities to be inspected with regard to supplies and
services.
Charges for inspections, tests and equipment necessary for testing of samples, at the request of the purchaser, shall
be borne by the contractor.
The resulting expenses due to any damage caused by the tests and inspections will incur by the contractor.
In the case of rejection, all supplies and services, will be replaced by new ones, according to SpecificaŢilor.

1.4.4. Quality control


1.4.4.1. Inspection and testing
Primary responsibility with regard to examinations and tests shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
Checking and approval of designs, materials and execution Proceedings or eventual benefits to certain checks
by the beneficiary shall not relieve the Contractor of on any of its obligations or responsibilities regarding
works under the contract. Examinations and tests shall be notified so that it is possible to establish whether
they were carried out. Audit reports must include: title of the contract, the name of the author's/Verifier test,
the date of verification/testing, the technique used, the standard acceptance and acceptance.
Quality plan will include Plans for quality supplies and services. These plans will contain at least the following:
- flow control operations in order, including verification requirements relating to environmental protection,
for carrying out the work;
- the document applicable for each operation;
- results records in connection with the execution of the operation in question;
- columns for marking inspection points set by the authorities or by the beneficiary; to confirm the execution
of sub-headings.

1.4.4.2. type Tests and routine


Individual type tests, and routine will be performed for all parts provided. The principal may waive its request
regarding type tests if it is submitted by the contractor to the required number of test certificates be certified
by an independent quality assurance, are taken over by an organization independent testing, stating that the
component has successfully passed the tests presented in this specification.

They will carry out all necessary checks for demonstrating quality requirements specific to the work described
in this specification. These tests will be included in the Quality Plan.

1.4.4.3. attestation Certificate


Previously to the issue of "accept a certificate" or the transport agreement, the contractor must provide the
necessary examples of Beneficiary certificate of attestation. The certificate shall be accompanied by
certificates of testing materials, inspection reports, test reports and individual type.
1.4.5. Monitoring of the programme of AQ
AQ program tracking will be done by the client during the entire contract. This will take the form of
surveillance activities at workplaces and/or audits of systems and procedures the contractor regarding its
organizational mode of AQ. in case of any shortcomings, will be approved and implemented corrective action.
The contractor shall provide all facilities including access to Manufacturers or Subcontractors, in order to
facilitate Beneficiary monitoring activities.
Purchaser and its representatives shall have the right to do quality checks various components laid down in
accessories.
Quality controls for different stages in the quality Plan may be carried out:
- to order supplies, calculations and plans, specifications, procedures and timetables;
- in the manufacture of fittings;
- When you run the installation.
The contractor will provide access to the purchaser to Subcontractors and manufacturers, which may be
required by him for the purpose of monitoring activities.

1.4.6. Manufacturersand Subcontractors


The contractor will ensure compliance with the requirements of this specification any Manufacturers or
Subcontractors appointed by him under the contract. Earlier appointment of any Manufacturer/Subcontractor,
the contractor must ensure that their organization regarding quality assurance is based on the requirements
of SR EN ISO 9001 and with this specification.
Auditing the Contractor regarding the Organization of the Manufacturer/Subcontractor of AQ will be
documented to demonstrate its effectiveness to the beneficiary.

1.4.7 Control Assembly, test and placed into operation


The contractor shall submit a detailed schedule of testing (test) dock. Final testing program will be updated
by the contractor and approved by Purchaser, correlated with the stage of installation and commissioning.
During the execution of the works will be carried out the tests recommended by the Manufacturers of the
equipment and the required upgrade of the provisions on 116.
2. Technical specifications

2.1. Technical specifications and characteristics of MATERIALS for the PILLARS of the LINE
2.1.1. PURPOSE
This specification refers to the manufacture, supply, testing materials, packaging and transport of construction metal
components necessary for new pillars that will mount in the two centuries.
Contractor will comply with all regulations in force regarding the manufacture and delivery of products and will
follow all the indications given by the beneficiary.
Leah 400 kV Eaton Socon-Ahmed will mount the metal poles double circuit type DONAU (double triangle)

2.1.2. Standards and recommendations

All materials must meet up at the close of tenders, the force of the following standards:
NTE 003/04/00 normative for construction with more than 1000 V voltage
EN 10020:2003 definition and classification of steel marks
EN 10021:2007 General technical delivery Conditions for steel products
EN 10027-1:2006 symbolization of steel systems. Part 1: Simbolizarea alpha numeric
EN 10027-2:1996 symbolization systems for steel. Part 2: numerical System
EN 10079:2007 definition of steel products
EN 10025-1:2005 hot-rolled Products out of steel for construction.
STAS 767/0-88 steel construction.
STAS 767/2-78 civil engineering, industrial and agricultural. Riveted joints and bolted joints in steel
construction. Prescriptions.
STAS 8183-80-făUă welding Pipe steels for general use. Trademarks and technical conditions.
EN 10056/1-2000-Angles equal and unequal-winged building. Part 1. Dimensions. EN 10056/2-2000-Angles
equal and unequal-winged building. Part 2: Tolerances of dimensions formăşi.
EN 10029:2011, tables of hot rolled steel with thickness equal to or greater than 3 mm. Tolerances to
dimensions and shape.
SR ISO 8991/1999; SR EN ISO 898-1:2013/AC: 2013-mechanical properties of fasteners made of carbon
steel and alloy steel. Part 1: partially and fully threaded screws and studs in quality classes specified. BSP
thread with step by step rough and fine items.
ISO 4032/2013-hexagonal nuts at normal (style 1). Grades A and B; SR EN ISO 898-2:2012 mechanical
properties of fasteners carbon steel and alloy steel. Part 2: nuts quality class. Thread with step by step and
fine-thread screws, nuts and washers;
012-1/2007 US-Code of practice for execution of concrete. Part 1-the production of concrete; STAS 10128-
86-corrosion Protection of steel aboveground constructions. Classification of aggressive environments.
SR EN ISO 1461:2009 zinc Thermal Coatings on parts made of fontăşi steel. Specifications and test methods.
Quality metal apparel will be in accordance with EN 10025 + A1/EN 10025, S 355 JO and S 235 JO (37 52 OL
and OL) and EN 10056/EN 10056.
EN 10025-1:2005-hot rolled Products out of steel for construction. Part 1: General technical delivery
Conditions
EN 10025-2:2004-hot rolled Products out of steel construction. Part 2: technical delivery Conditions for steel-
construction
SR EN 10025-2:2004/AC: 2005-hot rolled Products out of steel construction. Part 2: technical delivery Conditions for
steel-construction
EN 10025-3:2004-hot rolled Products out of steel construction. Part 3: technical delivery Conditions for steel weldable
fine grain construction in normalized/normalized rolled
EN 10025-4:2004-hot rolled Products out of steel construction. Part 4: technical delivery Conditions for steel
construction weldable fine grain obtained by thermomechanical rolling
EN 10025-5:2005-hot rolled Products out of steel for construction. Part 5: technical delivery Conditions for steel
construction with corrosion resistance to atmospheric îmbunăWăŢită
SR EN 10025-6 + A1:2009-hot rolled Products out of steel for construction. Part 6: technical delivery Conditions for
flat products steel with high flow limit in State călităşi reverted

2.1.3. Columns

The pillars of double circuit have the following standard: înăOŢimi


Pole ÎnăOŢime type to "clamp" ÎnăOŢime "console"
SN 400250-5.3.21 m 25.3 m ICn 400270-5.3.21 m 21 m
ICN 400280-5.3.21 m 21 m

IT 400290-5.3.21 m 21 m
The pillars are designed to allow variations of înăOŢimii.
The feet of the Foundation for normal and pillar for the pillars with supraînăOŢări will be the same.
The pillars and the fasteners will be protected by hot dip galvanizing in accordance with anti-corrosive SR EN
ISO 1461-2009.

2.1.2. columns Accessories


Anti-theft devices
All the pillars covered with junction boxes, specify the OPGW Technical Project, will provide anti-theft devices from
barbed wire.
Anti-theft device will have to prevent the intrusion of unauthorized persons, and thus to prevent the theft of the
junction, the surplus of OPGW (coils), clamps etc.
Anti-theft device comprised of 5 rows of barbed wire (2 inside and outside pillar 3 pillar) caught up with
corresponding mounts on uppers the column in question, will be installed around the pillar to a round-înăOŢime
between 3 and 6 meters. The maximum distance between rows of barbed wire will not exceed 20 cm. If the distance
between the holes fasten on the uppers of pillar is greater than 3 m, will be installed on the intermediate spacer
angles for barbed.
The pillars with uneven legs will mount to 3 m above the ground (each leg) a row of "Spikes"-spike on all faces of the
leg.
From the ground up to one meter above the system with "Spikes" all screws that will mount will be secured with
"vandal".
Anti-theft device will be fitted with a gate to allow authorised personnel climbing on the pole. The gate will be locked
with a lock type cylindrical brass. Under no circumstances will not install an antitheft device in a place where it can
be overcome using the slope of the land, or on a bar inside of the pillar.
Anti-theft device type will be approved by the principal.

2.1.3. MATERIAL characteristics of corner and screw machine products

Hot rolled angles


2Ţel OL 52 (355 JO) according to the standard EN 10025-1:2005 Romanian hot-rolled Products from RŢeluri
construction. (with DIN 17100):
- yield strength for thickness < 16 mm-355 N/mm2; -yield strength for thicknesses > 16 mm-345 N/mm2; -
limit breaking: 630 ÷ 510 N/mm2.
2Ţel OL 37 (235 JO) according to the standard EN 10025-1:2005 Romanian hot-rolled Products from RŢeluri
construction. (with DIN 17100):
- yield strength for < 16 mm thickness-235 N/mm2; -yield strength for thicknesses > 16 mm-235 N/mm2; -
limit breaking: 360-440 N/mm2. screws
the screws are according to SR ISO 8991/1999; SR EN ISO 898-1:2013/AC: 2013-(mechanical properties of fasteners
made of carbon steel and alloy steel. Part 1: partially and fully threaded screws and studs in quality classes specified.
BSP thread with step by step rough and fine-Assembly Elements), with mechanical characteristics according to group
5.6. Quality screw machine products will be in accordance with DIN ISO 898 7990 (similar to SR ISO 8991/1999).
Each tensioning bolt will be provided with a Grower washer according to DIN 127 (similar to SR 7666/2-1994) and a
standard nut according to DIN 555. In terms of execution, screws and nuts must be according to SR EN ISO
4032/2013-hexagonal Nuts (normal (style 1). Grades A and B), SR EN ISO 898-2:2012 (mechanical Assembly of
carbon steel and alloy steel. Part 2: nuts quality class. BSP thread with step by step and fine) and TSI-121-003-86.

2.1.4. The execution of PARTS Overview


Parts will be made according to the original plans of implementation so as to ensure that the Assembly and mounting
satisfăFătoare, enabling interchangeability of similar elements, compliance
dimensions, positioning, and alignment of the holes.
* ăurile will be smooth, făUă barbs or deformations. Perforatoarele and molds will be checked carefully in
order to avoid the execution of some irregular holes or with defects enunciated above. Milled holes will be
clean, free of barbs and perpendicular to the surface of the material.
After all the materials for manufacturing new pillar will be hot-dipped galvanized according to SR EN ISO 1461/2009.

Cutting

7ăierea material will not be made otherwise than by cutting with scissors or guillotine, and will be accessible until the
weights specified below:
Steel quality:
- normal (37 S-235 OL' OJ)-14 mm;
- high strength (S-52 OL 355 JO)-16 mm.
Material thickness greater or higher quality will be cut drive with flacăUă or half. Manual cutting device with flame is
prohibited.
Where the materials are cut with scissors or ghilotinate, the edges will be finished and barbs and craters. Hot
cut edges will be finished after cutting.

Milling and punching


Perforation can be used up to and including the weights specified below:
Steel quality:
- normal (37 S-235 OL' OJ)-14 mm;
- high strength (S-52 OL 355)-16 mm.
No hole shall not be perforated where the thickness of materials depăşHşte diameter of the hole. Completed holes
will have a form potrivităşi will be free of barbs and craters.

Bending tests of materials


At bending the corner will avoid damage to the surface due to pressing with bending tools. Bending method "cut and
weld", făUă is not allowed to approve the previous beneficiary.

2.1.5. Technical conditions RELATED to FABRICATION Angles and gussets


All sizes will be determined after details of workshop and Assembly of prototypes for the new pillar for additions and
repairs to existing pillars, after piling on the measurements. Profiles used will not have size and shape deviations
greater than those admitted for EN 10056/12000.
Maximum permissible deviations of dimensions are as follows: corner
width the thickness

From L to 40 L +/-1.5 mm +/-0.55 mm


90 including

From 100 to +/-2.0 mm +/-0.60 mm


150 it it
including
Angle L 160 +/-3.0 mm +/-0.70 mm

6ăgeata profile used (after referral if applicable) must not be greater than the length
item.
Thus regarded bumpers runs through butt weld with the addition of two extra clips rhombic.
Înnădirile runs between the nodes.
On the strength of the column is allowed in a single bore, provided that the same cross section that there are
two elements spliced.
The tolerances permitted cutting profiles and guseelor are as follows:
- for < profiles length l 5 m +/-2 mm in length;
- for profiles of length > 5 m, l +/-3 mm in length;-for sheet metal parts, +/-2 mm in width and length.
The edges of the cut parts are processed not having functional role. Sides of the merge should be removed bavurile
resulting from slaughter.
Misconduct admitted to holes made in profiles and gussets In the absence of any other specification, the
diameter of the holes "in black" will be:
- for screws up to 14 mm in diameter-diameter of 1.0 mm nominal +; -for bolts with diameter of between 16
and 20 mm-1.5 mm nominal diameter +;
- for bolts with a diameter of 24 mm and larger-diameter 2.0 mm nominal +.
The nominal diameters tolerances permitted of the holes will not exceed +/-0.5 mm.
It is forbidden to adjust holes with their pila or enlargement of Cutter bars.
Deviations are admitted to the position and shape of the Assembly holes of the pillars are:
Set the drilling axis +/-1 mm to a maximum of 50% of the holes.
Distance between axes of +/-1 mm for distances up to 1 m and +/-1.5 mm
distances longer than 1 m.
The difference between two perpendicular diameters of the holes (-roundness) +/-1 mm.

2.1.6. Quality control. BENEFICIARY Assistance Overview


Routine tests on the materials and manufacture of metallic pillars will be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of this specification.
All laminates are derived from the factory or from stocks will be marked to identify the heat from which they Iăcut
part. They will have a quality certificate for their mechanical properties, chemical and carbon equivalent value of the
batch in question.
If the test certificates cannot be obtained, the contractor will perform at his own expense analysis and testing of
materials.
2Ţelurile of different qualities will be stored separately.
Buloanele and nuts will have test certificates.
Copies of all test certificates will be made available to the beneficiary.
Assistance To The Beneficiary
The party concerned may send representatives to the manufacturer of the material in order to participate in the
inspections and tests in the factory.
The specialists of the beneficiary will have free access to the factory supplying materials to verify the manufacture
and quality are as specified.
The manufacturer 's specialists will carry out tests in the factory together with the representatives of the beneficiary.
Quality inspections performed by specialists in Beneficiary supplier factories, will not replace the usual inspections
and tests and will not diminish the responsibility of the contractor.
The manufacturer will give the beneficiary făUă technical documentation specialists.

Certificate of conformity
Certificate of compliance will be based on the following documents:
- certified testing of materials;
- certificates for bolts and nuts;
- test reports for any material sought;
- records of the zinc coating thickness; -certified Silicon zinc; -analysis of zinc.

2.1.7. Tolerances, warranties, REJECTIONS


Manufacturing tolerances, which cannot be cumulated:
a) the entire length of the item ± 1 mm
b) in the center of the hole to within ± 1 mm
c) in the center of the hole groups; ± 2 mm
d) following calibration ± 1 mm
e) the corresponding holes on the opposite faces of ± 1 mm profiles
f) the diameter of the holes specified on the
perforated (black) or where they were milling ± 0.3 mm
g) the perforated holes conicity measured between
the diameter of the holes specified on the perforatăşi the diameter of the holes on the other side (black)
shall not exceed ± 1.0 mm
h) îndoirile, the specified opening and closing edges ± 20/1000 flatness Tolerances allowed
on element length will not exceed a global deformation response of 1:1000, but Păsurat in the most
unfavourable point shall not exceed 1:600.
For items longer than 3 m, will measure the element deformation every 3 m in addition you item.
If the tolerances and special requests are not appropriate, the recipient may reject part of the aforesaid goods at the
expense of the contractor.
2.1.8. PACKING, DISPATCH and TRANSPORT
All packing, shipping and transport from the place of manufacture, in the places indicated by the
The beneficiary shall be made by the contractor. Merchandise damaged during these operations will be replaced at
the expense of the contractor.
All buloanele, nuts and other various parts will be shipped in crates that are resistant to manipulation, to prevent the
damage done can be caused by transport.
Each tensioning bolt will be shipped assembled together with the corresponding nut. Nuts will be smeared with oil
and fixed by screwing the entire threaded portion.
Where the contractor notice by material deprivation, it will take all measures to ensure that the missing
elements to be dispatched and replaced.
The contractor will be responsible before the beneficiary for any losses incurred or damage done during shipment of
materials.
2.2. Protecting the RUSTPROOF column

All the pillars are set out to be galvanized in hot fabricăşi if necessary for specific tips, paint with a coat of primer,
zinc and a coat of paint to be applied on site, after mounting pillars.
"Metal components of the pillars will be carried out in accordance with EN ISO 1461/2009.
"As a method of thermal protection against corrosion coverage of steel with zinc, with a long life (50-80 years),
predictable, practical făUă maintenance and repair costs, with a minimum impact on the environment.
2.2.1. ANTICORROSIVE by THERMAL GALVANIZING the PROCESS of HOT-DIP GALVANISING
After training operations surface, the parts are immersed in a molten zinc bath (approx. 450 ° C).
Common time sink is approximately 4-5 minutes but may be extended in the case of heavy parts, which have
a high thermal inertia, or where the zinc to penetrate into the interior spaces of the song. A bright and shiny look,
specifically hot-dip galvanized products. Excess zinc must be removed by appropriate methods that are supported by
the Client.
PREPARATION Of Surfaces
Surface preparation consists of three distinct stages: degreasing, pickling and fluxarea. Degreasing to remove fats,
oils and greases, machining and other impurities. The aim is to remove etching layers of rust, Ţunderul and splinters
on the processing of products.
Fluxare operation removes the last traces of oxide on the surface of products and allows the molten zinc to steel
cover.
The ZINC LAYER Obtained By HOT-DIP GALVANISING
The total thickness of the cover depends on: the quality of the steel, the bath composition, temperature and
duration, speed retrieve, etc. In reality, there is a divide between steel and zinc, but a gradual transition through a
series of layers of alloy, which ensures a the metallurgical bond.
Hot-dip galvanized coats centrifuged samples
These coatings involves a process of hot dip galvanizing of SR EN ISO 1461 and is used in the case of the zinc
coating of thermal threaded fasteners and other small parts. The minimum average thickness of coating in case
centrifugării are covered by EN ISO 1461.
SUBSEQUENT THERMAL TREATMENTS ZINC COATING
After "thermal treatments are not necessary. You can apply paint or powder coatings, for aesthetic appearance or
îmbunăWăŢirea to ensure high corrosion protection for highly aggressive environments.
ADERENЭA
Hot dip galvanizing coatings produced by thermal related metallurgical nature (align) with substrate, which make
them very tight.
HARDNESS
Wear resistance of coatings of zinc is higher than for the same thick paints, so it can be used successfully to parts
subject to wear through abrasion. "Thermal vs. electrolytic or painting", has a high resistance to vibrations.
REZISTENЭA CORROSION Resistance To ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION
Resistance to atmospheric corrosion provided by "heat depends on the thickness of the products, the quality of the
protective film that forms on the surface of zinc and corozivitatea atmosphere. The most important corrosive agent of
zinc is sulphur dioxide (SO2) from the heavily industrialized and urban environments. In SR EN ISO 9227 corrosion
test is presented in artificial atmospheres (tests in saline mist).
Corrosion Resistance In VARIOUS ENVIRONMENTS
Products in contact with chemical substances
In addition to being a amfoter metal is attacked by both acids and alkalis, for this reason it is not recommended to be
used in prolonged or frequently contact with these environments.
Products in contact with the materials of construction
Hot-dip galvanized parts have a slight trend of corrosion in contact with the mortar, plaster, grout or cement, fresh,
but ending with their strengthening.
A. MECHANISM Of Corrosion Protection Of Steel By HOT-DIP GALVANISING
Corrosion resistance of hot-dip galvanized surfaces is determined by two essential factors: the character
mechnical of electrochemical barierăşi of sacrifice at the layer.
THE CHARACTER OF BARRIER
The zinc layer deposited by hot-dip galvanising constitutes a barrier of protection through a mechanical insulation
substrate against environmental corrosive action.
Steel Protection By SACRIFICIAL Zinc Reaction
Due to the character of zinc electronegativ versus iron in Zn-Fezincul torque becomes anode, and corrodes
(slaughter), and steel from the substrate does not corrode as it becomes the cathode (cathode is protected).
Technical Specifications For "THERMAL STANDARDS
Basic technical specifications for thermal galvanizing coatings steel products covered by the standard EN ISO 1461:
"Thermal Coatings of zinc on iron parts and steel. Specifications and test methods. "
The requirements of SR EN ISO 1461 include cleaning and preparation of steel products, as well as the operation of
hot-dip galvanising. Information relating to the application of the zinc coating and thermal performance are contained
in EN ISO 14713, "protection against corrosion of iron and steel in construction. Zinc and aluminium coatings.
Guidelines ".
Table 1. SR EN୹ISO 1461: the minimum thickness of coating on parts that are not centrifuged.

Table 2. SR EN୹ISO 1461:


the minimum thickness of
coating on parts centrifuged.
All metal structures will be hot-dipped galvanized according to specific standards EN ISO 1461, international, or other
equivalent standards, which ensures a smooth, uniform curatăŞi galvanizing of 85 µm minimum thickness for the
table and bar And 55 µm for Screws And nuts. Wafers used for electroplating zinc must be in accordance with the
requirements of BS EN 1179.
After removing from zinc bath, zinc coating must be continuous, smooth, and free from imperfections such as spots,
sags and folds of fondant, ash or slag. Excessive thickness of zinc or breakable deposition as a result of the high level
of silicon or phosphorus in steel, which can increase the risk of degradation of depositing zinc and/or other
characteristics, are reasons as the final product to be rejected.
The final elements to be immersed in a solution with bichromate, or should be treated after galvanizing for protection
against oxidation during transportation and storage.
THE FASTENERS
In the technical documentation of the Assembly to be hot-dip galvanized will write: "hot-dip galvanising in
accordance with EN ISO 1461". Ыuruburile, nuts and washers including threaded portions must be galvanized to hot
and subsequently centrifuged. Fillets will be cleaned of surpluses, And should be kept away from all materials that
may corrode or stain ". Will not be used to clean the molds fillets than those of piuliŢelor. Nuts must be galvanized
And threaded with 0.4 mm larger, and fillets should be greased after galvanizing to allow screwing.

EXTERNAL APPEARANCE
"Heat is primarily used for protection against corrosion. The corresponding is specified in EN ISO 1461.
DUPLEX COATINGS
"Heat followed by painting or powder coating shall be called ' duplex coating". This applies when you want a greater
resistance to corrosion.

B. the design and execution of the PRODUCTS to BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED FILLING, VENTILATION and
DRAINING of ZINC
A good design products for thermal "requires:
1. The provision of technological holes to fill, and spill from surface preparation solutions and molten zinc, extracting
parts of these baths.
2. The discharge gas from sealed bins (airing) to avoid explosions.
3. Means of handling products (overcomes the fastening holes, etc.).
In the case of certain products, the initial holes intended for different purposes to meet the requirements of
ventilation and drainage; in other cases, however, we may be required to this end additional holes (holes in
technology). In order to ensure full protection, molten zinc must be able to flow freely across all product areas.
General principles x * ăurile for vent and drain must be as large as possible. The minimum diameter of the
holes is specified in table 1.
x * ăurile for vent and drain should be placed diagonally opposite some toward others, the upper and lower
points of the product, located in the position in which it is done ", must be visible from the outside, in order
to be easy and controlled for the safety of the product.
x The products which have interior compartments closed at the ends, to be secured to each other diagonally

opposite holes as close as possible to its ends. x Stiffening elements, gussets, despăUŢitoare etc., both indoor
and outdoor, must have cut corners, to allow the flow of molten zinc.
The DIMENSIONS and shape of PRODUCTS
The pieces to be hot-dip galvanized must take an appropriate form so as to permit a uniform deposition of zinc and
on all surfaces.
Products whose length depăşHşte size bathroom you can apply special techniques for their "in appropriate
circumstances.
FASTENERS
The "thermal Assembly threaded bodies, due to the thickness of the covering must be provided dimesionale
tolerances for inner and outer fillets. Ajustajele can be achieved either through burners with oversized dimensions
inside, or by thread subdimensionarea thread.
Deformations
Deformations of workpieces is due to the generally uneven distribution of domestic tension (mechanical, thermal,
structural). Deformation during thermal products of the zinc coating is determined by relaxation of internal tensions,
with their warming at temperature of hot-dip galvanising.
Tensions may be presumed or incurred due to welding, cold deformation and drilling (punching).
Minimization of residual tensions, measures may be taken at the stage of design, for example:
1. welding processes Control during manufacture.
2. The arrangement of the stitches of the weld. Their size must be minimal.
3. Avoid products with large variations section that can increase tension and deformations arising in hot-dip
galvanising bath.
Resistance
Resistance properties of steel construction will not be affected by the heat. "
WELDING
Slag from welding cannot be removed by ordinary cleaning procedures. Her presence may lead to the occurrence of
black spots, not after ".
To avoid this inconvenience we recommend using welding in protective gas, (i.e. M.I.G.).
Labelling and MARKING
Marking is carried out through: punching, before cold galvanizing; hooking up some plaques with the required
burning after galvanizing; sticking some labels with the required burning after galvanizing.
Protection Against HEAT ZINC COATING
If certain areas of steel should remain uncovered, this can be achieved through protection, with resistant to high
temperatures, grease or paint and other treatments.
ASSEMBLY
Hot-dip galvanized products can be assembled by screws (including Assembly through friction), welding, riveting and
bonding. It is well that bolted assemblies be made after ".
HANDLING PRODUCTS
Means of handling products are chosen depending on their shape and size. The products of small and medium-sized
technological holes shall be provided with 4 mm diameter that allow hooking into their mounts or attachments.
Baskets can be used in smaller pieces. Great products are welded clamping rings which are cut after galvanizing, that
area should be converted.
C. Check The Quality Of ZINC COATINGS DEPOSITED USING HEAT
Quality Assurance
In galvanizing process must comply strictly with the provisions of EN ISO 1461, and other quality standards.
Compliance with the requirements of these standards ensures a continuous coating thickness.
0ĂSURAREA LAYER THICKNESS
The thickness of the zinc layer is a decisive parameter, the length of anti-corrosive protection being proportional to

it, shall be determined in accordance with EN ISO 1461 and may be expressed in µm or g/m2.
Determination is made with destructive methods such as: method of determining the mass of zinc coating and
method of non-destructive tests, microscopic or that mention magnetic method. Non-destructive methods may be
used at any stage in the life cycle of the product.
THE APPEARANCE OF THE COVER
Layout variations are determined, more often than not, the characteristics of the substrate surface. In the acceptance
or rejection of hot-dip galvanized products to be taken into account, first, the resistance to corrosion and other
technical characteristics in the long term and not necessarily those of the exterior. 3ătarea and discoloration due
to rust
the steel thermally galvanized correctly, ensures corrosion protection for a long time, even though it may
sometimes exhibit rust stains or fading. In order to avoid rust stains, all components of a structure must be
as far as possible, as effectively protected against corrosion. screws, nuts and other fasteners, must also be hot-dip
galvanized. Welds shall be continuous, as far as possible, free from slag welding, in order to minimize the retention
of residues arising from the cleanup process. The structures must be designed in such a way as to prevent leakage of
water on other metals on steel galvanised using heat. Where it is necessary to weld after heat welded areas "should
be cleaned very well, and the zinc cover replacement. Surface Roughness
Standard SR EN ISO 1461 recommends that cover hot-dip galvanising to be smooth, rough areas făUă.
Bump and leaked zinc
Bumps and spills are caused by zinc neuniformitatea zinc Slough on the product when removing it from the bath of
hot-dip galvanising. Sharp peaks of excess zinc solidified, are unacceptable as they may present a hazard during
handling.
Table 3. The appearance of hot-dip galvanized coatings

3ătarea due to storage in humid environment


Stains that occur due to hot-dip galvanized products storage in wet conditions represent corrosion products of white
(White Rust) and/or dark spots. To prevent smearing, hot-dip galvanized products must be transported and stored
safely dry and well ventilated. If stored outdoors, the surfaces must not be in direct contact. Also the products should
not be placed in direct contact with the ground.
Surfaces with areas not covered
Occurrence causes of defects are: contamination of steel with paint, tar, dirt or other impurities that were not
removed in connection with the operations of training areas; the high content of aluminum in the bathroom,
repainting the steel lamination etc. If these areas were covered up to a maximum size of 5 mm, they will disappear
after a while due to the phenomenon of sacrificial protection of zinc, affecting a very small life span of the cover.
Products that have large surfaces areas covered are not accepted until after a new hot-dip galvanising.
Restoration Of DAMAGED COATINGS
Restoration shall apply in the following cases: areas not covered due to defects of galvanizing; local Scrubs arising
from faulty handling during transport and storage; welded affecting the area around the weld, mechanical processing
after zinc plating (cutting, Jăurire); as a result of mounting works on building sites. Restoration is done as quickly as
possible. Paints are used for repackaging high in zinc, zinc-based alloys (e.g. Zn-Sn, etc.) in the form of facultative or
powder. Restoration can be achieved and zinc applied by spraying. Areas showing defects, after reconditioning must
have a thickness of at least equivalent to the thickness of the original cover. According to SR EN ISO 1461, it is
recommended that the following methods for reconditioning:
x Brushing with a wire brush the affected area and applying layers of zinc-rich paint (with a brush or spray), to get a
thick coating that complies with the standard EN ISO 1461.
x Sand blasting cleaning the affected area and thermal spraying wire zinc purity 99.9% (according to EN 22063). A
zinc coating by thermal spraying of 100 µm provides protection against corrosion shall be equivalent to 85 µm
thermal galvanizing coating.
x The process of reconditioning with zinc-rich paint is the easiest to apply, in particular on the construction site.
According to SR EN ISO 1461 trap thickness on surfaces restored must be at least 30 µm greater than the thickness
of zinc coating thermal indicated in tables 2 and 3 of the standard.
Transport and storage of SPARE PARTS From the manufacturer-GALVANIZED x After galvanizing the pieces
are collected in the depozitatate package and the spaces covered and dry; x Loading (like downloading) will be done
using the straps of textile materials;
At your destination
x The inspection will be made at the time of reception pieces; x It will loosen some packages
to verify they are not affected by moisture;
x Parts shipped by truck or train will be protected with tarps. They will not stay parked for an extended period,
especially under conditions of high atmospheric moisture;
x Not be engaged in periods of strong storms or blizzards when water may penetrate among the packages with
pieces;
x Storage is done on wooden beams or rubber pads; x It will make regular inspections to
verify smearing due to moisture; In the case of white rust stains will be undertaken as
follows:
-Remove the affected parts of the area in which they were deposited;
-Renovation will be done in compliance with the standards in force (e.g. ASTM A780-93).
D. ASSEMBLE Steel PRODUCTS "Of THERMAL HEAT ASSEMBLY THREADED Sizes
screws, nuts and washers, the captive screws with a diameter greater than 8 mm may be Zack. Thanks to
the use of specialized equipment may be Zack also has a large variety of threaded parts. In the case of the
zinc coating of thermal Assembly, should be made for tolerances and additional processing operations because this
approach does not ensure the odds the tolerable. In the case of the ISO metric threads, both indoors and outdoors,
it is advisable to provide for a tolerance of about four times the thickness of the coating. Most of the elements of the
Assembly, with the exception of the zinc coating shall be subjected to piuliŢelor both on the inside and on the
outside. Nuts are zinchează in the rough. A zinc coating is carried out at a later date so you can be tightened by hand
or with a wrench on the bolt galvanized.
After galvanising protected by additional thread lubrication with a corrosion protection fluid. In all piuliŢăşurub,
nezincat thread of the nut is protected against corrosion as a result of contact with galvanized screw thread.
Finishing and surface appearance
Hot-dip galvanized fasteners typically have a light gray exterior appearance, but in the case of bolts and bolts of high
strength grey matte coverage may be due to the high silica content of steel used, which results in a higher reactivity
compared with molten zinc. Storage Hot-dip galvanized fasteners must be stored in dry, well ventilated places,
ventilated, under shed covered to minimize smearing. Avoid prolonged storage. Notation of the zinc coating
thermal technical documentation
Because it often confuses with "thermal" electrolytic in technical documentation shall clearly indicate: "heat" of the
Assembly is done in accordance with BS 7371: part 6:1998 ". high strength bolts
In general high strength bolts (grade 8.8 in accordance with part 1 of the ISO BS4395; equivalent to ASTM A325)
Zack făUă can heat. ISO grade 10.9 bolts (BS4395 part 2 or ASTM A490) require cleaning by sandblasting as
alternative treatment of surface preparation prior to the zinc coating.
THERMAL WELDING GALVANIZED Steel
On hot-dip galvanized steels can achieve quality welds ridicatăşi mechanical properties (tensile strength, bending,
fatigue, resilience, etc.) of these welds are almost identical, sometimes even better than welds made on the nezincat
steel. It is recommended the removal of zinc coating of the area to be welded, generally by grinding or blasting with
alice and direct welding on the base material. In areas where the zinc layer was removed to facilitate the welding and
in areas affected by the welding temperature must be achieved reconditioning. Before the overhaul, all remaining as
a result of degradation products should be removed from the welding area from adjacent areas sudatăşi.
RUST PREVENTION OF WELDS
All welds made on hot-dip galvanized products must be protected against rust, immediately after welding,
because then the surface is easy to ruginăşi the Treaty.
E. PAINTING GALVANIZED Steel HEAT
"Heat is a means for lasting protection against corrosion. "Heat followed by the application of paint or powder coating
is called" duplex "or" duplex "System.
This type of coating is used for:
x Obtaining coatings of different colors for Visual differentiation;
x Longer life cycle duration and the time of safety and exploitation of the coverage by delaying the reaction
between zinc and corrosive environment;
PREPARATION Of THERMALLY GALVANIZED Steel
Skip degreasinghot-dip galvanized surface proper is a frequent source of defects of duplex.
When steel is removed from hot-dip galvanising bath, has a clean, bright, shiny. With the passage of time, the
surface acquires a dark grey patina because zinc reacts with oxygen, water and carbon dioxide in the atmosphere,
forming a protective layer, but sturdy and stable. It is very adherent to the zinc. Patina formation takes time and the
exact time of training depends on the environment where it is exposed to cover hot-dip galvanising. Since the
majority of duplex layers applies when heat galvanised surface is located in this State, carbonates and oxide layer
simple, smooth the surface, must be removed by mechanical or chemical means.
RECOMMENDATIONS For PREPARATION Of Surfaces For PAINTING
Preparation of hot-dip galvanized surfaces of products must be carried out immediately after the best ", before the
surface to be contaminated in any way. This is not always feasible, preparing surfaces can be carried out later, but it
is important that it be properly cleansed in order to remove any trace contaminants such as oil, grease and dirt.
Cleaning operation must not leave any residue on the surface, and at the same time you don't have to Uămână
traces of damp spots. For removing adherent unusable residues are used for cleaning a scrub. Washing helps remove
cover soluble salts.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DYEING
All methods of coating used on steel galvanised using heat must be specified in the project and applied in accordance
with the recommendations of the paint manufacturer.
The choice of the paint system depends on both the application and the operating environment.
The SPECIFIC STANDARDS of the ZINC COATING THERMAL Romanian and European STANDARDS
SR EN ISO 1461:1999-Thermal Coatings of zinc on iron parts and steel. Specifications and test methods
SR EN ISO 14713:1999 ver. Eng.-Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in construction. Zinc and aluminium
coatings. Guidelines
EN 10244-2:2002-Wires and drawn steel products. Non-ferrous metallic coatings on steel wire.
Part 2: zinc or zinc alloy
EN 10326:2004 ver. Eng.-Table and strip steel construction coated heat continuously. Technical delivery conditions
Other standards for zinc coatings
EN 12329:2001 ver. Eng.-corrosion protection of metals. Electrochemical coatings of zinc on iron or steel with
additional treatment
SR EN ISO eng ver. 2063:2005.-thermal Spraying. Metallic coatings and other organic and inorganic coatings. Zinc,
aluminium and their alloys
Other standards
ISO 2178:1998-metallic non-magnetic Coatings on magnetic base metal. Measurement of the thickness of the
covering. Magnetic method
ISO-9001:2008 quality management Systems. Requirements
ISO 11124-3:2003-steel Media Preparation before applying paints and similar products. Specification for
metallic abrasive materials used in pickling. Part 3: Alice and alice pointed round of steel with high carbon content
ISO 11124-4:2003-steel Media Preparation before applying paints and similar products. Specification for metallic
abrasive materials used in pickling. Part 4: Alice RŢel, round cast low carbon
EN 23270:2003-paints and coatings and their raw materials. Temperatures and umidităŢi for conditioning and testing
EN 14399: PăUŢile 1-6:2005-high-strength Fasteners with bolts for Prestressed steel structures.
SR EN ISO 1460:1995-metallic Coatings. Zinc thermal coatings on ferrous metals. Gravimetric determination of mass
per unit area
SR EN ISO 1463:2004-metallic Coatings and oxide layers. Measurement of the thickness of the covering. Microscopic
method
SR EN ISO 2064:2004-metallic Coatings and other organic and inorganic coatings. Definitions and principles
concerning the thickness of Păsurarea
SR EN ISO 12944:1998-paints and varnishes. Protection systems for coating steel structures against corrosion.
BRITISH STANDARDS
BS 7371: Part 6:1998-Coatings on fasteners-specification for heat galvanizing coatings BS 3382: Part 2:1961-
electrolytic threaded components ".
BS 7773:1995-cleaning and preparation of metallic surfaces.
PD 6484:1979-Corrosion at bimetallic contacts
BS 7079:1994-preparation of steel surfaces before application of layers
BS 4395:1 Share and 2:1969-high strength Bolts
2.2.2. PAINTING METAL STRUCTURES
Purpose
This Specification refers to the manufacture and supply of solvents, paints and grundurilor, in order to
achieve protection pillars by galvanized coating in accordance with the Operational Procedure for preventing
and Combating Corrosion in Installations of electricity Transport TEL-07.21.
Will be alpicată and music on the pillars which are galvanized located at the crossing of certain waters (over 100 km
in length-for example, Baer, IalomiŢa, etc), public roads of national interest and the pillars that exceed 45 m, and the
designated columns beneficiary for the purpose of jalonării for operation.
Contractor will comply with all regulations in force regarding the manufacture and delivery of products and will
follow all the indications given by the beneficiary.
Standards and recommendations
All material must comply with the force of the following standards:
- SR ISO 2409:2007. Paints and varnishes. With grid;
- SR EN ISO 2808:2007. Paints and varnishes. Determination of film thickness;
- STAS 10166/1-77-corrosion Protection of steel constructions-ground mechanical surfaces.
- STAS 10702/1-1983. Protection against corrosion of steel construction above ground. Protective coatings.
General technical conditions.
- SR EN ISO 8504-1:2002. Steel media preparation before applying paints and similar products. Surface
preparation methods. Part 1: General principles.
- SR EN ISO 8501-1:2007 and ISO 8501-2:2007. Preparation of steel surfaces before application of paints and
assimilated products. -Visual assessment of cleaning a surface-part 1; -Part 2
Requirements concerning the products which make up the rustproof protection system
Rustproof Protection Products will be accompanied by a certificate of approval issued by the MDRAP technical
data sheet and will include:
- Type of product (industrial or civil engineering);
- The degree of preparation of metallic support;
- The drying time of film (hours);
- Reacoperire period of time (hours);
- Theoretical specific consumption (g/m2/layer) and factor;
- How to apply (brush, roller, spray gun with air);
- The minimum thickness of the layer (µm/layer) and number of layers;
- Opinion of a laboratory in Romania on the toxicity of the product; Paint layers applied successively must be
compatible.
The tenderer will present data on:
- estimated lifetime rustproof protection on the basis of laboratory tests;
- cranes, specialized in carrying out the work;
- references to the beneficiaries regarding the quality of the work performed and corrosion behaviour of
protections;
- Păsuri special environmental protection;
- Păsuri special safety and fire prevention.
Rules and methods for checking the quality of corrosion protection
Check the quality of protective coatings is done in the presence of a representative of the beneficiary in
accordance with the provisions of the standards and the specific technical requirements:
- checking the surface appearance after mechanical preparation according to SR EN ISO 8504-1:2002.
- degreasingverification of the surface after mechanical preparation according to SR EN ISO 2808:2007 and
CNTEE procedure TRANSELECTRICA TEL-07.21 Rev. 01; - verification of protective coating product: a)
Declaration of conformity according to SR EN ISO 17050-1
b) The warranty in accordance with the rules of the company;
c) The look of raw product in package cf. Procedure "procedure for checking the quality of coatings
protective painting "
- verification by non-destructive methods of appearance and thickness of each layer dry applied according to
SR EN ISO 2808:2007 and "quality control procedure protective cover painting"
- verifying adherence to the metallic support layers according to the procedure of the TRANSELECTRICA TEL
CNTEE 07.21 Rev. 01.
The checks provided for in this chapter shall be made by the contractor in the presence of the beneficiary (the
lack thereof does not exempt the contractor from 2221) and draw up the minutes which must be presented at the
reception of the preliminary work, namely:
- records hidden works in conjunction with quality materials and compliance with the provisions referred to
above;
- reports of findings for other checks.
For the layers of protection that will apply on site, must be drawn up records for each hidden works coat of
primer or paint before being coated with the next layer. Warranties, guarantees post
The warranty term will be in accordance with the contractual terms. Beneficiary reserves the right, after the
expiration of the warranty, in case of repeated failings to request the presence of a delegate of the contractor with
which to analyze the causes and to determine appropriate remedial action.
Storage of materials required for protection by painting
Storing materials is done in dry, airy spaces, protected from the action of bad weather and solar radiation away
from the source of fire or heating at temperatures between0C 5-25.

Flammability class for each product fixed under the PEE is the 118/83 recorded in the technical Specification.
Storage is done in perfect watertight containers which will maintain the integrity of the original carefully
through the careful handling, rugged făUă. In storage spaces to remain perfect cleaning, by removing prompt
of any accidental spills, this one featuring in many cases endangered by self-ignition through oxidation. Storage
packages will run ordered batches, so consumption of products to be able to run in the chronological order of dates
of manufacture.
It will strictly respect the indications of the incompatibilities between the various categories of products according
to Technical Specification and nationality labels, thus avoiding storage in the same room. During the period of placing
in storage shall ensure in these spaces an adequate air circulation by mechanical or natural ventilation which
maintain in perpetuity an atmosphere free from the risk of the formation of explosive mixtures or pollution.
Transport
The transport is done with appropriate means, in accordance with the rules of law in indicated by force, secured
in order to prevent exposure to solar radiation products and adverse weather conditions, while respecting the legal
regulations in force concerning transport of inflammable substances and harmful, as well as those in the case of
products purchased from import.
It will strictly respect the indications of the incompatibilities between the various product groups peliculogene and
accessories, according to technical specifications and nationality labels on denying transportation of these products
together in the same middle of transport. Fire Protection
In order to avoid accidents during transport, handling and storage of products, will take the following measures,
which are minimal:
1. Rapid Removal of vapours in the atmosphere and the possibility of recurrence by avoiding the discharges, water-
tight closure of the packaging and rapid removal of leaking.
2. Avoidance of ignition sources by:
- the smoking ban, sources of open fire, sparks, etc.
- the ban on the use of special transport cars to transport dirt inflammable substances;
- the ban on the use of improvisation in the mechanical and electrical installations;
- the execution, operation and verification of electrical installations according to the rules of functioning of the
Republican security in areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere;
- use only tools and tools from materials that do not produce sparks or friction fire.
3. Eliminating the possibilities of occurrence of static electricity by:
- ban the use of synthetic îmbrăFămintei generating electric charges particularly dry weather;
- maintaining floors in periodic cleaning and wetting with water;
- earthing equipment with echipotenŢiale and bridges of the receptacles, vessels, pipelines, reservoirs and
vehicular facilities, storage of flammable substances;
- ensuring a continuous jet form and not in the form of rain at pouring flammable substances;
4. Collecting residues, oily rags, cotton, paper, imbued with flammable substances in receptacles containing water, to
avoid their self-ignition.
5. Equipping of means of transport, the storage and use of these substances with appropriate means and facilities
fire, based on the nature of the products stored or transported and specifications technical specifications related to

each product relating to firefighting.


2.3. Technical specifications and characteristics of MATERIALS for the LINE CONDUCTORS and
accessories

2.3.1. purpose of DELIVERY

This specification refers to the manufacture and supply of the active conductor (ACSR/TW 350F/60) and their
accessories (clamps repair clamps, bore, clamps, vibration dampers) and protective conductors ( făUă fiber optics),
160/95 95 AlOl and Ol (you can use 170/95 and equivalent construction). Contractor will comply with all regulations
in force regarding the manufacture and delivery of products and will follow all the indications given by the Recipient
and by the competent authorities.
2.3.2. STANDARDS
- SR CEI 61089/1996/A1:1999 -Conductors for overhead lines with round wires pre-wired in
concentric layers.
- SR CEI 60889/2002 -aluminum Wire-drawn Cold-hardening in hard for overhead conductors.
- SR 60888/1994 ONES-galvanised steel Wire for conductors, II.
- EN 50183/2000-alloy steel aluminium-magnesium-silicon for overhead conductors.
- Technical report CEI 20-/1986-steel-aluminium Conductors.
- EN 10.002/1-2/2002-trying to thrust and coating.
- SR ISO 7801/93-alternating bending test of steel wire.
- STAS 1750/90-trying to twist the wire.
- STAS 2172/84-thrust test of steel cables.
- Recommendations for evaluation of duration of exploitation of the wires overhead power lines-
CIGRE-CS Document 22-04 GT-ELECTRA nr. 63/in March 1979.
- THOSE 60826/96-loads and loads of power lines.
- SR 61089/1997 ONES-aluminum uninsulated Conductors for overhead electrical power lines.
- 3 RE-I 220/98-instructions on analysis of technical condition of active and protective conductors, on
test-pieces taken from the Duke of 110-750 kV in use.
- EN 12330/2002-metallic Coatings. Electrochemical coatings of zinc or cadmium. Technical conditions
of quality.
- STAS 917/84-Vaseline technique.
- STAS 5674/1-86-spools for wire, pipes and cables. Types and main parameters.
- SR 562/94-consistent general purpose Grease.
- IEC 61284/1998-overhead lines. Requirements and tests for fittings.
- IEC 61854/1998-overhead lines. Requirements and tests for spacers.
- IEC 61897/1998-overhead lines. Requirements and tests for Stockbridge type antivibratori.
- SR 60889/1994 ONES will replace THOSE with SR 60889/2002
- EN 50182:2004-Conductors for overhead lines-Round wire concentric lay stranded conductors

- EN 50189:2007-Conductors for overhead lines-Zinc coated steel wires


- EN 60889:2002-Hard-drawn aluminum wire for overhead line conductors
- EN 61232:2002 | A11:2002-Aluminium-clad steel wires for electrical purposes (IEC 61232)
- IEC 60468 Method of measurement of resistivity of metallic materials
- EN 61395:2000-Overhead electrical conductors-Creep test procedures for stranded conductors
SR-61394:2000-THOSE Characteristics of greases of aluminium, aluminium alloy and steel conductors-bare EN 50182
for conductive tests (table 5, chap. Tests)

2.3.3. Technical description

2.3.3.1. active Conductors

ACSR/TW 350F/60 mm2 Active conductors used for type II


are aluminium/steel rope
(356/60-A1F/14EHSA)
aluminizat) due to the following main
Total (Section mm-2) 414.69
characteristics:
-Overall diameter (mm) 25.15 Table 2.3.3.1.1 ACSR conductor
Features/TW 350/60 mm2
-Linear Weight kg/km (negresat) 1,423

-Nominal Section Of 1 (mm2) 356 The innermost layer of the conductor will
be greased with Vaseline technique
-Rated steel Section (mm2) made of 59.69
artificial drip point 120 ° C minimum (STAS
14EHSA steel wires.
917-84).
-Electrical resistance at 200 C 0.079 The conductor will be composed of wires
(ohm/km) (wires) corrugated metal.
Aluminium wires (A1) of the conductors
-Breaking load (KN) 160 will be the type of hard drawn (1350-H19)
and must comply with the provisions of EN
-Module Of elasticity (daN/mm2) 7563
60889 ONES.
-Coefficient of dilation conductor 1, 8699x10-5 Steel wires of the heart active conductors
(1/C) type (S2A) 14EHSA steel must comply with
the provisions of EN 50540 regarding
-Minimum allowable thermal Current 670 material and rustproof protection.
(A), Aluminium layer must have a minimum
conductivity of 61.2% IACS. Aluminium will be of type hard drawn (for a maximum operating temperature of 80-90
degrees Celsius).
Aluminum used must be of the highest commercial purity not less than 99.5%.
The process of wiring will be done in accordance with IEC 61089 SR and the outer layer will be wrapped to the right.

The conductor and its accessories must operate for long periods of time at a temperature of 70 ° C, făUă
deterioration.
Type tests and batch will follow the requirements of EN 50182 IEC 61089.
2.3.3.1.2 table. Technical data for active conductor
Annex technical data for active conductor Of
double circuit 400 kV II Npp-Ahmed
ITEM DESCRIPTION ESTABLISHMENT TECHNICAL DATA
OF DATA TECHNICAL
MEASURE REQUESTED GUARANTEED
1.0 Manufacturer - -
1.1 Type - ACSR/TW

1.2 Code -

1.3 Details and materials standards SR CEI 61089


- Otel EN 50540
- Aluminum EN 60889
2.0 Dimensions and mechanical
characteristics
2.1 Structure (steel/aluminum) - 19/28

2.2 Diameter aluminium wires mm 4.02 equivalent

2.3 Diameter steel EHSA GOING 14 of mm 2.00


fira
2.4 Overall diameter mm 25.15

2.5 Aluminium area mm2 356

2.6 Steel area mm2 59.69

2.7 Roll area mm2 350f/60

2.8 Nominal breaking load kN > 160

2.9 The initial minimum elasticity GPA -

2.10 The initial maximum elasticity GPA -


module
2.11 Elasticity module Dan/mm2 11458

2.12 The creep at 150C GPA -

2.13 The coefficient of linear expansion E-6/0C 0,1447

2.14 Electrical resistance at 200C ohm/km 0.079

2.15 Report wiring layer (max./min.)


- Heart of steel
lower layer
upper layer 16-26
- Aluminum 14-22
lower layer 10-16
upper layer 10-14
2.16 The table of conductor Kg/km 1432

3.0 Transport

3.1 The length of the conductor on m -


the drum
3.2 Diameter of flansei mm -

3.3 Total width mm -

3.4 Drum diameter mm -

3.5 Axial inlet mm Max 102

3.6 The diameter of the spindle hole - -

3.7 Material mm Wood


3.8 The mass of the empty drum kg -

3.9 The thickness of the neural crest mm -


cells

4.0 Standards
4.1 Manufacturing - SR CEI 61089
SR EN 62219
EN 50540
Annex technical data for active conductor Of
double circuit 400 kV II Npp-Ahmed
ITEM DESCRIPTION ESTABLISHMENT TECHNICAL DATA DATA
OF REQUESTED TECHNICAL
MEASURE GUARANTEED
EN 60889

4.2 - ISO 9001


Quality assurance
5.0 Installation Exterior

Test ACSR conductor/TW 350F/60


Test type Batch test Din EN
50182
clause
Conductor The condition of the surface of conductor x x 6.4.1
Diameter of conductor x x 6.4.2
Checking preserve position of wires x x 6.4.3
The ratio of coiling and winding wires x x 6.4.4

The number and type of yarn x x 6.4.5


Mass per unit length x x 6.4.6
Traction curve-elongaŢie x - 6.4.7
Breaking strength x - 6.4.8
Aluminum Diameter x x 6.5.2
wires type
Breaking strength x x 6.5.2
A1
Resistivity x x 6.5.2
Coiling test x x 6.5.2
Welding test for large crossing-disallowed x - 6.5.2

Yarn Diameter x x 6.5.2


RŢel
Breaking strength x x 6.5.2
aluminizat
14EHSA type Request at 1% elongation x x 6.5.2
The elongation of the test, or twisting x x 6.5.2
Coiling test x x 6.5.2
Protective cover x x 6.5.2
all of these tests must be carried out before the winding conductors

Other features of the expansion coefficient 1:23.0 x 10-6 1/0 C module of elasticity 55 final GPa Other
characteristics of steel wire 14EHSA: 11.9 expansion coefficient x 10-6 1/0C module elesticitate 174
final GPa

Type tests and batch will follow the requirements of EN 50182 IEC 61089.
Table 2.3.3.1.3 type tests and batch for active conductor ACSR/TW
The conductor is manufactured with yarn, such as hotel 14EHSA do not require greasing the
rejection Criteria
The Offeror must present its technical offer all features resulting from the tests. Failure to comply with the
requirements of the tests constitute reason to reject type for the technical offer. Constitute grounds for rejection of
the offer to the lack of any of the conditions laid down for tests and annexes with technical data. If the values shown
and guaranteed by the technical offer shall not be complied with during the test batch of Recipient will reject
unsuitable batches at the expense of the contractor.

2.3.3.2, of protective Conductors.


Leah will use the following types of conductors:
- AlOl 160/95 mm2 conductor (or constructive version 170/95)
- Conductor Ol 95 mm2
- 160/95 mm2 conductor OPGW
- 95 mm2 conductor OPGW
Plug type OPGW (160/95 mm2 and 95 mm2) will have 36 optical fibres of type G655NZDSF. Technical requirements
for protective conductors are presented in chapter OPGW 2.7. of this documentation.
Leah designed protective conductor of Ol 160/95 mm2 will take the characteristics given in the table below:
2.3.3.2.1 table Features conductor of Ol 160/95 mm2
Technical data

Required Guaranteed

-Total nominal Section (mm2) 260,2

-Overall diameter (mm) 20,75

-Linear Weight kg/km 1218


(negresat)

-Nominal Section of aluminium 163,3


(mm2 )

-Rated steel Section 97,03


(mm2)

-Electrical resistance at 200 C 0,1788


(ohm/km)

-Breaking load rating 14084


(d)

-Module of elasticity (daN/mm2) 10401,3

-Coefficient of expansion (1/C) 1.54 x 10-5

-Short-circuit current of short 16,5


duration, minimum 1 sec., (kA)

2.3.3.2.2. Table of type Tests and batch for protection type 160/95 conductor mm2 Of Ol
Test 160/95 Of conductor mm2/Ol
Test type Batch test Din EN
50182
clause
Conductor The condition of the surface of x x 6.4.1
conductor Rejection
Diameter of conductor x x 6.4.2 criteria
Checking preserve position of wires x x 6.4.3 The
The ratio of coiling and winding x x 6.4.4 Offeror
wires
must
The number and type of yarn x x 6.4.5
present its
Mass per unit length x x 6.4.6 technical
Traction curve-elongaŢie x - 6.4.7 offer all
Breaking strength x - 6.4.8 features
Aluminum Diameter x x 6.5.2 resulting
wires type
Breaking strength x x 6.5.2 from the
A1
Resistivity x x 6.5.2 tests.
Coiling test x x 6.5.2 Failure to
Welding test for large crossing- x - 6.5.2 comply
disallowed
with the
Yarn Diameter x x 6.5.2
RŢel
Breaking strength x x 6.5.2
galvanized
type Request at 1% elongation x x 6.5.2
S1A
The elongation of the test, or x x 6.5.2
twisting
Coiling test x x 6.5.2
Protective cover x x 6.5.2
Greasing Mass per unit length x x 6.6.1
Drip point x x 6.6.2

All tests must be carried out before înfă è hating the conductor
requirements of the tests constitute grounds for rejecting the type of supply. Constitute grounds for rejection of the
offer to the lack of any of the conditions laid down in the annexes for tests and data.
If the values shown and guaranteed by the technical offer shall not be complied with during the test batch of
Recipient will reject unsuitable batches at the expense of the contractor.

Leah designed protective conductor Ol 95 mm2 will have the characteristics given in the table below.
Table 2.3.3.2.3. Features conductor Ol 95 mm2

Test 95 mm2 conductor Ol Table


Technical data
Test type Batch test Din EN 2.3.3.2.4.
50182 clause Type tests
Required Guaranteed
Conductor The condition of the surface of x x 6.4.1 and batch
for
-Section (mm2)conductor 93,29
Diameter of conductor x x 6.4.2 protective
-Overall diameter (mm) preserve position
12,50 of wires conductor
Checking x x 6.4.3
-Linear Weight The ratio of coiling and
kg/km winding wires
0,750 x x 6.4.4
(negresat)
The number and type of yarn x x 6.4.5
-Electrical resistance at 200 C 2,7
(ohm/km) Mass per unit length x x 6.4.6
Traction curve-elongaŢie x - 6.4.7
-Breaking load rating 12054
Breaking strength x - 6.4.8
(d)
Yarn Diameter x x 6.5.2
-Module
RŢelof elasticity (daN/mm2) 19600
Breaking strength x x 6.5.2
galvanized
-Coefficient
type of expansion
Request at(1/C) 1.15 x 10-5
1% elongation x x 6.5.2
S1A
The elongation
-Short-circuit current of short of the10,0
test, or twisting x x 6.5.2
duration, minimum (kA)
Coiling test x x 6.5.2
Protective cover x x 6.5.2
Greasing Mass per unit length x x 6.6.1
Drip point x x 6.6.2

All tests must be carried out before înfă è hating the conductor
type Ol 95 mm2

Rejection criteria
The Offeror must present its technical offer all features resulting from the tests. Failure to comply with the
requirements of the tests constitute reason to reject type of supply. Constitute grounds for rejection of the offer to
the lack of any of the conditions laid down in the annexes for tests and data. If the values shown and guaranteed by
the technical offer shall not be complied with during the test batch of Recipient will reject unsuitable batches at the
expense of the contractor.

2.3.3.3. Accessories for conductors.


2.3.3.3.1. bore Clamps

All clips will be bore by pressing the corresponding dimensions of the active conductors and protection.
For steel-aluminum wire clamps from the bore will be executed by two highlights:
-track for the sheath of aluminum thus regarded conductor; -the song for steely heart thus regarded
conductor.
Song for steel heart is thus regarded as protecting electrolytic galvanizing anti-corrosive according to SR EN
12330/2002 (thickness of zinc layer minimum-maximum 25 micrometres 36 micrometres).
Parts made of aluminum does not protect anti-corrosive.
It is recommended that the Assembly should use neutral grease to avoid chemical reactions between păUŢile
of aluminium and steel ones.
Thus regarded conductor runs with the help of a hydraulic or through a blast using tanks with hexagonal section.
Clips of the bore should ensure a sliding load of the conductor in clamp at least 95% of the breaking load of the
conductor at a temperature of 700 C, the maximum operating temperature of the conductor.
Terminal contact surfaces must be free of kinks, derived from the făUă machining trace of oxides or other metals,
which could cause damage to the conductor or the imperfect realization of an electrical contact.
Electrical resistance of the clamp must not be greater than the resistance of the conductor with a length equal to the
length of the bore lever.
The maximum value allowed for the conductor in question bore clamp heating should not exceed the maximum
permissible conductor heating.
Every opening of the line is allowed a single bore on each conductor of a phase. Is not allowed thus regarded
conductor passing through openings in national roads, telecommunication lines, etc. (according to the NTE
003/04/00).
If înnădirii must be borne in mind that the distance from the place of înnădirii to the point of attachment of the
conductor in clamp support or stretching may not be less than 5 m.
2.3.3.3.2. vibration Dampers
Vibration dampers used will be of type 4-Stockbridge, frequencies, and will mount on both the active conductors and
the protective. Frequencies will be specified in the manufacturer's documentation.
Mounting distances will be choose taking into account the type of conductor and tracŢiunile.
Technical specifications for vibration dampers type Stockbridge
These specifications contain data relating to the manufacture and provision of silencers vibration frequencies of
Stockbridge 4 resonance in the range 3-120 Hz.
Contractor will comply with these specifications and exactly within its tender will include study of the
vibration of the efficiency of the manufacturer demonstrating that the requirements of these specifications
are complied with in full.
Functional requirements
Active and protective conductors shall be protected against vibrations (oscillations of small wavelengths) of type
antivibratoare Stockbridge.
Technical requirements
The number of antivibratoare will be proposed by the contractor for each type of conductor And will be justified
by the manufacturer through laboratory tests.
Efficiency will be confirmed by the manufacturer through the study of the efficiency of the vibrations (Damping
study) occurring concomitantly with rolling winds 1 ... 7 m/s. Antivibratoarele will mount as follows:
- on the active conductor,
- on the armour rods for protection type OPGW wire, protective conductor-classic.
The design of antivibratoarelor related to each type of Stockbridge conductor will be taken into consideration the
characteristics of active conductors of the protective conductor And conductor of the OPGW from appropriate
technical specifications.
The contractor will ensure that calculations request alternate bending of conductor shall be limited to an amount
not exceeding 150 µm/m and that the life of OPGW conductor shall be at least 50 years.
Standards and prescriptions
Vibration dampers to be offered comply with the provisions of standard EN 61897:2003-"Requirements and Tests
for Stockbridge Type Aeolian Vibration Dampers" (IEC 61897).
EN 61284:2000-overhead lines. Prescriptions and tests for accessories (IEC 61284).
Materials used in manufacturing
All components must be shock absorber made of Stockbridge, in order to have a good reaction in time under the
influence of environmental factors and mechanical and electrical applications.
Components made of unalloyed steel or cast iron must be protected against corrosion by hot-dip galvanizing
atmospheric, with the average thickness of the zinc coating in accordance with the standards used, but not less than
86.
Fastening clamps will fabricate aluminum alloy, with maximum 0.1% copper.
Fasteners (bolts, nuts, washers) made of steel sections, it protects against corrosion, electrolytic galvanizing with zinc
thickness on average of at least 43 mm. Will be preferred solutions will use fasteners made of stainless steel or
aluminum alloy of high strength. Cable carriers will be of type string, with galvanized steel wires. From the
manufacturers of the product as the optimal structure is made up of 19 threads. Quality control
1. type Tests
These checks shall be carried out in order to determine the characteristics of the design. Each of the tests
laid down shall apply, as a rule, three specimens of each kind. It is mandatory that all specimens tested to
comply with the conditions of the test.
1.1. Visual inspection
Visual inspection consists of Visual examination of specimens shall be tested, in order
Observing compliance with the project from the point of view of the manufacturing process, of the forms and the
roughness of surfaces.
1.2. Verification of the three-dimensional materials used and the masses
Check for all sizes, comparing them with those projects, if the deviations observed fall into the tolerances.
Checking of materials used is done by comparing the material specifications and certificates acquired quality related
with the project specifications.
1.3. Verification of the protection against corrosion
This check must be done for all components made of unalloyed steel or cast iron. It is Păsoară by means of a
specialized zinc layer thickness on different components of the silencer, comparing the minimum values specified in
standard coverage considered.
1.4. Test clip of slip on the wire
On a stretch of wire with a length of 2 m, lying with a thrust of 20% of the nominal thrust, the silencer is fitted,
tested by the screw of the clamp when considered in the project. The application of longitudinal forces gradually
increasing up to 10 d/s, up to a maximum of 2.5 kN, which is maintained for 60 s, must not appear (1 mm is
considered gliding). Force 2.5 kN limit is considered to be minimal in the case of such tests.
1.5. Test tightening of the screw clamp
This check is done staging a portion of the clamp on the conductor. Must not occur warping or cracking of the clip
and no damage to the conductor in the contact zone in case the gathering with a time greater than 10% than the
one specified in the project.
Further tightening moment will be increased up to twice the value of the project or up to the maximum amount
provided by the manufacturer of the Assembly bodies, taking into account the lower of these two values. Does not
appear to be damaged and any other thread păUŢi clamp components.
1.6. pulling Test of the cable carriers from counter-weights
The application of a force between coaxial gradually counterweight, with a maximum speed of 100 N/s, reaching a
value of 5 kN and maintaining this value, 60, must not place slips (1 mm is considered gliding).
1.7. Test slip clamp on cable carrier
The application of a coaxial cable between the carrier forces and clamp with the gradual increase of a maximum of
100 N/s, until the total amount of 1.5 kN and a duration of 60 s keeping this force should not produce any sliding (1
mm is considered gliding).
1.8. dynamic profiling
It is carried out on the table, a vibrant speed 0.1 m/s, for the range of frequencies considered, ranging from 0.18/d
and 1.4/d, d being the conductor diameter, in m, with continuous variation in frequency or with variation in its steps.
Measure the amplitude of the response force, this force phase shift toward speed and power dissipation as a function
of frequency.
In accepting the comparison of values of power and phase-increment disipate, at frequencies of resonance with the
values imposed limit (lower and upper).
In variant B, the acceptance results of these tests are considered only as a reference to compare with test results.
1.9. The evaluation of efficiency of depreciation
It is considered that this assessment can be done by three methods: laboratory testing, in-situ testing and
analytical.
In the first method, used by most manufacturers, it is used for stands such tests, with lengths of wire free at least 30
m. Mount antivibratorul on the wire Accordingly, the conductor being vibrated by a vibrant Fătre table with the
appropriate power so as not to exceed the value of 150 microstrain (simple level) for any frequency of vibration.
Measure the maximum transmitted power table vibrant conductor, the power dissipated in the absorber, the
amplitude of vibration of the silencer, and the amplitude of the vibration amplitude bending wire. It is recommended
that these measurements to be made for three values of amplitude of vibration of double wire namely: 33/f, 67/100/f
and f in mm (f-frequency, in Hz). Damper type tested could be accepted if the power dissipated is higher than the
power induced by wind along the length of the conductor considered, depending on the mode of distribution of the
damper opening. It can be considered in such an assessment and intake that may bring him the balance of energies
and disipate induced energy dissipated by the wire in OpenDNS, especially at higher frequencies, it gets told.
Two method can describe more precisely the behavior of dampers under real conditions, but no conclusive results are
required in relatively long periods of observation, in various weather conditions. Is pursuing at least two openings of
different wavelengths as possible. Record the wind speed, its direction, its turbulence, vibration amplitude, amplitude
of bending or deforming the conductor clamp support.
Acceptance of the shock absorber is based on comparing the amplitude of bending the conductor or its deformation
with reference values.
The third method, the analytical, is based on the application of algorithms and computer programs showing that were
previously applied, yielding results that were compared with results obtained by one of two methods already
described.
Such acceptance shall be made only if the amplitude of bending or distorting its conductor, resulting from the
calculation, reference values are lower.
1.10. fatigue test
Clauza Test Stockbridge damper type
din EN Test type Individual test. Routine test
61897 Batch test There
7.1 Visual examination x x a are two
possible methods of testing, the first consisting of a continuous frequency scan, in the area of interest for 108
mountain Bik, at a rate of 0.1 m/s (simple level) and the second consisting of 107 from its maximum frequency the
resonance of the silencer, the amplitude of vibration of the mass must be 0.5 mm (simple amplitude).
Acceptance may be considered only if all specimens tested to satisfy the fatigue tests mentioned in 1.6 and 1.7, 1.8
to retestării results do not differ by more than 20% compared with previous results on the resonance frequencies
and the values of these frequencies to disipate powers, Messenger cable is not damaged and when tightening the
clamp residual is greater than 50% from baseline.
1.11. determination of voltage discharge corona
These tests conducted in camera obscurăşi we recommend using glasses with optimum performance with minimum
7x50 or amplificatorilor image amplification factor of at least 40,000, according to THOSE 61284. Voltage of corona
discharge must be maximum phase voltage service multiplied by 1.1.
1.12. The determination of the level of disruptive voltage
According to the same standard, the voltage level, disruptive 61284 is determined at a voltage of phase at least equal
to the phase voltage multiplied by the factor 1.2, the measured value must be less than the value of 50 dB/
microV/300 ohms.
2. Check batch
For each consignment to be delivered must be carried out tests at 1.1. 1.7 except at 1.4. on a number of specimens,
depending on the size of the lot. Thus, the number of specimens must be 2 lots, for up to 300 pieces, 4, for
consignments of 300-2000 pieces, 8, for batches of 2000-5000 pieces and 12 for batches of more than 5000 pieces.
From these tests will be attended by representatives of beneficiary and the designer
If as an antivibrator tests do not correspond, respectively, to fix a new test antivibrator. If the latter is not reuşHşte
or where two specimens do not correspond, the lot is rejectează, being sent to analizăşi sorting, grading new low
batch being subjected to batch testing triple number specimens.
Table 2.1 Tests required
7.2 Checking the dimensions, material and x x
weight
7.3 Corrosion protection test (if applicable) x x

7.4 Simulated testing a a a


7.5 -Sliding clamp Test on conductor x a

7.6 -Breaking the bulonului test clip1) x x

7.7 -Tightening of bolt Test clip x x

7.8 -Pulling Test of the cable carriers from x x


counter-weights
7.9 -Slip test of cable clamp carrier x x

7.10 -Corona voltage Tests and radio x


interference
7.11 Efficiency of depreciation
- Dynamic profiling x a
- Evaluation of efficiency of depreciation x
7.12 -Fatigue Tests x

-
The accompanying technical documentation of the offer
This will be mandatory within the technical tender.
Technical comparison of tenders, the Tenderer shall submit the following documentation:
a A complete set of test papers; a The list of references for the type of damper provided;
a Information from major users concerning the behaviour of the dampers supplied;
a The complete table of technical data appropriate to the type of damper provided, including the
calculation of the total number of vibration dampers required, which must be less than or equal to
the quantities of works (in a Open under 350 m two dampers, one at each opening).
Rejection criteria
The Offeror must present its technical offer all features resulting from the tests. Failure to comply with the
requirements of the tests constitute reason to reject type of supply. Constitute grounds for rejection of the offer to
the lack of any of the terms and conditions prescribed by the standards of THOSE 61897 and 61284.
If the values shown and guaranteed by the technical offer shall not be complied with during the tests, the recipient
will reject unsuitable batches at the expense of the contractor. Security, security, facilities
The warranty term will be in accordance with the contractual terms. Beneficiary reserves the right, after the expiry of
the guarantee, in the event of repeated shortcomings, to request the presence of a delegation of
Contractor/Manufacturer with which to analyze the causes and to determine appropriate remedial action.
The contractor has the obligation of compliance with all the provisions of the contract.
Delivery, transportation and storage
The shock absorber is made in packaging boxes made of wood, so as to provide protection from bumps and bruises.
Delivery of dampers will do batch job. Packages can be of type, etc., and will ensure adequate protection during
transport and storage and appropriate handling.
/ăzile are cases during transport and storage, on up to 4 lines, where there are arranged and up to 6 rows when the
crates are palletised.
All packing, shipping and transport from the place of manufacture, in the places indicated by the client, will be made
by the contractor. Merchandise damaged during these operations will be replaced at the expense of the contractor.
The following information will be written clearly with paint on each package:
- Contract title and reference number;
- The Name Of The Manufacturer;
- Instructions lifting and handling restrictions;
- The type of material;
- Brutăşi net weight;
- The main dimensions of the packages.
Assistance To The Beneficiary
The recipient will participate through its representatives at the manufacturer, the inspections and tests in our factory.
The specialists of the beneficiary will have free access to the manufacturer to verify the manufacture and quality of
materials conform to this Specification.
The manufacturer's specialists will carry out tests of factory together with the representatives of the beneficiary.
Quality inspections carried out by the specialists of the beneficiary to the manufacturer, do not replace these
inspections and tests and do not reduce the responsibility of the contractor, from which according to the contract,
will be in charge until the end of warranty set.
The manufacturer shall ensure payment făUă the necessary technical documentation specialists.

The accompanying delivery Documents of the vibration damper Hatch delivered will be accompanied by:
- Certificate of conformity;
- Set of newsletters that will batch tests shall include the results of tests carried out in accordance with
THOSE 61897 and 61284;
- Set of bulletins reception attempts;
Technical book or leaflet vibration damper, in the Romanian language, which will include:
- all nominal characteristics;
- drawings indicating all functional and mounting dimensions;
- instructions for installation, operation and maintenance;
- machines, tools and accessories required for mounting and operation; - Table of distances.
Table 2.2-main characteristics of the vibration dampers
Nr. Features Păsură Technical data
unit Required Guaranteed
Voltage

400 kV
Technical
requirements
1. The conductor type - ACSR 350F/60
OPGW/ACSR 160/95
ACSR OPGW/95
2. Diameter of conductor mm 25.15
20,75
12,50
4. Grip type - Screw and clip on
armour rods
5. Length of armour rods mm Accordingly to include
and
vibration dampers
Table 2.3-technical characteristics of vibration dampers for 400 kV.
Technical data
No.
Description U.M. Guaranteed
crt. Required
e
1. Manufacturer -

2. country of manufacture -

3. Standards for: - THOSE


- 61897
electrical characteristics
- THOSE
mechanical characteristics - 61284
material -

testing Manufactory
4. The maximum voltage of the network kV 420

5. Short circuit current for 1 second Ka 31,5

6. Level RIV DB 50

7. Life time (minimum) years 30

8. Type vibration damper - Stockbrige


with four
common
9. Constructive achievement According to
THOSE
61897
10. Material - THOSE
- any material that is suitable for their - 61284
purpose. -
-
- Antivibratoarelor counterweights are made -
from steel or cast iron.
- Fastening clamps will fabricate aluminum
alloy, with maximum 0.1% copper.
- clamp screws and washers are made of
stainless steel or aluminum alloy of high
strength.
- Cable carriers will be provided with cords,
yarn of RŢel hot-galvanized. From the
manufacturers of the product as the optimal
structure is formed
of 19 threads.

11. Clamping way - Screw clamp 2.3.3.3.3.


electrical
12. Corrosion protection of metal păUŢilor - IEC 61284 connection
- Yes clamps
hot-dip galvanizing
m In order to
standard 86
achieve
zinc layer thickness (average)
electrical
13. Weight antivibrator kg
conductor
14. Fastening torque B. m -
link
15. Mode of delivery Packages protection
PCs.
number antivibratoare in the package pillars for
PCs.
number of packages support and
16. Markup mode stretch
-
vibration damper connecting
-
package clamps are
17. Voltage of corona discharge kV > 1.1 x
used in cast
420/1.73
iron with
18. Damped frequency range Hz 3-120 aluminum

19. Disruptive voltage level kV > 1.2 x tanks for


420/1.73 steel-
aluminum
conductor.
The mounting surfaces of conductors and the Assembly clip is cleaned of impurities and oxides and brush it with
neutral Vaseline.
2.3.4. TESTING
2.3.4.1. Tests for conductors
In the context of identification of conductors shall be tested checks:-the appearance of the
conductor;
- the diameter of the wires (wires);
- cross-sectional area;
- the number of wires (wires) on the layer and the whole conductor;
- the mass of the linear density of the conductor;-.
The results of such checks shall be recorded in the test ballots.

2.3.4.1.1. type Tests


The contractor will nominate the proposed tests proving compliance with requests of the present specifications.
Nominees of tests the contractor shall include, but not be limited to:
- test of bend;
- alternating bending test;
- mechanical tensile test;
- the test temperature; -short-circuit test.
The contractor will provide details concerning the method of testing and standards used references, including a copy
of the standards applied (at the request of the beneficiary). Any other proposed test to be applied by the Contractor
will be approved by the principal.
Aeolian vibration tests, galopare, check the rollers and creep will be executed according to the standards in force.
If the contractor believes that type tests carried out previously, he satisfies the conditions of the specification
will make the test certificates together with the offer. If no type tests certificates were lodged with the
original Offer, all the details of these tests, made in a laboratory testing supported by the beneficiary, shall be
submitted to the beneficiary. They may be accepted in lieu of tests proving compliance.

2.3.4.1.2. routine Tests/individual


The following routine tests shall be made by the manufacturer, or the authorised laboratories on a Hşantion taken
from one of the reels that will deliver:
- appearance and finish;
- total diameter;
- breaking strength;
- electrical resistance;
- specific meal;
- gresajului on meter linear mass.

2.3.4.1.3. Tests after delivery


After the arrival of the conductor on the site, it is checked and subjected to (to be approved by the
Beneficiary), a set of tests listed above or mentioned in the programme, in order to convince Do conductor has been
delivered in accordance with Technical Specification, including characteristics and performances guaranteed.
The conductor who does not pass the tests in satisfăFător mode, it will be rejected and will be replaced at the
expense of the contractor.

2.3.4.2. Tests for vibration dampers


Vibration dampers will be subjected to a series of tests and checks to confirm mainly the following:
- steel cable pulling (the stem) of counterweight to achieve at a minimum load of 200 d;
- dynamic characteristics;
- the quality of workmanship;
- dampers subjected to oscillations during operation to withstand at least 107 oscillations of
amplitude 10-15 mm and 15-45 frequencies făUă Hz screw joints loosening, deterioration of the clamp or
stem;
- the effectiveness of the Act.
2.3.4.2.1. type Tests and verifications
The contractor will nominate the proposed checks and proving compliance with the requirements of this
Specification. Tests and checks shall include but not be limited to:
- test dynamic characteristics;
- fatigue test;
- the test of efficiency of depreciation;
- attach a cable clamp on steel;
- contragreutăŢilor on fixing steel cable;
- sliding lever on the conductor;
- checking of dimensions;
- checking your appearance;
- check the quality of metal coatings; -checking resistance (breaking load); -checking the possibilities of
montage.
The contractor will provide details of testing and verification methods and standards used references, including a
copy of the standards applied.
If the contractor believes that type tests carried out previously, he satisfies the conditions of the specification will
make the test certificates together with the offer. If no type tests certificates were lodged with the original Offer, all
the details of these tests, made in a laboratory testing supported by the beneficiary, shall be submitted to the
beneficiary.
They may be accepted in lieu of tests proving compliance.

2.3.4.2.2. batch Checks


Batch checks consist of:
- verification forms and dimensions;
- checking the workmanship and appearance;
- verification of metallic coatings; check the quality of materials.

2.3.5. The assistance of the BENEFICIARY

The recipient will participate through its representatives at the manufacturer, the inspections and tests in our factory.
The specialists of the beneficiary will have free access to the manufacturer to verify the manufacture and quality of
materials conform to this Specification.
The manufacturer's specialists will carry out tests of factory together with the representatives of the beneficiary.
Quality inspections carried out by the specialists of the beneficiary to the manufacturer, do not replace these
inspections and tests and do not reduce from the responsibility of the contractor, which according to the contract,
will be in charge until the end of the security is established.
The manufacturer shall ensure payment făUă the necessary technical documentation specialists.

2.3.6. TOLERANţE, GARANţII, RESPINGERI

The contractor must ensure that the design and construction of the materials supplied shall comply with the
standards and tolerances set out in the special requirements of this specification which will be observed and checked
during manufacture.
All defective products will be replaced at the expense of the contractor.

2.3.7. AMBALARE, EXPEDIERE şI TRANSPORT


All packing, shipping and transportation to the place of manufacture shall be made by the Contracting.
Merchandise damaged during these operations will be replaced at the expense of the contractor.
Intended for installation on TH conductor will be shipped on spools.
The conductor will be shipped and transported on drums, entirely covered with protective sleeve. The reels will have
protective foils of waxed paper or plastic, resistant to chemical reactions, umezealăşi around the cylinder, under
conductor, the other over the conductor, over mantle. The reels should be tied tightly on the circumference, and can
roll over on their flanges făUă as conductor to be damaged.
The following information will be written clearly with paint on both flanges of each drum:
- The Title Of The Contractor;
- The Name Of The Manufacturer;
- Instructions lifting and handling restrictions; -Meaning of rolling.
On each reel will be fixed a plate of metal or aluminium painted clearly the following data:
- type and size;
- length;
- brutăşi net weight;
- the meaning of înfuniere of the last layer;
- the batch number and of the drum;
- the date of manufacture of the conductor; -the main dimensions of the drum; -meaning winding.
Throughout the works will be recovered reels naked and will be carried by the contractor in the places specified by
the client.
2.4. Technical specifications and characteristics of MATERIALS for EARTHING OUTLETS

2.4.1. SCOP

This specification refers to the manufacture and supply of metal components required artificial outlets earthing of
metallic pillars.
Contractor will comply with all regulations in force regarding the manufacture and delivery of products and will
follow all the indications given by the beneficiary.

2.4.2. NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS

Standards
- STAS 8275-1987. Protection against electrocutărilor. Terminology.
- STAS 2612-1987. Protection against electrocutărilor. Permissible limits.
- Standard SR HD 637 S1-1999. Electrical installations with a nominal voltage higher than alternative 1
kV, the chapters relating to the Earth.
- STAS SR 755-1995 ONES. General rules for devices of the residual current differential.
- STAS 4102-1985. Parts for earthing protection.
- STAS 832-1979. Impacts of electricity lines over telecommunications lines.
- Permissible limits and conditions (Annex B concerning bonded networks tied to the ground through
the resistance of 1988); located in the review.
- STAS 6290-1980. Crosses between the lines of energy electricăşi telecommunications lines; located
in the review.
- STAS SR 831-2001. Shared use of pillars for overhead electrical power plants, urban
telecommunications networks, cable television (CATV) and other utilities.
- EN 10025-1/2005-general purpose Steels for construction.
- STAS 8183/80-carbon Steels for pipes.
- STAS 395/88-hot rolled Steel. Wide steel.
- STAS 908/90-hot rolled Steel. Tape.
- STAS 6853/85-metallic Coatings. Layer thickness determination by jet method. - STAS 7976/90-
metallic Coatings. Determination of the layer thickness by microscopical method.
Regulatory, standards, instructions, technological sheets
- NP I 7-2002. Regulatory framework for the design and execution of electrical installations with voltage
up to 1000 V c. and 1500 VDC
- NP I 20-1994. Normative framework on protection of constructions.
- NTE 001/03/00. Normative regarding the choice of insulation, insulation coordination and surge
protection power installations.
- On 501/1985. Normative regarding the design of protections by relays and electrical automation of
power plants and substations.
- On 116/1994. Regulatory testing and measurement equipment and electrical installations.
- 1RE-Ip 35/2-1992. Ditto. Earthing installation for airlines, underground cables, substations and
transformer; located in the review.
- 1. E-IP 31-86. Instructions for plant and design pilot links in terms of protection against the influences
by inductively and resistive.
- 3.RE-I 23/1974. Instructions for operation and maintenance of earthing. - F-1E-8/1974. Technological
sheet. Electrical installations. Execution of binding to Sământ.
The maximum strength of the intake ground - 3.RE-
No. crt. Soil resistivity :m
U d 110 kV U > 110 kV IP 41-92.
1. U d 100 10 10 *) Design and
2. < 100U d 500 15 10
3. 20 15 operating
< 500 U d 1000
4. U > 1000 30 20 *) instructions
concerning the
protection of proximities influences due to overhead electrical lines.
- 3 L-I-225-2002. Instructions for the application of the standard STAS 831-2002.
- 1RE-I-226-2002. Instructions for implementation of the protections against overvoltages in low voltage
electrical installations.
- 1RE-I-227-2002. Instructions for determination by means of measurements of voltages to touch and
step to the system for the distribution of electricity.
- 1.RE-IP 30/2004-Guidebook for plant and design of earthing. Project E-292/88 earthing Sockets for the
pillars of the CENTURY.
- RE-I 23/95-operation manuals and maintenance of earthing installations. -EN 12330/2002-metallic
Coatings. Electrochemical coatings of zinc or cadmium. Technical conditions of quality.

2.4.3. CONSTRUCTIVE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS for SOCKETS

2.4.3.1. Types of Sockets used

The natural outlet of steel covered by the foundations of the armies (Rails, calipers, etc.) without being wet or
aggressive environments do not degrade over time.
Artificial outlet consists of horizontal electrodes (flat) and/or vertical (galvanized pipe), which is used in two ways:
-For reduced circulation areas or areas with frequent movement outside the settlements only on condition it
is necessary for protection against overvoltages of atmospheric. Resistance of dispersion of the intake ground at each
pole (with protective conductor disconnected) in current industrial frequency must not exceed the values in the
following table, depending on soil resistivity in the location column.
2.4.3.1 table
*) It is recommended to adopt an up to 5 resistors: if it does not impose particular hardships.
*) In exceptional cases when the conditions would require expensive outlets, shall be allowed a maximum of
30:.
-For areas with frequent movement locality for agricultural, industrial or enclosures for camping or beach use
plugs with three artificial contours around the pillars which were the lead role of potential distribution outlets with
tensions and step.
2.4.3.2 table
No. The type of grip of the Earth Maximum
Coefficient
voltage
of variation
(V) Uaofand
ground resistivity in soil condition
The specifics of the area
crt. touch Step
during Up
measurement Comments
prescribed for columns
ground highly soil with average dry soil
the GeoNet reduced movement There
wet are normeazăhumidity 1. If the prescribed tension u
names Server
1. Surface socket (pozată at Up economic cannot be
the GeoNet frequent movement 250 obtained, the outlets will be 3
names Server strokes and the columns will
use an insulation level Părit
Industrial or agricultural premises, 125
with minimum 10% as
camping or beach
compared to the rest of the
line.
2. Where the values of the 2.4.3.2.
AU, Up nusunt prescribed size
outlets only in condition of
outside the settlements There are normează
protection against
electrostatic discharge
arresters (surge of air).

Realization of earthing Sockets


Achievement of the wall will be made according to the project type E 292-88 "earthing Sockets for ohtl 110 ÷ 400
kV", according to plan appropriate to each type of outlet.
The execution thereof shall take account of the following:
- in all cases the joints will be achieved through electrodes bulonare;
- galvanized bolted joints of electrodes must have contact surfaces flat and clean;
- the screws will be tightened well to achieve a contact pressure as higher; -steel will mount always on edge
(upright).
In the case of improving horizontal vertical electrode plugs, they will be placed only on the outer edge of the sockets
and place diagonally opposite.
Vertical electrodes will beat as slowly in order to achieve a good electrical contact with the ground.
The resistance of the intake it will read correct \ coefficient of variation of soil resistivity as a function of depth and
moisture intake according to table 2.4.3.3.

2.4.3.3 table \ Coefficient of variation of ground resistivity


depths of 0.3 ... ... .... 0.5 m) 6,5 5,0 3,5

2. Horizontal outlet (pozată from


the depths of 3,0 2,0 1,5
0.5 ... ... .... 0.8 m)
3. Plugs with electrodes (vertical
Pegs) buried at depths of 0.8 1,5 1,3 1,1
... 4.0 m
4. Large deep Sockets (depth over
4.0 m) 1,2 1,1 1,0
* This category intrăşi mixed natural and artificial inlets or outlets of natural pillars.

2.4.3.3. Materials
The components of artificial outlets will be made of steel for construction OL 37 (OJ NO 255), STAS 500-80.
Use reinforcement steel 40x6 mm galvanised.
We recommend using specialist conductors, both in terms of electrical resistance and the contact surface with the
ground and the processing and mounting (bending easier, better joints by welding or bolts).
Vertical electrodes (from steel zinc-coated pipe) will be used in the following cases:
- to reduce resistance of dispersion in soils with high resistivity;
- for distribution to potential pillars in place movement common in order to reduce the tension by
touch and step.
In case of using vertical electrode for binding to columns or in horizontal electrodes (flat) will weld a steel band which
will be provided with holes for attachment with bolts, and merge the contact surface will be galvanised.
You can also use the type clamps "slipper".
the screws will be merge according to STAS 11028-89 and ISO 4018/2002, and washers used (Grower) will
be carried out according to 7666/2-1994.
Rustproof protection of all elements of the Earth are intakes will make hot galvanizing, preferably with a thick layer of
zinc, as follows:
Thickness (Pm) Mass (g/m2)

-flat round steel 85 610

-screws, washers 43 305

2.4.3.4. Execution of parts


Related attractions intakes will be carried out in accordance with technical Specification metal pillars.

2.4.4. CHECKS and measurements


2.4.4.1. electrical continuity between conductors and plugs as shown in section 2.4, the outlets are
designed to reduce the resistance of dispersion and/or distribution of the potential for achieving tensions
rise and step.
In order to fulfil this role is absolutely necessary to ensure the continuity of electric current leakage fault.
As a consequence will be checked and possibly recast both protective conductor linking the pillars and columns
connection at outlets, in order to ensure good electrical contact as possible.

2.4.4.2. Resistance Measurement of dispersion


0ăsurarea resistance of dispersion will be made at least 10 days after mounting them with protective conductor
unfurled from the mast.
The measured values must be less than or equal to the maximum of the values shown in table 2.4.3.1.
If this works you don't need outlets for potential distribution.

2.4.4.3. Measurement of touch and step voltage


Tensions rise and step shall be considered under conditions of maximal currents of short circuit to Earth.
The measured values must be less than or equal to the maximum of the values shown in table 2.4.3.2.
If this works you don't need outlets for potential distribution.

2.4.5. Reception facilities for EARTHING

Reception facilities for earthing shall be in accordance with the provisions of the SR HD 637 S1:
- reception facilities for earthing must be întocmeascăşi to surrender the operating unit technical
documentation in question, the reception, the hidden works and verification reports.
- reception facilities for earthing shall perform the following checks.
1. Checking the existence of effective links between the socket and the elements protected earthed;
2. Checking existence of efficient links between intakes of artificial and natural the Earth;
3. State the main conductors of the earthing of the branch, the connections between conductors and other
components of the earthing installations;
4. Random verification of certain elements of artificial outlets (electrodes, joints, etc.), situated in the Earth
(by digging);
5. Measurement of resistance of dispersion of earthing installations before and after them;
6. Determine, through measurements of touch voltages values and corresponding to the current step of the
Earth, considered in the calculation of earthing installation in question and their comparison with the maximum
permissible values from SR HD 637 S1 and NTI-TEL-S-001-2008, including the transmission of dangerous voltages
outside the plant, through various metal objects, water pipelines, railways, etc. If this works you don't need such
measurements.
2.4.6. TOLERANţE, GARANţII, RESPINGERI

The contractor must ensure that the implementation of Sockets touch voltage values and step set standards and the
requirements of the specification. If the measured values are not consistent with the values imposed in the
Specification, the client may reject as inadequate intakes and these will be restored at the expense of the contractor.

2.5. Technical specifications and characteristics of MATERIAL for the foundations of the PILLARS II

2.5.1. PURPOSE

This chapter refers to the manufacture, supply and implementation work of the materials required for the execution
of works of the foundations of the pillars II.
Contractor will comply with all regulations in force with regard to the implementation of the foundations, the delivery
of materials and will follow all the indications given by the beneficiary.
The detail design phase for each landmark you can change the type design of the foundations, with the prior
approval of the proposal by the client and designer, under the same economic conditions that are laid down in the
draft Technical and construction contracts.
It will not accept the solution of soil with precast foundations or foundations with "lattice".
Foundations can accept type sole and lining (the Obelisk or in increments) or indirect foundations, columns drilled,
depending on the technological possibilities of the contractor.
The contractor will have to carry out geotechnical investigations on the site of each of the terminals. The results will
be forwarded to the recipient, together with the final list of proposed foundations for each pole. In the economic part
included amounts of works relating to such investigations.

2.5.2. STANDARDE şI RECOMANDĂRI

All material must comply with the force of the following standards:
US 012-1/2007 "code of practice for the execution of concrete. Part 1-the production of concrete "012-2-
2010" code of practice for the execution of works of concrete, reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete.
Part 2. Execution of concrete works "
STAS 4606-80-"natural Aggregates for concretes and mortars with mineral binders. Test methods "
EN 196-1:2006 Methods of testing of cements. Part 1: determination of resistance to mechanical EN 196-2:2013-
"methods of testing of cements. Part 2: chemical analysis of cements ". EN 196-3 + A1:2009-"methods of testing of
cements. Part 1: Determination of the type of prizăşi stability. "
EN 196-6:2010-"methods of testing of cements. Determination of fineŢii ".
EN 196-7:2008-"methods of testing of cements. Processing methods and sample preparation of cement ".
SR-CEN/TR 196-4:2008 "methods of testing of cements. Part 4: quantitative determination of constituents ".
EN 12390-6:2010-"tests on concrete. Tests on reinforced concrete. Determination of mechanical resistance "
EN 12390-8:2009-"tests on concrete. Water-proofing, verification "
SR 3518:2009-"Laboratory Tests of concrete. Determination of resistance to freeze-thaw (gelivitate) "
EN 12350-4:2009-"tests on concrete. Tests on fresh concrete "
STAS 5511-89-"tests on concrete. Determination of adhesion between concrete and reinforcement. Avulsion method.
"
EN 1766:2002-' products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures. Methods of testing.
Concrete benchmarks for tests. "
EN 1997-1:2004/NB: 2007 Eurocode 7: geotechnical Design. Part 1: General rules. Annex national
125-2008 fundarea NP Normative regarding construction on land susceptible to wetting colapsibile
STAS 2561/4-90 Ground Foundation-Piles of LARGE DIAMETER Pillars-General design Prescriptions, and reception
NP 045-2000 Normative regarding field test pilots cockpit probăşi from foundations
1997-1/2006 EN Eurocode 7: geotechnical Design part 1: General rules-Section 7: Foundations
For intermediate lengths, tolerances shall be determined by interpolation
- The position of the horizontal axes foundations ± 1 cm
For intermediate lengths, tolerances shall be determined by interpolation
- Vertical position of the quota level ± 1 cm
If these tolerances are exceeded, earthworks, foundations, can not be continued except with the written consent of
the designer.
The constructor will examine each săSătură area, providing support for banks based on the depth and nature of the
terrain, in order to ensure its stability.
Checking quality of Foundation soil.
It's made by geotehnician specialist who drafted the Geotechnical study and is certified in accordance with MTCT
Upgrade to verify the quality and reception of construction works And related installations call sign C562002.
In this regard after completing work on the săSătură will be called geotehnician for verifying land specialist
Foundation, ending record of reception-determining phase together with the beneficiary and the contractor
specialist.
In the event that it finds differences between the characteristics of the terrain and the Geotechnical study, to be
determined by the specialist geotehnician measures to be taken.
Throughout the execution of the work of foundations is mandatory monitoring of Geotechnics to ordering measures
for adapting the implementation details of the foundations according to the geotechnical conditions encountered.
Geotechnical monitoring must be carried out by the developer of the Geotechnical study or a certified specialist for
MTCT Af. Geotechnical monitoring report execution will include summary notes concerning firstly the nature and
characteristics of the encountered geotechnical land and comparison with data from Geotechnical study, as well as
notes on the behaviour of the the period of execution. Preparation and verification of geotechnical construction
documentation will be carried out in accordance with the provisions of the Guide GT 035/2002.
During the execution of earthworks shall take appropriate measures to ensure the protection of labour.

2.5.4. work of FORMWORK for CONCRETE

The composition of the formwork.


Shuttering for concrete elements And their CD must be composed in such a way as to meet the following conditions:
to ensure getting the shape And the dimensions assigned to the project for the items to be executed, to be
watertight, so as not to allow the loss of milk, to be stable and resistant under the action of load, allowing a great
number of refolosiri, be provided with Assembly parts inventory.
Wooden casings will be resized in terms set out in the "Code of practice for the execution of concrete, reinforced
concrete and prestressed concrete, call sign 012-2007 US."
To reduce the stickiness of the concrete and formwork, they brush the faces come in contact with the concrete
before each use with decofrante substances. They apply by brush, one has to Săstreze properties unchanged in the
climatic conditions of the execution of the work and do not attack concrete.
Permissible deviations from erecting formwork
Permissible deviations from erecting formwork refers to the following sizes:
- dimensions of the cofrat;
- quota level (for bottom formwork, concrete casting înăOŢime etc);
- p oziŢia axes in plan and on înăOŢime (which includes the straightness and perpendicularitatea or angle where
appropriate);
- the shape of the surface (which includes the planitatea and the local poor, if applicable);
Allowable deviations for dimensions, dimensions and position of the axes will be those prescribed in the respective
items.
Admisbile surface design deviations shall be determined as follows:
- for current situations (shuttering for flat surfaces of the elements), the allowable deviations will enroll in
classes of tolerance thus:
x class TS, III for flatness (annex C NE012/2/2010); x class TN, for local irregularities (annex C NE012/2/2010);
Assembling of formwork.
Formwork installation operations will succeed, as a rule, in the following order:
- cleaning and leveling the place of Assembly;
- plotting the position of the formwork; transport and disposal panels and other materials and items inventory in
the vicinity of the place of Assembly;
- c u răŢirea and anointing panels; Assembly and provisional support; checking the position of each element
formwork construction, both horizontally and vertically and dropping them in the correct position;
- conclusion linking (blocking) and supporting permanent formwork using all mounting devices (caloŢi,
tension rods, joints, bolts, flitches, structure consolidations, etc.); -sealing joints.
Verification and their reception of formwork and contention Verification of the formwork And their contention
is carried out:
- the completion of work, shuttering for a stage work, when you perform the formwork reception;
- I'm immediately follow each before putting in the work of the respective casings, concrete when performing a
new verification;
Checking the formwork and contention shall be paid by:
- review directăşi simple measures;
- measurement equipment;
Through the measurements confirm classification in the tolerances laid down for formwork. Checking their contention
through formwork and direct observation and simple measurements relate to the following:
- a comparison with the provisions of the draft provisions and/or manufacturer, in terms of:
x : Visual composition;
x types of materials and their integrity as well: Visual analysis of documents concerning their quality;

x size: measured;
x screw connections (fastening elements and contact between competing elements in the merge): Visual and, by
request, not to have the game in the merge;
- the corresponding şezarea elements/formwork panels themselves, toward the base of the abutments, as well
as between them and position: Visual-făUă blanks between them:
- f ptul as supportive elements or connection point (Kings, sloping inner structure consolidations, etc) are set: by
request, not to have the game; the links are properly fitted through Visual observation;
- cleaning condition: visually;
- application of demoulding agents: Visual;
- d imensiunile in at least 2 sections for each item, as well as gaps and relative position of the two:
through direct measurement;
- înăOŢimii trace of concrete casting: by direct measurement of the bottom front formwork, or to other
surfaces;
- the overall appearance of the surface that comes in contact with concrete: Visual; Checks equipment formwork
metrics refers to:
- odds for bottom formwork;
- axe, cofrat space;
- orientation, if applicable;
Noncompliance, whether in terms of composition and installation, either in terms of overcoming tolerances
(permitted deviation) dimensions and/or position, consemneazăşi must be resolved by the manufacturer.
In order to prevent the emergence of non-conformity, the manufacturer shall provide a preliminary supply control,
handling and storage of the materials used, as well as the training of personnel who will perform the work
concerned.
Checking the formwork and their contention is made again within 24 hours before assembling the frame, if any, and
before the implementation work of concrete, if between these operations has gone for a longer period.
This second check is carried out by simple directăşi observation and measurements, if irregularities, and
measurement equipment, as appropriate.
In cases where the manufacturer of construction works apply a quality management system, enforcement and
verification of the work of formwork and support thereof must be made in accordance with the applicable provisions
of this system (procedures instructions and records:
supply, receipt, handling, storage and traceability of materials; enforcement and verification of the work; measuring
equipment; qualification of personnel; neconformităŢilor treatment, etc.).
Formwork and reception of their contention lies in the conformity of works recorded on the basis of the verification
carried out at the completion of work and settling any nonconformities, through a protocol for qualitative reception
on ( for works that become hidden) with the participation of the representative of the customer and, in the case of
special formwork for structural engineer who drew up specifications, and with the participation of the structural
engineer.

Preconditions and conditions during the execution of the works and shuttering their contention
For execution of formwork and their CD is necessary prior conditions, as well as those required during the execution
of the works. Preconditions relate mainly to the following:
- the existence, on site, of the project, which must contain all data necessary for the execution of the
formwork;
- the existence, on site, of the technological project concerning their casings and CD;
- the existence, if any, of the reception work, when they are involved; -supply and reception of formwork
and/or eşafodajelor, complete, inventory and technical documentation concerning the use thereof or, where
relevant, of all materials necessary for execution, as unique on site;
Conditions to be ensured during the execution of the work relates mainly to the following:-technical facilities required
for mounting or, where applicable, the execution and installation of formwork and eşafodajelor for their support (
Tools, devices, etc.);
- f but accessories and necessary, for mounting and installation or execution of the formwork and
Hşafodajelor (electricity, machines for lifting and handling with the precision required); -qualified personnel
for the installation or execution and attachment of formwork and eşafodajelor; Removing the formwork.
Decofrarea vertical elements to the order of operations generally indicated the versa formwork: Undoing and
removing zãvoarelor tiranŢilor; removing the supportive elements (uprights, rulers, moaze, caloŢi).

2.5.5. REINFORCEMENT WORKS.


Armature products Reinforcement products, covered by this specification are steel products, smooth, profiled or
imprinted, delivered as such or in the form of netting or welded modular enclosures.
Reinforcement steel products for nepretensionată must be in accordance with technical specification ST and their use
009 must comply with the applicable standards of the series EN 1992, EN 1994, EN 1996, EN 1998, together with
national and those of 009.
Steel products for reinforcement must be identifiable in terms of the type and grade of the product, ensuring their
traceability from manufacturer beginning and until the Opera.
To do this:
a) each lifeline, each bundle of bars or welded, welded chassis, each must bear a label, well attached, containing:
- the name of the manufacturer;
- the type and grade of the product;
- the batch number and the decision making process/link;
- the CE marking of conformity;-quality control stamp;
(b) the documents accompanying the delivery) products must contain at least the following information contained in
the Declaration of conformity issued by the manufacturer, including a copy of this document:
-the name and address of the manufacturer;
-certificate of conformity number attached; -references to the characteristics of the product: i. the number of
standard product; II. type and class of the product; III. size; IV. yield strength;
v. breaking strength;
vi. elongation at tensile strength spectacle; VII. content of carbon equivalent steel liquid;
- identification of the batch/batch/decision making process or the link; By type of product means the shape of the
surface:
- smooth;
- profile periodically, or imprinted, characterized by high-profile factor;
By product class is meant for categories relating to yield, the ratio of tensile strength and yield strength, elongation
(tensile force spectacle) and weldability, according to technical specification ST 009.
Marking, delivery, transport, handling and storage of products for fittings should be done so as not to alter its
characteristics. Products for fittings must be stored separately on the types, classes and diameters, landscaped
spaces and properly equipped so as to ensure:
- avoiding conditions that promote corrosion of reinforcement, including the ventilation of the premises;
- avoid soiling their land or other substances;
- access and easy identification of each assortment;
Surface products for fittings must not be covered with loose skin and no rust with substances that can adversely
affect the steel, concrete or adhesion between them.
Structural engineer said the project, the type and grade of products must be used, as well as the diameter and shape
separate fittings and unitar, noted throughout the project.
In cases where the manufacturer cannot supply products which comply with the provisions of the draft amendments
to the type and class of products can be made only with the written consent of the structural engineer (provide dock,
which is part of the project and technical book construction).
Traceability refers to products actually used in the paper, its elements and their positions in the case who have
used products other than those referred to in the initial project, according to the provision of the site.
Products for fittings may be used under the following conditions:
- correspond to the provisions of the project in terms of the type and grade of the product;
- they attested compliance according to law provisions; -the manufacturer shall carry out the following:
x checking geometrical characteristics;
x attempt to thrust (breaking strength, yield strength, elongation after breaking), trying to bend their bending
test-dezdoire.
The tests will be carried out on three test-pieces from each batch and diameter, in laboratories having the necessary
endowment.
In cases where the results of the calculations are not corepunzătoare, the manufacturer shall take steps to ensure
adequate supply of products.
Training bars.
Cleaning and straightening of bars are to be carried out operations before cutting and trimming them.
The cleanup will remove:
- Earth, traces of oil, paint or other contaminants;
- the rust loose skin that emerges by tapping with a hammer;
- Sticky rust, friction with the brush wire in the welding area of bars to be spliced through welding.
After removing rust or adherent rust adherent, reduce the dimensions of the bar section must not limit
depăsească diameter deviations from prescribed in the code WE: 012-2007
- for bars with < 25 mm limit deviation of 0.5 mm;
- bar with d > 25 mm deviation limit of 0.75 mm.
Shaping the bumpers.
According to en NE012 run-2/2010 Constructor is required before proceeding to analyse the possibility of shaping
reinforcement to achieve reinforcement under the project (relating, in particular, mounting and fixing bumpers,
înnădirile bars, but also concrete casting and compacting) and to request, if necessary, review, together with the
structural engineer, the provisions of the draft.
Shaping the reinforcement may be made by the manufacturer (in its own workshops and/or spot on the site) or by
ordering it, by the manufacturer, at a processor specializing in reinforcement shaping.
Shaping reinforcement shall be carried out in accordance with the legal provisions in force in terms of technological
equipment and personnel who carry out this work.
If trimming reinforcement through the command processor, the following conditions shall apply:
a) the manufacturer, which issues the command, it must send the processor all data in reinforcement project;
b) tests products for fittings will be conducted at supplying products and test reports with results will be part of the
documents that accompany reinforcement bar;
c) the processor will accompany reinforcement of ornamental Declaration of conformity which must relate to:
i. certificates of conformity of products used, attached (copy);
ii. the statement that all provisions have been complied with in relation to the project: the products used, the shape
and dimensions of the fittings, as well as conditions for trimming;
d) ornamental armor will be accepted by the manufacturer on the basis of provisions of the draft, which takes into
account the existence of cumentelor and markings concerning traceability for products used;
Reinforcement bar in the workshop (the manufacturer or processor) can be delivered, for mounting either in the form
of separate elements, be assembled into casings.
In the first case, the elements of the same type will be stored in separate packages, labeled, so as to avoid
confusion and to ensure that their form and cleaning up to their attachment. In the second case, storage and
handling will need to secure indeformabilitatea as well as the State of cleanliness. Assembling the skeletons will be
performed under the following conditions: (a)) will not be used for fastening the welding elements;
b) fixation elements between them is done by binding with black wire, galvanized wire being prohibited that, through
contact with the collector cell may form, with the danger of electrical corrosion arising from it;
Shaping the reinforcement must be made with the provisos: the shaping is not running) at temperatures below-10 °
C;
b) shaping drive to bars with regular two-speed machines, will be done only with speed;
c) bending bars runs with slow motion, with uneven speed, făUăşocuri;
d) dornurilor diameter used for bending bars must be:
i. for nominal diameter bars less than or equal to 16 mm, at least four times the diameter of the bar; II. for larger
nominal diameter 16 mm, at least seven times the diameter;
e) the shape and size of the beak at the ends of the bumpers shall be in accordance with applicable technical and are
specified in the project;
f) bending radii for sloping and bars for Stirrups/clips will also be those laid down by the applicable technical
regulations, they must be specified in the project; Tolerance classes are the following: reinforcement shaping
the size of) (cutting length, total and partial dimensions):
i. up to 1.0 m: TD, VII (annex C NE012/2/2010); II. field of over 1.0 m: TD, IX (annex C NE012/2/2010); b) from
straightness: TR., IV (annex C NE012/2/2010);
c) at angles: you, II (annex C NE012/2/2010); Mounting fittings.
Mounting frame shall be carried out under the following conditions:
- In casings fitted armor must be received and verified immediately before the commencement of the mounting
frame. Verification must ensure that they have maintained compliance with regard to:
x Stability and put all effort to smoothing.
x Shape and dimensions; x
Tightness; x The State of
cleanliness.
- Ensuring compliance with the requirements of the project. Refer to the types and classes of products used,
their position relative to each other and to the formwork, as well as the position and the type înnădirilor, with
enrolment in the allowable tolerances.
- Ensuring the proper conduct of the implementation work of the concrete. Covers:
x Creating the possibility of movement of the personnel concerned, where the collector is installed on horizontal
surfaces/inclined;
x Automating the creation of dense, if at the top, at intervals not exceeding 3, 00 m, blanks for penetration
through concrete or beveled discharging it;
x Create the necessary premises, measuring the vibra penetration of at least 2.5 times its diameter, at intervals
of not more than 5 times the înăOŢimea item. Creating free spaces is done either by placing the armature, in
agreement with the designer, or by the fitting of the last stage of the casting of the concrete.
- Ensuring the relative position between bars and front formwork is considering:
x Tying rebar at matings; Linking armatures.
Must be made through the bars at the origins had ties to the black wire.
When the binding is done with wire will use two strands of soft wire 1.0 mm to 1.5 mm in diameter.
Reinforcement binding will be done only with the black wire, galvanized wire being prohibited.
Reinforcement binding will be done as follows:
- The network of walls, floors and fixtures:
x Each cross, two rows of crosses, the entire outline marginal; x The rest of the încrucişărilor, in the field, it will
tie in chess, every two;
- The networks of thin curved plate fittings, will bind all the crosses; -Beams and columns At:
x All crosses with Stirrups and corners with beaks agrafelor; x Încrucişarile with straight portions of the Stirrups
can be linked to in chess, every two; x The bars, inclined will tie the earliest stirrups they rotated; x Etrierii
clips installed tilted and fretele, will be linked to all the crosses with the longitudinal bars.
Where appropriate, the elements which reinforce is made with a large number of bars and/or large diameter, it will
provides the full item and other kinds of temporary or definitive support. These items will be of type "metallic
material" and to be determined in agreement with the contractor after designation.
The nodes with dense armãturi will see the layout of the toolbars so as to allow the vibra and pãtrunderea.
Execution will be done carefully so as not to introduce into the other Earth or formwork which would Găuna the
quality of the concrete.
The performance of foundations, concrete layer of equalization put handrails trimmed project, linking between them
and supports to ensure the staging of the concrete cover.
It introduces too setae to poles or walls and Foundation reinforcement is fixed.
Mounting of the fittings will be performed in the positions assigned to the project by ensuring the maintenance of
these positions and during the pouring of concrete.
The mount will provide:
-at least 3 spacers at each wall plate or mp; -at least 1 spacer at each
ml mast.
Spacers can be confecŢionaŢi from plastic mortar prisms or fitted with a wire to be connected with couplings.
TGVs are not accepted to the project than with the consent of the designer.
Concrete coating layer of reinforced concrete elements, aims to ensure the protection of reinforcement corrosion And
its good cooperation with concrete. If you do not specify the else on reinforcement plans, minimum layers of
coverage will be carried out according to SR EN 1992-1-12004.
At the end of the mounting fittings, due to the special importance of the quality of their execution and the fact that
after pouring the concrete they can no longer be verified with simple means, they will be received, compulsory
closing report hidden works.
Checks must be carried out by the beneficiary and learned (project supervisor MLPAT), performer (Head of Ministry
with technical officer with MLPAT execution) and must cover all aspects of the work, namely:
- n shoulder diameter and position of toolbars in various cross-sections, characteristic structural element;
- the distances between the Stirrups, their diameter and method of fixation;
- Lu n gimea bar portions exceeding reazemele or to be incorporated into items which subsequently pour
(mustaches); -the length of the overlay înnădirii;
- the number and quality of links between bars;
- devices supporting the position of armatures during betonării (clips, spacers etc.);
- How to ensure the thickness of concrete cover to reinforcement;
These elements shall be recorded chronologically in the minutes works. Înnădirile of welded valves;
Înnădirile of welded valves shall be located as specified in project execution, and failing that they will abide by the
following provisions:
a. Between two adjacent sections, with one or more video consoles welded, will be a distance of at least 50 d;
b. for highly when the distance is less, the coupling resistance welding and spliced through the stretch, in a section
of a concrete element, it is recommended not to exceed 25% of the total area of the coupling strength.

Bending bars, after welding, it is permissible to a distance of at least 5 d, at the ends of the weld (d-diameter bars
spliced by welding).
Valves welded reception
The reception is performed on welded fittings.
According to C28-83 a consignment is made up of steel and fittings of the same diameter, being merged or spliced by
welding with the same procedure, in the same way and by the same technical welder-the size of a batch is specified
in C28-83.
-Pieces control used for verifying the quality of batches and are obtained as follows:
a. If the lot consists of welded fittings or performed in the workshop, "the bench", on site inspection, test specimens
are extracted from batches executed under these conditions;
b. If the lot consists of video consoles welded Opera (in the paper), the test specimens shall be taken control from
the Opera, where possible;
c. in cases when you cannot take pieces from Opera will make pieces of similar înnădirile batch control (quality steel,
diameter, electrodes, welding position, etc.), interleaved with the welds of the lot, called in short pieces pieces
interspersed, or witness; they will be made of the same welder, working in the vicinity of point, and in accordance
with the conditions of work.
Quality control batches
Quality control batches are made through checking operations and testing of welded joints and înnădirilor
indicated in C28-83.
Reception rules
Înnădirile welded joints and performed in the workspace, the bench on site, or in Opera, will be received from Fătre a
Committee consisting of:
- Head of the workshop;
- welding Officer (within the designated persons with training unit); -delegate of the CTC.
The lots will have to satisfy the conditions relating to verification and simultaneously seeking control of the tables
hold C28-83.
Înnădirile welded, executed in Opera, and can be received on the basis only of the results of the checks, to be
supplemented later with test results control specimens performed interspersed.
The Commission will appreciate the reception, on a case by case basis, if the lot found improperly will be a reshuffle,
or i will give another appropriate use of its quality. Restoration of lots shall be carried out in accordance with the
indications contained in C28-83 and based on indications from the Commission.
If the lot is rejected in the bore, the leadership of the construction site, together with the designer, will analyze the
quality of workmanship and will establish the necessary remedial action.
Receipt batches are made on the basis of a report drawn up for the reception.
At the reception it will annex (reverse) control card batch.
2.5.6. The EXECUTION of WORKS of CONCRETE for FOUNDATIONS General provisions
The implementation work of the concrete will be led directly by the head of the technical work, which has the
following obligations:
- to approve the start pouring concrete on the basis of direct verification of the following:
x State of the formwork and diagrams or where dumps are cast concrete; x State of the
frame;
x casting joints condition, where applicable;
- Verify command for concrete (at external manufacturers or from its own preparation); -to verify that
the appropriate conditions are provided for concrete transport from the place of entry into the Opera House,
and the means, facilities and personnel to carry out the work of concrete, including those required in case of
emergencies contingencies;
- to cunoascăşi to oversee how the casting and compacting concrete (in compliance with the provisions on
casting joints), as well as the taking of samples for tests on concrete and reinforced concrete, with the
establishment of a procedure for the implementation Opera, where appropriate;
Approval of the start pouring the concrete must be reconfirmed based us verification, where they passed the 7 days
făUă start pouring or intervening events such as to alter the situation found at the time of approval.
Special measures are necessary, determined by the ambient temperature during the shooting and reinforce concrete,
like this:
- in general it is recommended that the temperature of fresh concrete before casting, is between 5 ° C and 30 °
C;
- the environmental temperature at the time of the shooting or during curing period falls below 5 ° C, shall
apply to the provisions of NE012-1/2007. Earth, stone, CD or structural elements in contact with the
concrete to be poured must have a temperature not to cause freezing of concrete before it hit the resistance
necessary to withstand the effects of frost;
- in cases where ambient temperature 30 ° C depăşHşte at the time of the shooting or during the period of
hardening is required use of întârzietori of additives and efficient outlet for further measures (for example:
requesting a laboratory authorized or appropriate technology accreditation preparation, transport, operăşi
treatment of concrete);
Specification concerning concrete, laid down in the draft, for the command to the manufacturers or to their own
stations, is made in accordance with the provisions of the US 012-1, taking into account any other conditions and
specified in the project.
Order for concrete shall comply with the applicable provisions from US 012-1/2007.
Verification is mandatory to place concrete pouring on samples.
Pieces made will be preserved as follows:
- test specimens for verification of concrete placed in the class work is kept under
in EN 12390-2;
- e pruvetele to check resistance to compression at intermediate deadlines are
Săstrează in similar conditions of concrete placed in Opera;
- It's pruvetele to determine other characteristics of concrete, where appropriate, the conditions laid down in the
applicable test standards;
For the concrete made in Opera, for each building shall be Kept up-to-date, the great book of concretes, which must
include at least the following:
- data delivery and invoices or equivalent documents in the case of concrete by the manufacturer;
- the place where he was laid in the concrete an Opera work;
- time of commencement and completion of pouring concrete;
- the fresh concrete temperature;
- p robes of concrete test pieces taken and cast, how to identify them and the results achieved at their trial;
- measures adopted to protect freshly poured concrete;
- any events that have occurred (interruption of the shooting, bad weather, etc.);
- ambient temperature;
- staff who oversaw casting and compacting concrete;
Data from the great book of concrete must ensure traceability of concrete, from its preparation and pending
implementation.
Preparation and transport of concrete.
Preparation And verification of the characteristics of the concrete is done properly specified in the "Code of
practice for the execution of concrete, reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete, call sign 0122007 US"
Transportation of concrete workability L3 and L4 (tamping cone with 5 ... 9 cm, respectively 10 ... 15 cm) is
made with autoagitatoare and workability of the L2 (the cone with subsidence 1 ... 4 cm) fitted with turbine
dump truck.
Local transport of concrete can be made with bene, pump, gutters or wheelbarrows.
Means of transport must be watertight to prevent loss of cement milk.
At arŞLŢă or rain, the surface of the concrete must be protected so as to avoid altering the characteristics of the
concrete.
Duration of transport is considered to be from the time of commencement of loading on the means of transport And
the end descăUării and shall not exceed the values below only if you use the întârzietori additives:
Whenever the length of time between unloading And reloading with concrete depăseŞte transport vehicles an hour,
as well as the interruption of work, they will be cleaned with running water.
Concrete resistance to compression at an age of less than 28 days can be estimated according to Chapter 3.1.2 of EN
1992-1-1:2004. a. Aggregate
In the preparation of concrete aggregate will be used from the River, sorted or derived from natural and/or
crushing crushing rocks with a normal density of 1201-2000 kg/cm3.
In general, granulozitatea are choosing assemblies based on conditions, compaction, and type assemblies used. In
some cases, because concrete should not be segrege during transport, compaction, and pouring to be enough
lucrabil and easily compacted, you have increased the amount of fine aggregate part.
The maximum aggregate size pellet for footings shall be determined according to the size of the smallest
structural elements, with conditions:
Ø max = ¼ D

Ø max = d-5 mm

Ø max = 1.3 c
where: D-smallest structural element, d-spacing of reinforcement bars, c-layer concrete cover of the reinforcement.
Thus, the maximum aggregate size pellet for foundations must be at most equal to the lesser of:
1/4 carcass reinforcement eye;
1/2 from the thickness of concrete cover to reinforcement; 31 mm.
Granulozitate curve of the aggregate total is fixed so as to fit based on the dosage of cement and concrete,
consistency in areas of granulozitate 0-16 mm, 20 mm, 0-0, 0-31 mm-40 mm, 0-71 mm.
Aggregates should not be contaminated with other materials during transport and storage. Storage units must be
made on concrete platforms having slopes and gullies of water. Not be allowed storage directly on the ground or on
balastate platforms. b. Cement

Cimenturile used in the preparation of concrete for repair and performance of foundations are in Group II cements-
32.5 R.
Setting the type of cement is made taking into account the following criteria:
x service conditions and exposure; x conditions and technology adopted; x class.
To execute with thicknesses of less than 1.50 m on time sensitive, we recommend using the rapid hardening of
cements with (R).
Cement dosage is determined based on the class of resistance of the concrete, as well as the amount of water
required to obtain a certain consistency of fresh concrete. Accordingly, the ratio a/c
(water/cement) is determined based on the conditions imposed on the concrete strength. In order to obtain an
optimal dosage mixed with cement and a small amount of water, it is recommended to use a combination of
aggregates that contain a small amount of sand and a greater proportion of large aggregates.
In order to ensure a greater resistance to penetration of aggressive substances (if applicable), the ratio a/c will be
smaller for more severe exposures to which it is exposed concrete structure.
Where wildlife conservation must ensure a certain degree of tightness, as the ratio A/C (water/cement) to exceed the
values:

P4
-0.6 for degree of impermeability 10 The cement is delivered packed in paper bags or in bulk
P 8 transported in road vehicles, railway carriages, accompanied by
- 0,5 pentru gradul de impermeabilitate 10

P quality certification documents.


- 0,45 pentru gradul de impermeabilitate 1210
The cement will be protected by umezealăşi impurities during
storage and transport.
Cement bulk storage will be made in cell type, in which there were stored prior to other materials, marked by
enrollment of cement type.
Cement bags packed in storage must take place in closed rooms. The bags will be set in stacks, on the boards
arranged in the interspaces to ensure air circulation at the bottom of the stack and at a distance of 50 cm from the
outer walls, while keeping their base around a sufficient space for movement.
Stacks will have a maximum of 10 rows of stacked sacs.
Will not exceed the term of warranty prescribed by the manufacturer for the type of cement used. c. Water

Mixing water used in the preparation of concrete may have come from public network or from another source, but in
the latter case shall satisfy the technical requirements laid down in EN 1008/2003.

Casting And compacting concrete


Before you start pouring concrete will verify:
- mail quotas formwork, both horizontally and vertically, with those of the project;
- desks And planarity formwork;
- the existence of measures for maintaining the shape of the formwork and ensure their tightness;
- measures for the attachment of formwork support elements;
- r e z istenŢa and stability of existing support elements and correct mounting and attachment of the
contention, the purlins and the other foot for demoulding agents, the distribution of pressure on the ground,
etc.;
Where discrepancies are found towards the project or services must be assessed as a secure connection changes to
resilience and stability of contention, will take appropriate measures.
Before concreting starts, cofrajul And fittings will clean any foreign material, concrete pouring Uămas, rust, etc.
and loose skin will proceed to closing of the cleanup.
As a result of carrying out the checks and measures mentioned above, it will proceed to record its findings in a report
hidden works. If betonării occurs at the beginning of some events such as to alter the observed situation
(breakdown, accidents, etc.) will carry out a further check.
Before pouring the concrete must be verified the correct functioning of the machinery of local transport and
compaction of the concrete (vibrating).
It is prohibited to start of betonării before carrying out checks And post-exposure indicated in 012-2007 US Code,
chapter 17.
Concreting construction will be headed directly by the head of the thing. It will be permanently at the site and will
oversee the behaviour and maintaining the initial position of the formwork fittings And contention And will take
measures to remedy any operational deficiencies noted. Both the deficiencies and the measures taken will be
recorded in the great book Foundation.
Concrete must be put in the paper within 15 minutes from Liverpool to the place. The implementation work will be
done făUă. If this is not possible it will create working joints in accordance with en 012-2007 US.
From pouring concrete to be respected the following general rules:
- It has put into place, the downloading will be made concrete in bene, concrete pump, or to avoid other
manipulations;
- (d) if the place of concrete brought to release paper is not homogeneously mixed, it will proceed to
download and reamestecarea's platform specially designated, but făUă to add water;
- înăOŢimea by freefall of the concrete must not be more than 1.5 m;
- casting of înăOŢime greater than 1.5 m will be made through tubes made of sections of the form tronconică;
- concrete must be spread evenly and in thickness not exceeding 50 cm. its Expanse is made by drawing with
rake. Celebrity toss is not permitted with the shovel of the concrete at a distance greater than 1.50 m;
- e will take measures to avoid warping or shifting position fittings provided in the project, particularly for
fixtures arranged at the top of the plates in the console; If, however, it will also produce defective, they will
be corrected during the shooting;
- e will track closely, incorporating a complete concrete armatures, with due regard for the thickness of the
coating, in accordance with the provisions of the draft;
- n u is obliterated or shaking the frame allowed during betonării and no squatting of the vibra fittings;
- concreting will be doing făUă disruption, even when casting is done through the side Windows; -t u rnarea in
horizontal layers of 30 ... 40 cm înăOŢime, a new layer must be made before take-off from the lower layer of
cement concrete.
Compacting concrete runs through mechanical vibration; in case of impossibility of continuation of vibrating
compaction, damage the vibrators, power outages, etc.), casting will continue until proper position on the
manual, compactând concrete.
Concrete should be poured and tamped so as to ensure that all pieces are covered armăturăşi embedded in an
appropriate manner, within the tolerances to cover with concrete compacted and that will achieve concrete strength
and durability.
Speed of casting and compacting should be large enough to avoid the formation of joints and low enough to avoid
tasările or overloading the formwork and their contention.
You can use only vibrators approved for use of the technical and functional characteristics and for which
there are prescriptions of use and maintenance. The personnel calculates vibration of concrete must be
trained in advance on how to use the method you are going to apply it. The distance between two successive points
for introducing the vibra interior is not more than 1.0 m In cases where this is not possible distances (because of the
configuration of embedded parts and fittings or other causes) the simultaneous use of several vibrators.
The thickness of concrete subjected to vibrării it is recommended to not exceed 3/4 of the length of the Dildo head
(cylinder); When you compact a new layer, you must pãtrundã cylinder 5 ... 15 cm compacted layer above. The
thickness of concrete (before compacting) must be 1.1 1.35 times the final thickness of the compacted layer
according to workability. The distance between two successive positions of areas vibrate shall be so fixed as to
ensure coverage of the entire sequence of compacted concrete surfaces.
Choosing the type of vibration (head size, strength And the vibra disturbing its proper frequency) will be made
according to the dimensions of the elements and the possibilities of introducing vibrating head (cylinder) among the
toolbars armature.
Laborness of concrete compacted by internal vibration is recommended to be L3 or L4.
The optimal duration of vibration in terms of money of between a minimum of 5 sec. and a maximum duration of 30
sec. for vibra extension up to 50 sec. imposed by local conditions, is not likely to impair the quality of the concrete.
Outward signs after acknowledging that the vibration of concrete has been completed are as follows:
- concrete is no longer packed;
- concrete surface becomes slightly glossy horizontal;
- air bubbles cease appearance to the surface of the concrete.
From pouring concrete to be respected the following general rules:
- the old concrete, wooden casings that are in contact with fresh concrete must be doused with water both with
2 ... 3 hours before and immediately pouring concrete, but the water remaining in the bumps must be
removed;
- d escărcarea concrete from means of transport is done in bene, pumps, conveyor belts, chutes, or directly into
the formwork;
- r efuzarea to place concrete pouring and banning his implementation in Opera, which does not fall within the
limits of consistency or submit to segregation; îmbunăWăŢirea is permitted only using a consistency additive
special plasticizer in compliance with applicable US provisions 012-1;
- înăOŢimea by freefall of the concrete must not be greater than 3.0 m in the case of
with a maximum width of 1.0 m and 1.5 m in all other cases, including surface elements (slabs, foundations, etc.);
- pouring concrete in cofrate on înăOŢimi items greater than 3.0 m is through the side Windows or through a
hose or tube (made up of sections of the form tronconică), with the lower end within 1.5 m of the area that
is betonează;
- the uniform spread along the concrete element, aiming to achieve horizontal layers not exceeding 50 cm
înăOŢime and pouring new layer before the start of the intake concrete poured; -c rectarea automating a
position during the shooting, the deformation occurs or to move them towards the position laid down in the
draft (particularly for fixtures arranged at the top of the plates in the console);
- careful tracking of înglobării the complete concrete reinforcement, observing the thickness of coating in
accordance with the provisions of the draft and the technical regulations in force;
- n u is obliterated or shaking the frame allowed during betonării and no squatting of the vibra fittings;
- you are increasing the filling of section in dense areas reinforcements through lateral îndesarea of concrete by
means of rods or steel slats, as well as vibration; where such measures are not effective, requires the
development of access possibilities to the side by spaces that allow for the penetration of the vibra in
concrete;
- operational measures to remedy in the event of moving or yielding initial position of formwork and
their contention;
- the igurarea movement was the deployment of workers and means of transport during the shooting on
floorings such height rooms that do not affect the position of the frame; It is prohibited to direct circulation
areas reinforcements or fresh concrete;
- t urnarea is performed continuously until the joints work to the project or in the enforcement proceedings;
- d uration the maximum casting disruptions, for which it is not necessary to take special Păsuri to resume
shooting, must not exceed the take-off time of commencement of concrete; in the absence of laboratory
measurements, it is considered to be 2 hours of preparation of the concrete, in the case of cements with
additives and 1.5 hours in the case of cements făUă additives;
- r eluarea when the shooting occurred an interruption lasting casting bigger, but after preparing the joints
surfaces;
Compacting concrete must be carried out as follows:
- concrete must be compacted in order to contain a minimum quantity of air oclus;
- c ompactarea concrete is mandatory and can be done through different processes, depending on the
consistency of the concrete element, type, etc.;
- in UMTS fresh concrete compaction, is necessary to prevent the movement of armatures and/or formwork;
- Compact concrete only so long as it is lucrabil.
Pouring concrete in the vertical elements (columns, slabs, walls) is made in accordance with
the following additional provisions:
- If elements with înăOŢimea not exceeding 3.0 m, if it is not hindered from concrete vibration of low thickness
of the item or number cofrarea shall be allowed automating all faces throughout the înăOŢime and pouring
on top of the item;
- where the foreseeable difficulties in compacting the concrete as well as in the case with înăOŢime greater than
3.0 m shall be one of the solutions: x cofrarea a face up to 1.0 m înăOŢime and completion of the formwork
as the shooting; x casting and compacting through side Windows
Pouring concrete in structures in frames is made by paying particular attention to areas of the nodes, in order to
ensure complete filling.
Pouring concrete in massive elements, i.e. elements on which the smallest size is at least equal to 1.5 m, is
made in the light of the following particulars:-the doptarea of special measures in determining the
composition of concrete and technology of tunare, in order to ensure the quality of the work. In order to reduce
efforts from temperature and contraction, in determining the composition and preparation of concrete aims:
x adopt a type of cement hydration heat low (correlated with grade concrete) and a dosage as low, using for this
purpose a reductive and additive aggregates with the greatest dimension;
x ensure temperatures as low as for fresh concrete, reducing the temperature by spraying artificial aggregates,
use cold water, ice flakes etc;
pouring concrete in massive elements is done in either layer continuously or in steps.
Joints (concrete).
To the extent possible, will avoid joints work organizing it so that execution take place concreting făUă interrupt.
The joints will be made taking into account the following rules:
- d uration the maximum permissible concrete disruptions for which it is not necessary to take special Păsuri to
resume shooting, shall not exceed the time of commencement of the take-off of cement used. In the
absence of laboratory determinations, this point will be considered in 2 hours of preparation of the concrete,
in the case of cements with additives and 1.5 hours in the case of cement făUă added;
- s u prafaŢa lines will be thoroughly cleaned, moving away concrete that was not well compacted and thinness
of cement milk And any other contaminants.
- I mediated, before pouring the concrete, the surface of the fresh joints will be flushed out with water after the
rule ' concrete must be saturated but surface zvântată ".
The shooting followed the resumption of joint work is permitted only after preparing their surfaces as follows (012-
2007 US Code, chapter 13).
The contractor will submit a project designer for an opinion, in which it will indicate the position of the joints work,
casting technology and the treatment of the joints.
Wooden casings And old concrete will be well doused with water before pouring.
At 2-3 hours after pouring the concrete, it will again be soaked with water.
The treatment And protection of concrete after casting.
The treatment and protection of the concrete, in the period after casting, they aim to ensure the attainment
of the required characteristics for concrete, respectively, depending on the area of use and environmental
conditions of that period.
The features taken into account are:
- resistances and the deformations of concrete;
- avoiding the effect of contraction cracks, concrete production and, where appropriate, the seagrass; -
durability, depending on exposure classes. These features are determined, in terms of treatment and
protection of concrete: x prevent water evaporation from concrete;
x , as appropriate, to avoid actions harmful mechanical (vibration, impact, etc.), the presence of frost or harmful
substances (oils, cleansers, etc.).
Concrete surface temperature must not drop below 0 ° C before the surface of the concrete to achieve a strength
that can withstand Frost făUă negative effects (as a rule, where the resistance achieved concrete, fc, is greater than
5 N/mm2).
Piling on time sensitive.
It must comply with the provisions of Regulations 16-84 and 012-2007 C.
0ăsurile specify what shall be adopted within the time sensitive to be determined taking into account:
- r e gimul termoclimatic existing on site real during preparation, transport, and protection of concrete
pouring;
- the scale and massiveness of resistivity what elements or betonează;
- g r adult exposure to the work area and the duration of time sensitive during the strengthening of concrete;
- suspected cold intensity in that period.
At execution time to chill any concrete it is necessary to exert a constant control and particularly demanding from a
technical side of the work, the driver of the official CTC MLPAT and beneficiary (project supervisor construction site
certified PUBLIC WORKS). In the minutes of the hidden works will mention the measures taken for the protection of
works and findings regarding their effectiveness.
Decofrarea
Items can be decofrate as soon as the concrete has a sufficient strength to be able to take over all or part of the
tasks for which they were designed. Special attention should be given to building elements, which after demoulding
agents supports almost whole account provisioned under the load.
3ăUŢile sides of the formwork can ward off after the concrete has attained a resistance of not less than 2.5 N/mm 2
so that the faces and edges of the elements should not be damaged.
Setting the resistance reached by păUŢile construction in order to decofrării is via the test specimens of control
phases, made for this purpose and kept in conditions similar to elements in the case according to STAS 1275-88. The
assessment of the results obtained on the test-pieces should be control Keeps in mind that there may be a difference
between these results And the actual resistance of the concrete element (differing from the heat in the concrete in
the two situations, treatment concrete, etc.). In cases where there is doubt about these results, it is recommended
that non-destructive tests.
The following table presents recommendations on the minimum timelines demoulding agents of faces side based on
ambient temperature and speed of the development of resistance of the concrete.
If during intăririi of concrete temperature is below + 50 C then it is recommended that the minimum duration
of demoulding agents to be extended by approximately the length of frost.
During operation the following shall comply with the demoulding agents rules:
- d esfăŞurarea operation will be supervised directly by the leader of the thing where it finds the casting defects
(voids, segregated areas) that can affect the stability of the construction decofrate, will stop removing items up to
support the implementation of the corrective measures or consolidation;
- s u sŢinerile formwork will loosen since the opening of the elements and continuing symmetrical supports;
- decofrarea will be done so as to avoid a sudden takeover of încărcarilor by elements that are decofreaza,
tearing the edges of the formwork concrete or material degradation And contention. Within 24 hours of decofrarea
any păUŢi construction will proceed, the leader of the thing, the investor And representative of the designer
(whether it has requested to be summoned), a thorough examination of all the elements of the resistance of the
structure, ending a record the record quality and any defects found. It is prohibited to perform fixes before this
review.
PERMISSIBLE DEVIATIONS.
Limit deviations in dimensions of items executed monolith
-foundations x dimension. plan ± 20 mm x înăOŢimea an up to 2.0 m ± 20 mm over a 2.0 m ± 30 mm
Limit deviations from the given form edges And surfaces
- for the 1.0 m long edge 4 mm surface Unity respectively
- p to the total length of the edges of the respective total area, with larger side it
(regardless of the item type) x L < 3.0 m ± 10 mm x 3.0 L < < 9.0 m ± 12 mm x 18.0 9.0 < < L m ± 16 mm
x L > 18.0 m ± 20 mm
By deviation from the given form means the maximum distance between the profile and the profile of the shape
adjacent date (projected) within the limits of the length, i.e. reference surface.
Note: the values above are applicable in current cases. For certain categories of works, technical prescriptions may
indicate different values.
Limit deviations for concrete reinforcement.
- the length of the segments of the bar And the total length of the project x 1, 0 m ± 10 mm x between 1.0 and
10, 00 m ± 20 mm x 10, 0 m ± 30 mm
- the length of a hand, the overlay video consoles
(compared with provisions of the draft or the technical prescriptions) 0 mm
- înnădirilor position (front) x distance between axes bars (compared with project and technical prescriptions) a
foundations ± 10 mm
a step between the Stirrups And fretelor ± 10 mm
REZISTENЭEI EVALUATION OF COMPRESSIVE CONCRETE PUT IN OPERA
Core sampling
For extracting carotelor will use specialized carota (which will be fixed firmly in place during extraction). Sampling
shall be carried out at the distance of joints and fittings, concrete elements And edges in places făUă rebar or very
little rebar. Should be avoided as far as possible the taking carotelor from fittings. Shall ensure that the pieces used
for the determination of resistance to compression does not contain no equipment. In order to avoid cutting the
fittings binding should be used to determine the exact position of the tachometers of the bumpers. Be sure to use as
normative reference for extracting carotelor EN 12504-1 tests on concrete in structures-Part 1: sampling, core
samples and compressive tests. Principle
Pieces are uploaded to compressive failure in the test car, according to SR EN 123904. Record the maximum load at
which held sample and calculate the compressive strength of the concrete.
Test report.
The test report shall contain:
- identification of the test-piece to try;
- the dimensions of the test-piece designated;
- the details of the adjustment by polishing/coating;
- date of test;
- maximum load at failure, in kN;
- compression resistance of the test-piece, rounded up to the nearest 0, 1MPa;
- cession nesatisfăFătoare (if applicable) and if it is nesatisfăFătoare, the nearest type;
- any deviation from the standard method of testing;
- a statement from the person responsible for testing technically, that the test was performed according to SR
EN 12390-3:2009; The test report may also contain:
- mass of the test-piece;
- apparent density of the test-piece, rounded up to the nearest 10 kg/m3;
- the status of the test-piece at the front desk;
- conservation conditions up to reception
- during the test;
- age test-piece at the time of the test.

2.5.7. Check the quality of CONCRETE for Foundations

The quality of the concrete foundations shall be checked in accordance with EN 206:2014: concrete. Specification,
performance, production and conformity.
Non-destructive tests means tests that provide information on the properties of strength or size of a material, item or
structure of făUă resistance to subject them to determine which requests modifying the internal structure or tearing
the material, item or structure of resistance.
Assessment of mechanical resistance of concrete from the work can be done with one of the following non-
destructive methods:
a) relatively high precision methods:
- the combined method of propagation-speed index of recoil;
- the combined method of propagation-speed pulling force;
- methods with ultrasonic pulse;
b) illustrative methods:
- methods of recoil; -pulling method;
- local blast method.
Determining the position and diameter of armatures in the concrete can be made with one of the following methods:
- radiometric methods with radiation gamma or beta; -pachometrului method.
Behavior of concrete under repeated loading simple or can be recorded with one of the methods:
- acoustic emission method;
- classical methods with ultrasonic pulse;
- resonance methods; -methods by shock.
The place of entry into Opera, the checks shall be recorded in the documents underlying the reception of works.
Through the place of release Opera means the place of unloading of the concrete from means of transport (bene,
concrete pumps, etc.).

Sampling shall be carried out according to Sr EN 12350 from 2009 and the table below.
What is the frequency characteristics of verificăşi concrete checks

Material
Instead of sampling and the minimum frequency
No. The feature is
crt. verified Concrete station Place of implementation
in Opera
1 Laborness, according -twice the exchange of -one sample for each
to work and type of concrete type of concrete and
EN 12350-2- exchange it, but at least
Fresh
2009 one sample at 20 mc
concrete
Test on fresh concrete
concrete. Part 2: the
test press
Temperature (on -four determinations for -four determinations for
time sensitive or if it each Exchange of work each Exchange of work
is provided as a and type of concrete and type of concrete
technical condition) Concrete
samples taken
2 Reinforced a) tensile strength a sample at max. 2 days - one sample for
concrete EN 12390-6:2010 for each type of concrete each type of concrete from leather
test on reinforced for C t C 8/10; -two and structural part, but
jackets and
concrete. Part 6: samples per at least one sample
tensile strength Văptămână for C < from: from
C 8/10 - 300 mc for
through splicing of foundations
specimens C 4/5 d C 8/10 < C;
mc-100 for themselves
C 8/10 d C d C 16/20; will be
the mc-300 for
analyzed in
C < 16/20 C
b) resistance to a sample Exchange if specialized
compression on hold required by project or laboratories
according to SR EN technological sheet
12390-3:2009/AC: for
2011 test -
determination
reinforced concrete.
Part of resistance
3 to
compression, the porosity and alkalinity, as well as for chemical and microscopic analyses.
In the case of concrete ready for use, the information may also be provided when they are required, by reference to
the catalogue of the concrete compositions which has detailed information regarding classes, classes consistency,
weight and other data useful mixtures. To determine the duration of treatment, information relating to the evolution
of resistance of concrete can be presented in the form of data according to table 12, or in the form of a curve of
resistance at 20 ° C between 2 days and 28 days. Informative data is given in Annex M of the NE012/2007.
Treatment of concrete based on the evolution of resistance of concrete
Describes the relationship between the evolution of resistance the resistance value to 2 days and 28 days

(determined in accordance with tests or initial concrete composition comparable).


The duration of treatment depends on the type of concrete cement used in the preparation thereof is specified in the

specific rules.

The minimum duration of treatment of concrete for all classes except for the exposure classes XC1 X 0 and

The evolution of resistance of concrete Very slow Slow Medium Fast

r = fcm2/fcm28 (1) r Ӌ 0.50 0.30 ӊ r < 0.50 0.15 ӊ r < 0.30 r < 0.15

Concrete surface temperature t in aC minimum duration of treatment days (2)

T Ӌ 25 1 2 2 3

25 > t Ӌ 15 1 2 4 5

15 > t Ӌ 10 2 4 7 10

10 > t Ӌ 5 (3) 3 6 10 15 1) linear interpolation is permitted values of r.

2) It will extend for a period equivalent to where laborness is maintained more than 5 h.

3) If the temperature is below 5 ° C treatment must be extended for the duration of the indicămai temperature 5 ° c.

Resistance ratio indicates the evolution of resistance, corresponding to the ratio between the average compressive

strength 2 days (fcm2) and the mean compressive strength at 28 days (fcm28), as determined by

încercărileiniŢiale or based on performance of a concrete having comparable composition. Acesteîncercări-pieces

for the original intended for determination of the resistance to be taken, preserved şiîncercate according to SR EN

12350-1 and EN 12390-1;

EN 12390-2 and EN 12390-3.

Mounting base section can begin when it achieves 70% of percentage average compressive strength at 28 days

(fcm28).

Mounting of wires will be achieved after 28 days after pouring foundations.

2.5.7. SPECIFICATIONS EXECUTION COLUMNS DRILLED

The pilots run on the spot (columns and pillars of drilled from the cross), resistance values corresponding to the class
of concrete shall be allocated to the following coefficients of reduction:
The conditions of the concrete reduction coefficient x Concreting in
dry Concrete 0.95 x underwater Concreting 0.85 x under the
drilling mud 0.75
Reduction coefficients referred to are coefficients against additional safety requirements which take into account the
dimensions of the cross sections and the position of the concrete casting.
Materials
x Concrete
Pilots of class at least concrete C25/30-CEM IIA-32.5 R, D22mm, S4 XA1.
The type and brand of cement shall be determined based on the class of concrete and the aggressiveness of the
environment in which they run pilots.
Minimum cement dosage: 350 kg/m3 for dry concrete in 400 kg/m³ for underwater concreting or drilling beneath the
mud.
Aggregates must be sorted by the river.
The maximum size of the aggregate must be at most equal to the lower of the values: 1/4 and eye reinforcement
carcass; from 1/2 and the thickness of concrete cover to reinforcement; and 1/4 from the inside diameter of the
Foundation; and 31 mm.
Ratio A/C must be less than or equal to 0.6.
Plasticizers and additives shall be used, where appropriate, the întârzietori outlet. The consistency of the concrete
Cone, expressed through the settlement, must be:
and 10 ... 15 cm to dry; the concreting and 15 ... 18 cm to underwater concreting or drilling beneath the mud.
For those pilots in aggressive waters, lands at Foundation Network composition must take account of the
specific regulations. x Armature
Cladding pillars of steel type S500.
The composition of the pilots x Characteristic dimensions
Diameter
Driver diameter shall be determined based on execution technology what is adopted.
1. If drilled in the dry and netubaŢi as well as in that of drilled beneath the mud, diameter driver is considered to be
equal to the diameter of the gear-cutting.
2. If the tubing drilled with recoverable or non-recoverable, diameter driver is considered to be equal to the external
diameter of tubajului.
In the case of pilots on the Summit as well as carriers in case of major horizontal stresses, it is expedient that the
diameters of the smallest practicable.
Length
The length shall be fixed so that, through the combined effect of friction on the surface lateralăşi to the resistance
base, the pilot plan to transmit to ground design axial load which rests.
It is recommended that the length of large diameter bored pile has to be determined according to the depth at which
it encounters the layer virtually incompressible.
The pilots with the horizontal length of the important requests of the pilot is established so as to ensure the
necessary embed field.
The depth of penetration of the driver in the carrier layer must be at least 2dfrom pilots with
d< 1.20 m and 1.5 dto pilots with d• 1.20 m (d-diameter driver).
To improve bearing capacity of drilled and driver for the reduction of deformations due to land at the base, possibly
weakened by the operation of drilling, it can provide an injection at the base of the pilot or along the lateral surface.
To this end, the pipes through which to inject suspension (usually cement milk) is incorporated into the body of the
pilot, being lowered into a hole drilled into the casing with reinforcement.
How to reinforce the pillars
How to reinforce the pillars is made in compliance with the provisions of EN 12699/2004 and EN
1536/2004. How to reinforce the pillars is made with skeletons made of longitudinal reinforcement bars
or Stirrups, fretă, stiffening rings and spacers.
x Armature casing may be constant or variable section along as the driver, resulting from the calculation of
resistance of reinforced concrete or of constructive conditions.
The layout of the pilots in the Foundation
Minimum distance between track centres pilots, measured in the field, is:
and 3(d)in the case of pilots îndesare and 2 d + (3/100) D in the case of pilots dislocuire, where:
x ddiameter or small side section driver x Dactual card driver
Distribution of pilots under the radierul Foundation is done usually in rows parallel, radial, or in check.
Composition radierului
Soil Depth of radierului is established in relation to: and the geological and hydrogeological conditions of the site
(groundwater level and its variation during its construction and operation, etc.); and the possibility of inflation
through freezing of the soil etc.
Radierul of reinforced concrete under the action of load capacity is calculated from the suprastructurăşi of dangerous
deflections from the pilots.
ÎnăOŢimea radierului is determined from the calculation, but shall not be less than 30 cm.
Concrete class must be at least C25/30-CEM IIA-32.5 R, D22mm, S4-XA1.
The distance between the outside of the pilots expanded and the tip of the radierului must be a minimum of 1 d, but
not less than 25 cm.
PăUŢii length in radierul pilots of reinforced concrete is determined depending on the type of request and the type
and diameter of longitudinal reinforcement in the driver (not included in the thickness of radierului layer of concrete
poured underwater concrete or Equalization) according to specific technical regulations.
In the case of foundations on piles subjected to axial stresses of pulling or at large, horizontal strengths which
require fetching them by pilots considered for interlocked in, pilots must penetrate the intact heads for a length
of 15 cm, and waste fittings
longitudinal pilots need to incorporate in the Foundation determined by calculation, but no less than 40 times the
diameter of the bars with constant section or 20 times the diameter of the bars at regular intervals.
SUPERVISION of Execution and quality control Pilots
Supervision of execution x The General conditions are given to 7.9 from
EN 1997-1/2006.
x Specific conditions are given in EN 12699/2004 and EN 1536/2004.
Quality control of pilots put in Opera
The General conditions are given to 7.9 from EN 1997-1/2006.
Quality control of pilots after execution consists of five concrete quality control in the body of the pilot; and checking
the continuity of the pilot's body; and control workloads on pilots.
Quality control of concrete placed in the Opera is made for: and the pilots who attempt yielded no specimens class
prescribed in the project; and pilots at that during execution there have been deficiencies which may affect the
quality of the concrete; and a number of pilots established through the project (at least 10% of the total number of
pilots and at least one driver from each Foundation), chosen by agreement between the beneficiary, the designer
and implementer.
Control is done through choice and : unveiling the pilots concerned; and extracting core samples (after
microwaving or by means of boreholes to the surface with suitable means); and non-destructive methods.
Checking the continuity of the pilot's body can be done by:
and carotare along the entire length of the driver; the process being costly and special machines, complained only
applies to those pilots to whom data from drill sheet-concrete and other observations during the execution shed
doubt on the continuity;
and non-destructive methods (sonic logging, logging, mechanical impedance, etc.); they apply to both pilots
suspected of lack of continuity and checks the conditions specified for the quality control of the concrete placed in
the Opera.
Load control pilots
Loading control shall be provided for drivers who do not meet the quality conditions laid down in the specifications.
Load control is scheduled to at least 25% of all pilots who do not meet the quality conditions. According to the
results obtained, it can decide whether the pilots should cover the încărcaŢise work and where expanding workload
control and the other pilots. These loads shall be specified remedial solutions to ensure conditions of stability of
rezistenŢăşi Foundation.
CONSIDERED NORMATIVE TO THE EXECUTION AND DESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS ON PILES x
1997-1/2006 EN Eurocode 7: geotechnical Design — part 1: General rules section 7 x : pile Foundations
x EN 1997-1/NB/2007 Eurocode 7: geotechnical Design — part 1: General rules-national Annex

x STAS 2561/1-83 below-Ground Pilots classification and terminology x STAS 2561/3-90


ground soil-Piles-General design Prescriptions
x STAS 2561/4-90 Ground Foundation-Piles of LARGE DIAMETER Pillars-General design Prescriptions, and
reception
x NP 045-2000 Normative regarding field test pilots cockpit probăşi from foundations
x NP 106-85 technical instructions for the design and execution of construction for fundarea ties
For the column foundations placed at the crossing of the Danube crossing rivers or there's a risk of afuiere.
Afuierile are shares of Riverbed erosion caused by increasing the speed of water flow. Afuierile, shall be
classified in:
General afuieri ŀ; local afuieri ŀ;
General Afuierile appear in all sections of the riverbed where water velocity depăşHşte velocity drive of deposits from
the river bed.
Function of soil system adopted General can present a afuierile degree of hazard greater than or less than the
stability of infrastructure poles.
Thus, if the odds of infrastructure Foundation are at great depth, and the foundations are encased in layers of
resistant (neafuiabile), a uniform laundering Riverbed a particular depth is not periculoasăşi will cease with the
formation of a sections sufficient drainage.
Topographic measurements at the level of infrastructure and superstructure column of line that crosses the rivers
have the following parameters: obictiv tracking
ŀ absolute Displacements:
a Subsidence; a horizontal Displacements.
Equipment and devices necessary topographic line structure are: ŀ borne and topo-geodetic benchmarks; ŀ brands
press; target brands ŀ; ŀ total stations with the full range of accessories.
0ărcile and păUŢile referinŢăşi parts of metal parts should be made of non-corrosive materials such as stainless steel,
bronze, enamelled steel.
0ăsurările are made with an accuracy of 5 mm and 2 mm coordinates on the quota.
By tracking movements in the horizontal plane and vertical construction of topographic methods determine the
movements or deformations of structures, generated by subsidence of Foundation soil, such as medium, the relative
subsidence, tasările orientation of foundations or of the construction as a whole, continuous încovoieri relative soil
soles etc.

Tracking by means of a compression construction consists of topographic measurement of isolated points of


adjustment of quotas, whether through the marks laid down jointly by construction, by reference to the reference
landmarks (landmarks).
Tree planting marks press must ensure verticality thereon Myra levelling or mounting devices for hydrostatic levelling.
Tree planting marks target must allow a target precisăşi from as many observation points. 0ărcile are press highlights
mobile levelling, which is make up and snaps into construction elements so as to ensure their preservation over time,
throughout the period of carrying out observations and measurements can be making both run-time and during the
operation of the construction industry.
0ărcile press is make up and shall be placed so as not to be damaged or blocked from running.
The first measurements called "0" will be compared to the other that will be drawn up, according to the schedule
tracking reaction over time.
Using dynamic response transient method (TDR) for testing the integrity of the foundations informaŢiiasupra the
following elements:
ŀ soil Depth; ŀ information on continuity of concrete and form elements to be tested;
ŀ Locating faults and degradation: cracks, inclusions in time shooting (decreasing section of concrete);
Using the Echo method for the investigation of sonic parameters influencing the flow regime of the water are
obtained information on the following parameters:
ŀ cross-sections of the riverbed downstream line spindle and the upstream; ŀ speed Variation of water on cross
section-the identification of the current main course; ŀ Identifying areas affected by General and local afuieri and
their quantification; ŀ Locating solid from stream bed which reduces the flow of water section;
Tracing the evolution of the afuierii line infrastructure involves the repetition of investigations from time to time,
tracing the evolution of all parameters involved. The time intervals at which it will repeat these investigations to be
determined according to the following:
the present flow regime ŀ of watercourse;
ŀ watercourse history in terms of overcoming trading attention to water and the frequency of these situations;
ŀ afuierilor level set at the beginning of the program in time; ŀ degree of importance of the bridge;
Application of this method reuşHşte a volume important dates and information, which interpreted correctly specialists
can lead to avoidance or even inlăturarea the effects of a change in the flow regime of the watercourse
asuprainfrastructurilor line.
Solutions may be established to strengthen the infrastructure, solutions and consolidation of the riverbed which
to be effective and to reduce the destructive effects of the elements water, safeguarding the riverbed in the ass
jurulinfrastructurilor with RAPS or mattresses.

2.5.8. EPUISMENTE SPECIFICATION

By epuisment it is understood to mean all the work that run the site under construction with soil groundwater level in
order to make possible the execution of the "dry" side of the excavation and Foundation.
In the event that, under the listing below, there is a pressure aquifer captive, threatening the stability of the
excavated pit, home epuizmentul should be extended to this aquifer until it falls below the hearth
subpresiunea on load reduced through geological excavation.
Depending on the specific site hydrogeology, epuisment can be made in various forms:
a) direct discharge of water from the ditch of excavată;
b) făUă needle with filters or vacuum;
c) electroosmoză;
d) boreholes equipped with network filters, suction pumps or submersible pumps of various types;
e) extraction plants and water siphoning;
f) sliding downward drainage drillings or ascendentăş.
The time required for the operation of a system of sump starts phase prior to the opening of the excavation and ends
after the integralăşi seal of the Foundation. In special situations, you can extend the epuizmentul and after the
completion of the process of construction.
If no special measures are necessary to maintain groundwater levels at odds in running down, sump dezafecteazăşi
groundwater levels it can return to the original shares.
Embankments nesprijinite excavations can be executed, as a rule, for deep foundation pits with relatively low level of
groundwater. The conditions which apply to this epuisment system are determined, on the one hand, by limiting the
inflow of water into the excavation pit, so as not to hold back the deployment of săSăturilor, and on the other side of
providing flow gradients at the exit of water from slopes below the critical gradient hydrodynamic drive to solid
particles entering the Earth Constitution respectively.
In determining the technologies of execution in this system of excavation slope stability checking is needed, with
consideration of the influence of the exfiltraŢie curve of water from the Earth to the VăSătură.
Epuziment method directly from the pit embankments embankments nesprijinite can be applied only where slope
stability can be ensured free throughout the duration of desfăşărare to epuismentului.
2.6. Technical specifications and features of COMPOSITE Insulation MATERIALS

2.6.1. SCOPUL

Technical specification refers to the design, manufacture, supply, testing, packaging, transport, delivery and
acquisition chains stretch isolators and support for three phase conductors (3 x ACSR/TW 350F/60), equipped with
composite insulators; the characteristics of supply chains are presented in the following chapters.
Pre-trial composites, whose technical characteristics are given in the Technical Specification, must be supplied with all
the necessary accessories for the mounting.
If certain parts or subassemblies are not mentioned in the specification but are necessary for correct
mounting, făUă deterioration of the detention centre or detention centre for maintenance, will be specially
mentioned in the offer which will be referred to them.

2.6.2. Standards and recommendations

Insulating chains will be manufactured under the conditions laid down in the quality assurance of ISO 9000
standards.

2.6.2.1. Reference Standards

All materials related to the supply chains of insulators and accessories that are contained in this Contract shall comply
with the force of the following standards:
THOSE 60060-"techniques of high voltage tests. Definitions and general prescriptions ".
THOSE 60120-"coupling Dimensions to kneecap with elements of the rotulă components of insulating chains".
THOSE 60437-"radio disturbances to attempt high-voltage insulators".
THOSE 60507-"artificial pollution test on high-voltage insulators intended for alternating current networks".
THOSE 60383 "Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V."
THOSE 60815 "Guide to choosing pre-trial conditions of pollution"
THOSE 61109 "composite Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage of alternating current over 1000 v.
Definitions, testing methods and criteria of acceptability"
THOSE "composite Insulators for 61466 overhead alternating current with rated voltage over
1000 v. part 1: classes and standard mechanical latches of the extremities "
61284 ONES "and Prescriptions for accessories"

2.6.3. Functional Requirements 2.6.3.1. Overview

Insulating chains consisting of composite insulators and Assembly elements and fittings, clamps and rings for pre-trial
composites will be as described below.
Insulators chains and spare parts have to be generally in conformity with those described in the technical design.
May be accepted variants of design provided that they are similar in terms of functional and satisfy technical
conditions required.
Pre-trial composites, insulating chains and related Assembly fittings shall be designed and constructed in such a way
as to ensure a long and continuous operation with minimal maintenance costs. They should be performing both
operation nonfree and transitional arrangements, in climatic conditions characteristic of the area.
It must be certified that the pre-trial retains all the characteristics of composite offered even functioning at
maximum temperature, may appear on the active conductors, 700 c.
Standards and regulations mentioned above should be reflected in the design, production and manufacturing. All
materials used in this contract must be of the highest quality.

2.6.3.2. Insulators and insulating chains

Insulating chains will be designed for three-conductor ACSR/TW 350F/60 per phase. The distance between the
branches of insulating chains must be 500 mm.

2.6.3.3. Clamps and couplings for the active conductors

GeneralitaŢi
All clamps and fittings must comply with the requirements of this specification and must be approved by the
principal. They will be suitable for technical project-defined chains.
It will pay particular attention to eliminating as far as possible, of the landings at corona in the particular conditions
of the area. For maintaining and corona discharges of radio interference at a low level, the design of the clamps and
fittings necessary to avoid sharp edges or extensions which could cause large requests.
Design of metal păUŢilor and areas adjacent to the connection must be carried out so as to prevent contact corrosion
areas and maintain a good electrical connection in operational conditions. All components must be so designed as to
avoid dissolution during operation due to vibration or other causes.
Special measures will be taken during manufacture and during handling to ensure and maintain a smooth, smooth
surface făUă.
Among the various accessories contact will be on the surface. Avoid contact of punctual.
Splinturile clamps and fittings shall be made of stainless steel.
Support clamps for active conductors
Support clamps must be as light and not to entertain any vibrations. They will be designed to achieve a fully
articulated grip of conductors. At the same time should have the possibility of rotation with at least 45 a level above
and below the horizontal.
Particular attention will be paid to the moment of inertia of the clamp to prevent entry into the resonance of
conductive beam clamp Assembly-due to vibrations caused by wind. Accordingly, the contractor will provide specific
calculations and by designing a clamp for proper support of the particular conditions in this regard.
The components of the clip will be such as to not affect the conductor through bending or crushing efforts other than
those calculated. At the same time we must not allow the movement of the layers of wires or threads related active
conductor. An appropriate design of the clip should avoid friction corrosion. Clamp on bed snaps the conductor will
be curved at the ends in a vertical plane with a radius of curvature of appropriate enabling output wire from under a
clamp vertical angle of inclination of up to 20a. Clamp support will ensure retention/blocking active conductor
(protected with armor rods) at a strength of 2295 d (normal value).
Clamps for traction active conductors
Clamps for traction active conductors will be with compression, with Connector for rope out of a single piece,
type TPDFc or CTPDF. Clamps must correspond to the standard ONES and will be manufactured 61284 from
A356-T6 alloy.
Electricăşi short-circuit current conductivity admissible draught of cold Terminal contact and must not have a value
lower than those corresponding to the active conductor. Protective Fittings
Protective fittings of insulating chains must fulfil the following functions simultaneously:
- device against electric arc;
- against the encroachment of corona discharge device and radio interference; -smoothing device of electric
potential.
As against arcing, protection fittings shall be designed to protect the insulation elements as well as active conductor
to conturnării. Protective fittings shall be made of hot-dip galvanised steel. They will be designed so that the
appearance of the conturnării, an electric arc to be turned to fixing ball of the foot arch. Protective fittings shall be so
designed as to withstand damage from arcing făUă 31.5 kA/1s.
As against the encroachment of corona discharges and radio interference, protection fittings shall be designed in
such a way as to restrict to a minimum the landings of operation chain corona's nice weather and negative effects on
the airwaves Radio-tv.
As a device for smoothing, potential protective fittings shall be designed to ensure a uniform distribution of electric
potential along the chain of insulators.
Designing protective fittings must consider and optimise all operating requirements above.

2.6.4.2.6.4.1. Technical requirements Overview

In the following tables are presented the main design and performance of insulators, clamps and valves. All this must
be verified by calculations and tests, taking into account the provisions of section 2.6.6. and by the NTI-TEL-E-032-E-
2009-00.
2.6.4.2. Pre-trial composites

The main design and performance are shown in composite isolator table 2.6.2, technical characteristics. These dates
will be confirmed in their entirety through calculations and tests specified in section 2.6.6 reception and acceptance
tests.
Pre-trial composites will be implemented as follows:
- part of the resistance of glass fibre;
- silicone rubber insulating part; -clamping fittings from forged steel.
Special attention will be given to the mode of implementation of the above-mentioned connection păUŢilor, slipping
them not being accepted during mechanical tests.
The tenderer will provide details about the techniques of handling and installation of composite insulators in
particular precautions and methods to be adopted in order to avoid deterioration of păUŢii composites.
Technical characteristics of isolators must comply with the requirements in table 2.6.2 "INSULATION
CHARACTERISTICS"
Pre-trial 400 kV, will be shipped with Equalization and protection rings intended for the uniform electric field, radio
disturbance level control and protection against arcing. Shapes and dimensions of the installation will ensure the
proper functioning of the pre-trial and within chains.
2.6.4.3. insulating chains

Fully equipped insulators chains and having composite insulators must be as nice weather, show no visible
corona downloads. This capacity must be demonstrated by tests carried out in laboratories design according to the
tests described in section 2.6.6 tests and inspections. In order to maintain a low level of radio noise, insulating chains
must be fitted with protective fittings. The behaviour of radio interference (RI) shall be demonstrated by tests.
The sound level shall be less than 50 dB more than 1 micro-volt and must be provided in standard laboratory
conditions.
By means of appropriate fittings (horns or rings) will ensure an optimal distribution of electric potential along the
chain of insulators. Upper and lower rings will team the chain of insulators in the light of the recommendations of the
manufacturer of armatures and confirmation through tests.
All insulating chains must be so designed as to withstand short-circuit currents of single phase.
Behaviour under these conditions is demonstrated by examining the design carried out in laboratories in accordance
with the tests described in section 2.6.6.
The dimensioning insulating chains from mechanical point of view, must be considered the data in table 2.6.2 and
2.6.3.

Table 2.6.1. Types of chains used


The TYPE Of Number of Minimum The length of the Breaking load chain *
INSULATION columns x breaking min. specific electro-mechanical
insulating load Creepage distance min. (kN) Alternative
elements 5.30 min. (mm/kV) proposal For
per column (kN) the
contractor
COMPOSITE INSULATORS Chains * will obtain
the approval
Simple chain with of the
20 (for level
composite insulators 1x1 160 160 beneficiary
Euro II)
Double chain with 2.6.4.4.
20 (for level
composite insulators 2x1 160 240 Clamps
Euro II)
and fittings
Double chain
headband in "V" 20 (for level
2x1 160 240 Overview
with composite Euro II)
insulators All roof line
Double chain with will be
20 (for level
tensile composite 2x1 160 260
(II) pollution dimensioned
insulators
Triple chain stretch and
20 (for level
with composite 3x1 210 500 designed so
(II) pollution
insulators
as to
withstand short-circuit current 1. Each set of isolators must withstand short circuit current făUă as their temperature
to exceed 400 ° C or to appear between component parts welds. The recipient may request tests to demonstrate the
features of each type of cage assembly of clamping set and insulation from the conductor pole. Tests will be done at
the expense of the contractor.
All metal păUŢile from the components of the sets or accessories active and protective conductors shall be galvanized
in hot zinc coating weight of not less than 700 g/m2 except screws, piuliŢelor and şaibelor, which accepts a zinc
coating weight not less than 500 g/m2.
Support clamps for active conductors.
Support clamps for active conductors shall be aluminium alloy with outstanding mechanical qualities and is resistant
to corrosion. Fixing components will be manufactured only by forging considering that is not permitted by casting
manufacture.
Bed support lever should be easy pumps. Track locking must be bell-shaped and the striations must be bărcuŢei,
făUă văluriri, ragged and craters.
screws and nuts support clamps must be hot-dip galvanized steel with a zinc coating weight not less than 500
g/m2, or stainless steel. The head of the screw and the nut must be hexagonal shape. washers under the bolt head
should be mandatory in stainless steel.
After tightening the screws at the time recommended by the manufacturer, the clip must be able to withstand the
maximum loads in the exploitation of the conductor, făUă slipping it. The clips will lock the sliding wire (shielded with
armor rods) at a load of 2295 d (normal value).
the screws of the clamp and clamp force shall be chosen in such a way as to meet the requirements of and.
Active conductors clamps must be able to withstand without damage the single-phase short circuit and three phases.
Clamps for traction active conductors
The clips will be thrust aluminum/aluminum alloy and steel.
Clamps for traction active conductors will be compression type. They will be delivered with slippers which can
be fastened bya 0 or 30a. Coupling element of the chain clamp insulation will be of type loader or hot-dip
galvanised eye.
The maximum value allowed for the conductor in question bore clamp heating should not exceed the maximum
permissible conductor heating (700C).
Clamps for traction active conductors must be able to withstand the shock damage făUă single-phase and three
phases presented in this specification.
Pressing thrust clamps and clips of the bore will be tested to confirm the Contractor Do they will endure at least 95%
of its rated breaking strength of the active conductor at the maximum temperature of the conductor at least 700 C.
protective Fittings
Protective fittings must be able to withstand a short-circuit current of 31.5 kA/1s. They shall be so designed that, in
the case of flashover, maximum temperature during short-circuit not exceeding 600 ° C and the function of
protection against electric arc may not be seriously lessened its power.
Protective fittings will be strong enough so as to support a weight of 90 kg făUă permanent deformation. Protective
fittings will be installed by screws.

2.6.4.5. accompanying Documentation of the offer technical insulation materials manufacturer II.
Technical comparison of tenders, the Tenderer shall submit the following documentation:
A complete set of test design newsletters, for insulation, according to THOSE 61109;
Reports of tests;
A set of bulletins, for, including: insulation
- Aging test according to annex 3, section 61109 ONES;
- radio disturbance according to test THOSE 60437; -artificial pollution test under THOSE 60507; -trying to
high power arc.
Overview drawing of the isolator equipped with Equalization and protection rings/horns;
Detail drawing of the detention centre;
Overall plan for the chain of insulators mentioned in table 1;
The list of references for similar types of insulation supplied;
Information from major users concerning behaviour in service of the pre-trial
delivered.

2.6.6. receipt and acceptance Tests.

2.6.6.1. Insulators, insulating chains


Pre-trial and insulating chains shall be tested according to type and individual ONES 60383.
Individual tests and acceptance criteria are in accordance with THOSE 61109.
The manufacturer shall submit the beneficiary representatives a set of bulletins of type tests for insulation.
Reception tests will be carried out in accordance with standards referred to in this specification, in the presence of
two representatives of the grantee, a period which will be agreed by Contract under the program proposed by the
Contractor and will consist of the following:
a-identification of elements of the chains (clamp-fittings); b-the identification of the insulators; c-Visual
inspection; d-checking dimensions; e-verify system coupling; f-check mechanical load as specified; g-
galvanization; h-seeking impulse voltage Holding lightning in dry environment; I attempt to power frequency
wet (rain); j-trying Hold voltage pulse switching in humid environment (rain).
Attempts at paragraphs: "h", "i", "j" will be performed on the independent's insulator chain into position.
Tests relating to insulating chains should be made on fully equipped with chains, clamps and fittings, installed in
working position and having attached a length of appropriate conductors.
Number of isolators which will try THOSE established under 61109.
Test programme will be communicated to the recipient by 15 days before the commencement thereof.
Within 10 days of arrival of the goods, the client will proceed to its reception in the presence of representatives of
the manufacturer.

2.6.6.2. Clamps and fittings


2.6.6.2.1. General requirements for testing
Clamps and fittings of insulating chains will be subjected to the tests, routine and in accordance with the VDE 0210
61284, 3288, BS part 1 and DIN VDE 0212 PăUŢile 50 and 53, which will be approved by the principal. It will also
include galvanizing tests where appropriate.
Can be taken into account and type certificates for tests.

2.6.6.2.2. Special tests


Clamps and fittings of insulating chains will be subjected to tests relating to the radio interference and corona,
downloads and thermal stability at short circuit currents and warming temperatures correlated with maximum
temperature of active conductor of 700. If the results are not satisfăFătoare due to the poor servants of fittings,
clamps or inappropriate items will be reconsidered as design, material, shape, etc. in order to meet the requirements.

2.6.6.3. Tests after delivery


After the arrival of the insulators, clamps, fittings on site will be checked and tested in order to convince that they
have been delivered in accordance with the specification, including characteristics and performance guaranteed. Pre-
trial, clamps, fittings which will not pass the tests in satisfăFător mode, it will be rejected and will be replaced at the
expense of the contractor.

2.6.7. Tolerances. Rejection criteria


Constitute grounds for rejection of the offer of one of the failure conditions set out in Table 2.6.1. as well as
the requirements laid down in points 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 of the TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS for INSULATOR (table
2.6.2)
The contractor must ensure that the design and construction of the insulators, clamps and fittings comply with the
standards and tolerances set out in the requirements of the specifications will be observed and verified the
manufacturing.
The data specified in tables 2.6.2 and 2.6.3 will be guaranteed within the tolerances allowed by the standard. If
guaranteed values will not be respected, the beneficiary may reject defective products at the expense of the
contractor.

2.6.8. Documents accompanying the delivery included

Pre-trial delivered shall be accompanied by:


Quality certificate;
Set of batch tests bulletins, which will include the results of tests carried out in
accordance with the 60389/1-93;
Set of bulletins reception attempts;
Technical book or leaflet in Romanian language site, which will contain:
- all nominal characteristics;
- drawings indicating all functional and mounting dimensions;
- instructions for installation, operation and maintenance;
- machines, tools and accessories required for mounting and operation;
Set of tools and devices necessary for the installation, maintenance and operation.

2.6.9. Quantities. Spare parts for the warranty period. Tools and accessories for installation, operation
and maintenance.

Quantities, types of chains, are in accordance with the schedule of quantities.


The manufacturer shall draw up a list of spare parts for post warranty period, if any. The purchase of these pieces
will be optional.
The manufacturer shall draw up a list of tools and devices necessary for installation, exploitation and maintenance,
if any.
Quantities for insulators, clamps, fittings and accessories for active and protective conductors shall be adequately
protected against humidity, corrosion etc and packed and treated properly storing in climatic conditions on the
construction site, for an indefinite period.
They will be delivered with labels identifying and specifying the quantities.
Reserve quantities, equipment and devices for mounting shall be delivered to the recipient and delivery of deposits
will not be considered complete until the recipient and/or
his representative will check the packaging material. The reception will take place after the delivery at the
customer deposits and certificate of receipt will be issued by the Beneficiary and/or his representative.
Up to the date of receipt of the Contract, reserve the contractor will be responsible for the safety of storage in their
custody.

2.6.10. Guarantees, security, facilities


The warranty term will be in accordance with the contractual terms.
Beneficiary reserves the right, after the expiry of the guarantee, in the event of repeated shortcomings, to request
the presence of a delegation of Contractor/Manufacturer with which to analyze the causes and Păsurile of fix.
Contractor/Manufacturer is likely to provide technical, commercial facilities and materials included in the offer price,
which will take into account the award, acceptance obligations făUă by the beneficiary.

2.6.11. Delivery, transport and storage


Delivery is included, the clamps and fittings intended for installation on overhead power lines will do batch job.
Packages can be of type, etc., and will ensure adequate protection during transport and storage and appropriate
handling.
/ăzile are cases during transportation and storage, on up to 4 lines, where there are arranged and up to 6 rows when
the crates are palletised. Pallets with insulators are not cases.
All packing, shipping and transport from the place of manufacture, in the places indicated by the client, will be made
by the contractor. Merchandise damaged during these operations will be replaced at the expense of the contractor.
The following information will be written clearly with paint on each package:
The title of the reference number of the contract;
The Name Of The Manufacturer;
Instructions lifting and handling restrictions;
The type of material;
Brutăşi net weight;
The main dimensions of the packages.
2.6.12. assistance to the beneficiary
The beneficiary will send experts to the manufacturer or its representatives, to participate in the inspections and
tests in our factory.
The specialists of the beneficiary will have free access to the manufacturer to verify the manufacture and quality of
production conform to this specification.
The manufacturer's specialists will carry out tests of factory together with the representatives of the
beneficiary. Examinations and tests will be carried out in accordance with a scheme established by the offer
and accepted by the client upon signing the contract. The program will feature periods and the number of people of
the beneficiary who will participate in the tests.
Quality inspections carried out by the specialists of the beneficiary to the manufacturer, do not replace these
inspections and tests and do not reduce from the responsibility of the contractor, which according to the contract,
will be in charge until the end of the security is established.
The manufacturer shall ensure payment făUă the necessary technical documentation specialists.

TABLE 2.6.2. TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS for 400 kV INSULATORS.


No. crt. Description U.M. Technical data
Required Guaranteed

1. Manufacturer -

2. country of manufacture -

3. Standards for: -
electrical characteristics - 60060 ONES,
mechanical - 60071, 60120,
characteristics of mode - 60383, 60437,
coupling material - 60507, 60815,
testing factory 61109
4. The maximum voltage of the network kV. 420

5. The voltage boost young lightning in dry kV.. 1550


condition (wave 1.2/50m) min.
6. Tension test of young industrial frequency kV. ef. 680
under the rain (50 Hz)
7. The voltage of the switching impulse young kV.. 1050
under the rain (wavelength 250/2500ms) Max.
8. 50% conturnari voltage pulse of lightning in kV.. 1930
dry condition (wave 1.2/50 m) Max.
9. Short circuit current for one second Ka. 31.5

10. Level RIV DB 50

11. Life span (minimum) years 30

12. Type insulator - Unique rod

13. Constructive achievement Die-cast


14. The insulating Composite on
material part Silicone
color - Glass Fibre
part of the strength of insulating - base
body top to grip the bottom of grip - wrought
- Steel/cast
- iron
splint/Staples - Wrought steel/cast
Technical data
iron/Bronze/stainless
No.
Description UM steel
crt.
15. Valves of heads Required Guaranteed
from the upper to -
MANUFACTURER:
the lower -
FOR INSULATORS:
16. Fastening the insulating part -
For clamps and FITTINGS:
1.
17. Standards
The length offor:
the detention centre between -mm.
electrical characteristics of the clamps and
clamping points
18. fittings the
Coupling mode mechanical characteristics of mm. ౔20
the clamps and fittings material clamp
19. rings of protection
Vanishing line lengthfittings
(min.) splint/barrier mm/kV. 20.0 correlated with
safety coupling tests pollution area
2. Material protection rings, clamps, couplings, -
20. The
eyespecified mechanical
Jug splint/barrier load (minimum.)
safety kn. 160 (la 2B)
210 (at 3i)
21. Mechanical load test individual (minimum kn.
60% SMS)
22. Equalization and protection rings
shape
mm. Yes
dimensions
material
23. Corrosion protection of metallic hot
galvanizing păUŢilor standard Yes
zinc layer thickness (med.)
µm. 86
24. Insulating the Central
Rod diameter side mm.
skirts (plates) mm.
25. Insulator weight (including rings) kg.

26. Mode of delivery for Packages


parcel number number
of insulators in PCs.
packages PCs.
27. Markup mode CEI 61109
insulation -
package -
28 PăUŢii length (minimum) insulation mm. 2900

29 Operating temperature of the isolator 0 (C) 70


TABLE 2.6.3. TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of 400 kV INSULATORS Chains
3. Type of mounting pole - Corespunză
tor existing
pillar
4. The length of the chain mm

5. Rings of protection
-form -
-dimensions mm
-material -
6. Air insulation distance mm

7. Vanishing line length at maximum 8400 (area


voltage kV 420 polluted mm II)

8. Breaking load electromechanics kN


9. Maximum permissible working load kN Contractor
will comply
10. The task of slipping to support clamp NN*
tightening Moment in bolts m
11. Minimum load by sliding the clamp N 95% min
tensioning (at a temperature of 700 C UTS
conductor) conductor
12. The zinc layer thickness m

13. The diameter of the insulating part:


min max mm
mm
14. The mass of the chain of insulators kg

15. Mode of delivery -

16. Markup mode -

17. Working voltage kV

18. The voltage boost withstands dry lightning


1,2/50 m-peak value kVmax > 1550
19. 50% contunări voltage to pulse the dry kVmax < 1930
lightning (1.2/50)-peak value

20. The tension of the corona effect kV 1.1 x


420/—3

21. RIV µV 2500

22. Keeping tension 1 minute under the rain at kVef >680


industrial frequency
23. Boost withstands voltage switchgear
250/2500 s peak value: kVmax
- dry kVmax
- wet >1050
24. Short circuit current Ka/sec. 31.5
with the requirements of this specification rigorously.
In addition, the contractor will comply with all regulations in force regarding the manufacture and delivery of
products and will follow all the indications given by the beneficiary.
2.6.13. Technical conditions for LST
Clamps and fittings of insulating chains, standoffs, and vibration dampers, devices must be so designed as to
enable the subsequent construction of the CENTURY, in the work of maintenance technologies working under
tension.
Quality and technical conditions that must be satisfied by these components of the power lines are specified in
Rule Internal Technique "technical conditions for component II allowing LST", NTI-TEL-010-2010-00.
Clamps and fittings to be used in electrical installations operated in conditions of applying technologies to work
under tension must be designed and constructed in such a way as to permit safe use and easy using for this purpose
tools and LST-specific devices.
Of the technical conditions required components to enable the LST:
- to enable an easy handling at the mount, setting ulterioarăşi to dismantle;
- not to produce removable connections included lubricants laced;
- to allow quick access and secure areas with elements of the pillars or Assembly with other components in the chain
of insulators;
- to allow for easy disassembly in landmarks;
- to allow for easy disassembly of splinturilor that provides nuts against unexpected deşurubării and
unscrewing bolts piuliŢelor and bolts of products if their replacement with new ones:
- piuliŢelor material is recommended to be weaker as hardness compared to that of nedistrugerii warranty cover
screws-corrosion of the threads through repeated înşurubări and deşurubări (on the occasion of reglărilor in
operation)
- the guarantee of preserving the original quality of the grease consistency that is eventually treated a merge.
All the components of the clamps and fittings must offer adequate resistance to atmospheric corrosion, or from
corrosion that can occur in transport, storage, installation or during operation of the plant.
All metal păUŢile exposed to atmospheric conditions during operation must be protected by a thermal or
electrochemical galvanizing in accordance with ISO 1461si EN ISO 3506-1,2.
Clamps and fittings shall be made of insulating chains făUă deformities occur in Jăurilor area. Also they must not
show incomplete zincări on the surface of the elements or of the zinc layer peels on them.
Threaded components should be given particular attention to the condition of the thread and the protective
layer of zinc deposited on it and ensure washers, bulkhead and splinturi compatible.
In order to prevent corrosion and subsequent threads included lubricants laced clamps and fittings must all filetările
exterior to be processed before the zinc coating products. Fillets of products may be processed before or after
galvanizing.
If these products are processed after they have "greased with suitable grease should be renewed at fitting in plant
products.
Quality and technical conditions that must be satisfied by clamps and fittings of insulating chains have to be
guaranteed by the manufacturer, by adding specific data sheets presented in tables 2.6.4-2.6.9.

TABLE 2.6.4. FITTINGS and EQUALIZATION. SPECIFIC DATA Sheet


Parameters and conditions imposed:
No. The specification of the characteristics of Technical data
crt.
Required Guaranteed
0 1 2 3
1. Working conditions and environment

1.1 Conditions of work (LST) working at


potential
1.2 Climate and environmental conditions

Exterior:
pollution,
exposure to
1.2.1 Place of work
weather
solar radiation and
UV, etc.
1.2.2 Temperature -350C ... + 700C

1.2.3 Relative humidity of air MAX 100%

1.2.4 Elevation (sea level) < 400 m

2. Main technical characteristics

2.1 Electrical and mechanical performances to be


specified in the standard company by ensuring the Yes
coordination of insulation installations
2.2 Ensure fixing (mounting) in order to avoid their
disposal operating results Yes
2.3 6 â technologies implementation LST "from potential"
using tools and devices for specific work and Yes
conventional tooling
2.4 The materials used in manufacturing to ensure the
use of the electrical and mechanical performance Yes
specified in the corporate standard
2.5 Dimensions and tolerances permitted by standard Yes
firm to ensure that the products satisfy the conditions
specified in the electrical and mechanical business
standard
2.6. Corrosion protection Yes

2.7 The type tests in accordance with par. 6.1 SRCEI


61284 specified in business standard Yes
2.8 Tests on the sample in accordance with § 6.2 61284
SRCEI specified in the corporate standard Yes
2.9 Individual tests series in accordance with par. 6.3
61284 SRCEI specified in the corporate standard Yes

2.10 Reception tests: Visual and dimensional control in


accordance with cap. 7.8 SRCEI 61284 Yes
2.11 Compliance with the requirements of the quality Yes
assurance system
2.12 Warranty from date of delivery specified in the Yes
corporate standard
TABLE 5. FITTINGS for the INSULATOR (mesh, nuts). SPECIFIC DATA Sheet
Nr. The specification of the characteristics of Technical data
CRT. Required Guaranteed
0 1 2 3 Parameters and
1. Working conditions and environment conditions
imposed:
1.1 Conditions of work (LST) working at potential

1.2 Climate and environmental conditions

Exterior: pollution,
weather, radiation
1.2.1 Place of work exposure
Nr. The specification of the characteristics of Technical data
CRT. Required Guaranteed
0 1 2 3
1. Working conditions and environment

1.1 Conditions of work (LST) working at remote


potential
1.2 Climate and environmental conditions

Exterior: pollution,
weather,
1.2.1 Place of work exposure to solar
radiation and UV,
etc.
1.2.2 Temperature -350C ... + 700C

1.2.3 Relative humidity of air MAX 100%

1.2.4 Elevation (sea level) < 400 m

2. Main technical characteristics

2.1 The types of fittings, tipodimensiunile and mechanical


performance to be specified in the standard company Yes
2.2 Ensure fixing (mounting) in order to avoid their
disposal operating results Yes
2.3 6 â allow technologies to potential "LST" and
"remote", using tools and specific work Yes

2.4 The materials used in manufacturing to ensure the


use of the electrical and mechanical performance Yes
specified in the corporate standard
2.5 Dimensions and tolerances permitted by standard firm
to ensure that the products satisfy the conditions
Yes
specified in the electrical and mechanical business
standard
2.6. Corrosion protection Yes

2.7 The type tests in accordance with par. 6.1 SRCEI


61284 specified in business standard Yes
2.8 Tests on the sample in accordance with § 6.2 61284
SRCEI specified in the corporate standard Yes
2.9 Individual tests series in accordance with par. 6.3
61284 SRCEI specified in the corporate standard Yes

2.10 Reception tests: Visual and dimensional control in


accordance with cap. 7.8 SRCEI 61284 Yes
2.11 Compliance with the requirements of the quality Yes
assurance system
2.12 Warranty from date of delivery specified in the Yes
corporate standard
TABLE 6. FITTINGS For The FORMATION Of MULTIPLE Chains Of MULTIPLE CONDUCTORS Or
INSULATORS For PHASE (JOINTS). SPECIFIC DATA Sheet
Parameters and conditions imposed:
solar and UV, etc.

1.2.2 Temperature -350C ... + 700C

1.2.3 Relative humidity of air MAX 100%

1.2.4 Elevation (sea level) < 400 m

2. Main technical characteristics

2.1 Types of joints, tipodimensiunile and mechanical


performance to be specified in the standard Yes
company
2.2 Ensure fixing (mounting) in order to avoid their
disposal operating results Yes
2.3 6 â allow their conception and manufacture Yes
through the application of technologies of the
LST method "in potential", using the tools and
devices for specific work and conventional
tooling
2.4 The materials used in manufacturing to ensure
the use of the electrical and mechanical Yes
performance specified in the corporate standard
2.5 Dimensions and tolerances permitted by Yes
standard firm to ensure that the products satisfy
the conditions specified in the electrical and
mechanical business standard
2.6. Corrosion protection Yes

2.7. The type tests in accordance with par. 6.1 SRCEI


61284 specified in business standard Yes
2.8. Tests on the sample in accordance with § 6.2
61284 SRCEI specified in the corporate standard Yes
2.9. Individual tests series in accordance with par.
6.3 61284 SRCEI specified in the corporate Yes
standard
2.10 Reception tests: Visual and dimensional control
in accordance with cap. 7.8 SRCEI Yes
61284
2.11 Compliance with the requirements of the quality Yes
assurance system
2.12 Warranty from date of delivery specified in the Yes
corporate standard
TABLE 7. FITTINGS For The INTERMEDIATE Spacer PARTS LINKS). SPECIFIC DATA Sheet
Parameters and conditions imposed:
Nr. The specification of the characteristics of Technical data
CRT. Required Guaranteed
0 1 2 3
1. Working conditions and environment

1.1 Conditions of work (LST) working at potential

1.2 Climate and environmental conditions

Exterior: pollution,
weathering, exposure
to solar radiation and
1.2.1 Place of work UV, etc.
1.2.2 Temperature -350C ... + 700C

1.2.3 Relative humidity of air MAX 100%

1.2.4 Elevation (sea level) < 400 m

2. Main technical characteristics

2.1 The types of fittings, tipodimensiunile and


mechanical performance to be specified in the Yes
standard company
2.2 Ensure fixing (mounting) in installations for

avoid disposing of their campaign in operation Yes

2.3 6 â technologies implementation LST "from


potential" using tools and devices for specific Yes
work and conventional tooling
2.4 The materials used in manufacturing to ensure
the use of the electrical and mechanical Yes
performance specified in the corporate standard
2.5 Dimensions and tolerances permitted by Yes
standard firm to ensure that the products satisfy
the conditions specified in the electrical and
mechanical business standard
2.6. Corrosion protection Yes

2.7. The type tests in accordance with par. 6.1


SRCEI 61284 specified in business standard Yes
2.8. Tests on the sample in accordance with § 6.2
61284 SRCEI specified in the corporate standard Yes
2.9. Individual tests series in accordance with par.
6.3 61284 SRCEI specified in the corporate Yes
standard
2.10 Reception tests: Visual and dimensional control
in accordance with cap. 7.8 SRCEI Yes
61284
2.11 Compliance with the requirements of the quality Yes
assurance system
2.12 Warranty from date of delivery specified in the Yes
corporate standard
TABLE 8. CLAMPS For Supporting ACTIVE CONDUCTORS
TECHNICAL DATA Sheet
Parameters and conditions imposed:
Nr. The specification of the characteristics of Technical data
CRT. Required Guaranteed
0 1 2 3
1. Working conditions and environment

1.1 Conditions of work (LST) working at remote


potential
1.2 Climate and environmental conditions

Exterior: pollution,
weathering, exposure
to solar radiation and
1.2.1 Place of work UV, etc.
1.2.2 Temperature -350C ... + 700C

1.2.3 Relative humidity of air MAX 100%

1.2.4 Elevation (sea level) < 400 m

2. Main technical characteristics

2.1 Types of clamps, mechanical performance


and tipodimensiunile to be specified in the Yes
standard company
2.2 Ensure fixing (mounting) in order to avoid
their disposal operating results Yes

2.3 6 â allow technologies to potential "LST" and


"remote", using tools and specific work Yes

2.4 The materials used in manufacturing to Yes


ensure the use of the electrical and
mechanical performance specified in the
corporate standard
2.5 Dimensions and tolerances permitted by Yes
standard firm to ensure that the products
satisfy the conditions specified in the
electrical and mechanical business standard
2.6. Corrosion protection Yes

2.7 The type tests in accordance with par. 6.1


SRCEI 61284 specified in business standard Yes

2.8 Tests on the sample in accordance with § 6.2


61284 specified in SRCEI Yes
business standard
2.9 Individual tests series in accordance with par.
6.3 61284 SRCEI specified in the corporate Yes
standard
2.10 Reception tests: Visual and dimensional
control in accordance with cap. 7.8 Yes
SRCEI 61284
2.11
Nr. Compliance
The with the
specification requirements
of the of the
characteristics of Yes Technical data
CRT. quality assurance system Required Guaranteed
2.12 Warranty from date of delivery specified in Yes TABLE 9.
1 the corporate standard
2 3 4
1. Working conditions and environment

1.1 Conditions of work (LST) working at


potential
1.2 Climate and environmental conditions

Exterior: pollution,
weather,
1.2.1 Place of work exposure to solar
radiation and UV,
etc.
1.2.2 Temperature -350C ... + 700C

1.2.3 Relative humidity of air MAX 100%

1.2.4 Elevation (sea level) < 400 m

2. Main technical characteristics

2.1 Mechanical performances to be specified in the


standard company Yes
2.2 Ensure fixing (mounting) in order to avoid their
disposal operating results Yes
2.3 6 â technologies implementation LST "from
potential" using tools and devices for specific Yes
work and conventional tooling
2.4 The materials used in manufacturing to ensure
the use of the electrical and mechanical Yes
performance specified in the corporate standard
2.5 Dimensions and tolerances permitted by Yes
standard firm to ensure that the products satisfy
the conditions specified in the electrical and
mechanical business standard
2.6. Corrosion protection Yes

2.7 The type tests in accordance with par. 6.1 SRCEI


61284 specified in business standard Yes
2.8 Tests on the sample in accordance with § 6.2

ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS. SPECIFIC DATA Sheet


Parameters and conditions imposed:
61284 SRCEI specified in the corporate standard Yes

2.9 Individual tests series in accordance with par.


6.3 61284 SRCEI specified in the corporate Yes
standard
2.10 Reception tests: Visual and dimensional control
in accordance with cap. 7.8 SRCEI Yes
61284
2.11 Compliance with the requirements of the quality Yes
assurance system
2.12 Warranty from date of delivery specified in the Yes
corporate standard
2.7. Technical specification for OPGW WIRE

2.7.1. GeneralităŢi

This document includes: composition, characteristics and mechanical properties, optical and electrical, marking,
packing and transport of protective Conductors with optical fiber composed of 36 optical fibre, used for overhead
power Lines.
These conductors must fulfil two functions: to ensure protection active conductors of the CENTURY from atmospheric
discharges and to act as a communication link.
This document also contains requirements concerning the implementation of the quality assurance Programme,
which shall be deemed an integral part of the delivery.
Optical fibers are intended for data transmission in areas with wavelengths ranging between 1550 nm and
1625 nm.
The contractor shall control and check all the requirements of this specification, and will ensure that in addition to
everything you need for a satisfăFătoare operation and long-lasting installation.

2.7.2. Standards

Are applicable to the latest versions of the standards and norms listed below.
If you are proposing other standards than those listed below, must be provided with the following information:-the
name of the standard, the number and the year of adoption;
-copy of the translation into English;
-Summary of the essential differences between the new proposed standard from the one originally adopted.
Standards for optical fibers:
THOSE 60793 Optical fibres
Standards for OPGW Constructing:
IEEE Std 1138-1994-Standard Construction of Optical Fiber Composite Overhead Ground Wire (OPGW) for
Use on Electric Utility Power Lines;
THOSE Overhead electrical conductors-61395 Creep test procedures for stranded conductors;
Standard colours for THOSE 60304 insulation for low-frequency cables and wires;
EIA/TIA 455 81A Compound (flow) test for fiber optic cable filled;
EIA/TIA 455 82B Water penetration test for fiber optic cable blocked fluid;
ITU-T Rec. L 35, Installation of optical fiber cables in the access network;
ITU-T Rec. l. 36/37 Single mode optical fibers, connectors;
ITU-T Rec. L 40, Monitoring system for OPGW cables;
ITU-T Rec. l. 41, Transmission performances on optical fibers;
ITU-T Rec. G. 911, Parameters and calculation methodologies for reliability and availability of fiber optic systems.
Standards for fiber optic cables:
ITU-T Definition and G650, test methods for the relevant parameters of single-mode fibres;
ITU-T G655, Characteristics of the NZ-DSF non zero dispersion shifted single-mode optical fiber cable;
THOSE 61089, Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors;
THOSE 60889, Hard-drawn aluminium wire for overhead line conductors;
THOSE 61232, Aluminium-clad steel wires for electrical purposes;
THOSE 60104, Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for overhead line conductors;
THOSE 60811 1 1 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables and optical cables-
Part 1-1: Methods for general application-Measurement of thickness and overall dimensions Tests for determining the
mechanical properties. Order of priority is as follows:
Romanian standards and Normative; This
Technical Specification;
ITU-T Standards; IEC
Standards; Any other
standards.

2.7.3. Functional Requirements


Încarcări conformity with 2.7.3.1.
Protection type OPGW wire that will be used on the LEA must meet the requirements of mechanical and
electrical characteristic of protective conductors.
It is recommended that the protection to be implemented by rustproof aluminare and not by hot dip galvanizing
(aluminate steel).
The cable sheath is designed to protect the fibres from the effects of the mechanical and electrical requests.
Mechanical Load
Încărcarile mechanical design criteria resulting from the influence of weather conditions and from electrical
applications. Protective conductor type OPGW and 160/95 95 mm2 will have major mechanical and dimensional
properties similar to those indicated in table conformity with 2.7.3.1.

Conformity with 2.7.3.1 table. The main conditions for sizing for OPGW 95
Technical data
Corresponding
Guaranteed
conductor Ol 95
Outside diameter (mm) 12,50

Section (mm2) 93,3

Specific mass (kg/km) 0,75

Wiring
19
- Steel wires (/mm)
_
- Aluminum wires (/mm)

Elasticity module (daN/mm2) 19600

Coefficient of thermal expansion (1/°


1.15 x 10-5
C)

Characteristics of short-circuit
-Rated current of short duration
(kA) Minimum. 10
-Short-circuit duration (s)
1
Maximum breaking load (UTS) (d)
Min. 12054
Table 2.7.3.2. Technical conditions for OPGW conductroul 160/95
Technical data current (kA)
Short circuit
These data
Corresponding
are corresponding
conductor AlOl Guaranteed
160/95 OPGW
160/95 OPGW 95 The duration of to the equivalent
Test the protection
Outside diameter (mm) 20,75
conductors (Ol 95
Section (mm2) 1 16,50
260,4 10,0 1 sec. AlOl and 160/95)
Thermal load
Specific mass (kg/km) 1,213 Protection type
OPGW wire will be
Wiring designed to operate within the
19/2.55
- Steel wires (/mm) following limits: heating:
52/2,0
- Aluminum wires (/mm)
maximum temperature: 40
Elasticity module (daN/mm2) 10750 ° C air;
minimum air temperature
Coefficient of thermal expansion (1/° (TL):-30 ° C;
1.52 x 10-5
C)
reference temperature
(TN): 15 ° C;
Characteristics of short-circuit
permissible cable
-Rated current of short duration (kA)
temperature (TH): 80 ° C;
-Short-circuit duration (s)
Minimum limit temperature (TE) that
16.5 1 can appear is determined by the
Maximum breaking load (UTS) (d) maximum value of the short-circuit
Min. 14084 current (IM) plecîndu from an initial
temperature of 40 ° c. Electrical
Load
The conductor must be able to withstand short-circuit currents of short duration (table 2.7.3.2) and electric
discharges in the form of lightning.

2.7.3.3 table. Short circuit current for OPGW tasks

Lightning-induced electric charge is defined as: x 10 Coulomb;


duration 5 ms x 100 Coulomb; duration of 500 ms.
2.7.3.2. Operating time

The conductor type OPGW and all its components shall have a minimum operating time of 50 years (period of
operation).

2.7.3.3. Scope
Electrical and mechanical sizing must comply with the requirements of the Romanian Norms for overhead power
lines.
The conductor will be suspended using clamps with preformed spirals (armour grip) with neoprene inserts.
Stretch sets will be equipped with spiral coil clamps and preformed spirals preformed. The manufacturer shall
indicate the types of fittings for support and stretch that can be used together with the cable.
The conductor will protect against high-frequency vibrations (> 1 Hz) with type antivibratoare Stockbridge, both sets
of stretching, as well as the supportive. In both cases, antivibratoarele will be installed using preformed spiral
protection. Specific size and isolation distances will be determined on the basis of the characteristics and geometry of
the cable.
2.7.4. Technical requirements

2.7.4.1. Optical Fibers


Fiber type: Wire will contain 36 G655NZDSF fiber.
Definitions and test methods shall be those set out in the standards and norms indicated, for each type, or specified
in this doument if there are more severe.

1550 nm/G. 655:

8 to 11 Pm
Mode Field Diameter IEC C9A, 60793-1-
± 10%
- deviation from the normal MFD
1 Pm
- error concentricitate MFD
0.5 Pm
- non-circularity MFD

Cladding Diameter, (CD) IEC 60793-1-A2 125 Pm

- deviation from normal CD 1 Pm

- non-circularity, IEC 60793-1-A2 1%

Colored fibre diameter IEC 60793-1-A2 250 Pm

Deviation from the normal CFD ± 15 Pm

Maximum cutting length of the wave (acc) 1260 nm

The maximum loss for fiber, 100 mm diameter 37.5 twists 0.05 dB

"0.24 dB/km
Attenuation coefficient
(1530-1625 nm)

Points of discontinuity, IEC 60793-1-C1C "0.05 dB

- Chromatic dispersion in C-band ps/2 to 7 (nm.)

- Chromatic dispersion. 1550 nm ps/4.95 (nm.)

- Chromatic dispersion. (1565-1625 nm) ps/8.5 (nm.)

- Chromatic dispersion. (1288-1339 nm) -

- Chromatic dispersion. (1271-1360 nm) -

PMD Coefficient "ps/¥ 0.1 km


All the
Dispersion slope 60793-1, IEC-C5C ps/nm2.0.05 km
fibers
should be
Permissible temperature without loss of optical performance -40oC to + 80 ° c made using the
same technology.
The specified characteristics will have to be applied equally to the individual fiber to fiber embedded in a cable reel
and the fibers from the cable installed.
This specification applies to circular fibers having a FA.
Optical fibers will allow digital transmission using DWDM technology at a rate starting at 155 Mbps up to 2.5 Gbps
over a distance of 117 km.
Additional attenuation due to temperature variation of 500C, anywhere in the operating temperature does not exceed
0.05 dB/km for wavelength of 1625 nm, făUă other external pressures.
Maximum frequency, for fiber optics, will be of 1480 nm.

Color code
Use the color code specified in IEC 60304.
Coloring, including the marking will be done clearly by using different colors. So you have to be able to identify all the
fiber optic cables from each tube lost (loose tube) over a length of 30 cm optical core, in circumstances where each
tube lost is encoded.
The color will be permanent, it may only be removed by removing the mantle or using special solvents. The colors of
the fibres will not lose intensity inside the cable junction boxes or in the terminal boxes. Dye will not influence any
property of the fibre optic cable, or.

Removing the mantle


The removal of surplus manta (scabbard) on fiber optics will be done mechanically

so on the surface of the fiber not to leave any residue.


Any additional layer the fiber tightly applied, to give a better mechanical strength or to ensure increased protection
from dust, will be applied only if it does not lead to complicating the bore.

Mechanical reliability
Before making the connection, all the fibres components will be subjected to a test for mechanical resistance to
traction exaggerated in order to ensure that the risk of rupture is small enough. The test will be executed by the
manufacturer as follows:
Level of request: 0.7 GPa, maintained for at least 1 second with a minimum of 1% elongation.

Protection coverage
The fibers will be protected by the application of a protective layer bonded (sheath) of the UV-acrylate, with a
diameter of 250 ± Njm 15Njm; other alternatives can be proposed for approval by the beneficiary.

Origin (origin) and fibre optic core components


Subcontractors will use fiber optics approved. Identification (like home) of each fiber will be guaranteed since
the contracting phase.

2.7.4.2. The structure of the core optical (Optical Core)

Number of optical fibers is 36.


Optical fibers or fiber groups will be placed in protective tubes. These tubes will form the secondary protection
(casing constituting the primary protection). Design of optical core will be based on the principle of the tube lost
(loose tube). This means that by design, the cable will be provided with a margin of tensile strength. The functions of
waterproof coating and tube (waterscreen) may be performed by the same core component.
The concept of optical core will prevent longitudinal displacement of the fibers inside the tube. Longitudinal water
infiltration into the individual tubes or optical will be prevented using a waterproof fabric print. Transverse water
infiltration will be prevented by using a waterproof coating.
Optical fibers will be incorporated făUă înădiri.
All type OPGW wire fibres will be made of the same type and kind.
Manufacturing and installation process will comply with all appropriate standards in order to avoid the loss of
additional specified under "Definitions".
O fiber optic cables will be carried out using standardised, high-performance tools.

2.7.4.3. transmission Properties of optical fiber retrodifuziune method ("Back-scatter pattern)":


Optical fibers will not be spliced cable and have a homogeneous quality. Through "back-scatter" will not record the
reflections or distortion of more than 0.10 dB @ 1550 nm, before or after the installation of the cable; at the same
time, the maximum size of the detected pulse will be of 50 ns for a value of 10 dB of impulse intensity and a
resolution of 1 meter.
Average attenuation coefficient:

Average attenuation coefficient-must be less than 0.24 dB/km.


Attenuation coefficient:
-C oeficientul local mitigation, calculated on the basis of the method of "back-scatter" two-way fiber can vary with an
average 0.1 dB/km for 1000 m for a wavelength of 1550 nm.
Wave length:
-Cutting wave Length (cut-off wavelength) (NJcc) of the fiber will be no more than 1260 nm.

2.7.4.4. The tube (Loose Tube)


The tube lost will be made of PE (polyethylene) or metal. Elongation of the tube will be proportional to the length of
the conductor.
If the tube is located in the immediate vicinity of the mantle conductor, then the exterior dimensions of the tube will
be correlated with the dimensions of the components of the stress of the wires.
Inside the tube will be smooth.
Steel tubes:

-If they have been welded after welding, it will remove the bavurile within them.

-as a rule, the tubes will not transverse weld; If welding is supported yet (only with the
beneficiary) will indicate the positions of the weld within the tube and the cable.

-do not accept drillings in the tubes.


The tube must not SAG and do I have to fulfil functions when subjected to the following requests:

-Thermal and electrical Loads, mechanical as defined in this specification;

-High Vibration (> 1 Hz) and low (< 1 Hz) frequency occurring;

-Mechanical clamping equipment referred to allegations of criuleni and stretch and from antivibratoarelor;

-All the usual procedures and permits the mounting of the wires. Deviation from circular form of the tube will
be "5%.

2.7.4.5. waterproof Shell (waterscreen)

Waterproof coating will consist of a metal tube welded or extruded.


In the case of stainless steel tubes, it will apply a thin layer of aluminum to prevent corrosion.

2.7.4.6. filling Compound (Filing Compound)

Compound filler (gel) must meet the following conditions:

You do not contain silicone, not to be conductor of the electrical point of view and be a homogenous gel;

You prevent the formation of hydrogen gas form inside the tube is lost;

You do not cause any harm to any components of the cable;


Be dermatologically harmless;

You do not hinder the movement of the fibres in tubes;

You do not create air;

You remain pliable and provide him with proof to the entire range of operating temperatures, and throughout
the life of the OPGW.
2.7.4.7. internal Supports
Any central guidance or strengthening resistance must be non-metallic; It will not break in the event that the
cable will be subject to maximum permissible thrust (QP). Breaking the central element must not lead to
destruction of fiber optic cables. Other built-in components can be manufactured from PE (polyethylene) or a similar
material.

2.7.4.8. Thermal stability

All optical core components will be thermally stable temperature field in TL-TH
Optical core will resist at peak temperatures (up to the maximum temperature) short-lived, făUă or damaging
deformation.

2.7.4.9. (Armour)
Protective sheath of optic cable will be built from the following types of metal wire with circular section:
-ACS wires (steel aluminate, allumoweld) according to THOSE 20 guy 61232 class a.
Înfunierea:

layer structure and the înfuniere will be in accordance with THOSE 61089.

the layers will not be greased;

When the conductor is not subjected to traction (is on the drum), the sărmele that makes up the mantle will be
in close contact;

the last layer (outer) will be infăşurat on the right; Welds:

-It is prohibited on the outer layers of the wire-rope;

-It is prohibited in the case of large ACS;

2.7.4.10. The radius of curvature (Bending Radius)


The tight radius curves under cable (subject to traction or not) can be bent during installation, IăUă like this to have
any negative effects on the properties of the cable must not exceed twenty times the outer diameter of the cable.
2.7.4.11. Mechanical strength

Maximum permissible thrust Qp will be > 70% of the protective conductor to the STU (1.3.1; table 1).
Mechanical strength depends on specific Qp:
RS t 1.25 ' QP.
RS 95% level is guaranteed, with a coefficient of variation of 3%.

2.7.4.12. short circuit resistance and lightning


The conductor will be able to bear the combined burdens, according to table 2. They will not cause breakage
or deformation of any component of the conductor.
Attenuation coefficient will not be higher than 0.05 dB/km than insubordinate to any conductor, normal requests
from ambient temperature. Any increase in attenuation will be temporary, returning to the original value of creation
in approx. 15 minutes.
In the event of a single downloads in the form of lightning, in accordance with Chapter 2.5.3 (test at atmospheric
discharges), salvage breaking strength will be at least QM. Waterproof shell and tube lost will not be affected by such
downloading. No transmission performance will not be affected by lightning strikes. Maximum permissible variation of
the attenuation in the point of impact will be no more than 0.01 dB. Any increase in attenuation will be temporary,
returning to the original value should be done in about 15 minutes.

2.7.4.13. Bending of conductor


When the conductor is stored is netensionat, or optical fibers will not flamba until at least equal temperatures Tit.
If the tube lost wrapped helically, minimum radius of curvature of fiber cable netensionat from Tit will be at least 40
mm.

2.7.4.14. The limit of elasticity (strain margin)

Optical core concept will do so under the combined action of the specified tasks that they do not exceed the limit of
elasticity; It will be greater than the sum of the length of the cable: due to combination of loads IMTE and QN, or
elongation to P Q and TN

creep resistance determined for a period of 10 years

residual elongation of the conductor determined

the design of the tube lost, the layered a reserve of at least 0.2 percent.
the design of the tube lost central, do not apply to any book.

2.7.4.15. obosealăşi resistance to mounting requests


The conductor must be capable of withstanding the vibration of high frequency (> 1 Hz) and low frequency (< 1 Hz)
appearing on CENTURY cable and Stamina. accessories at pregnancy fatigue, will be sufficient to enable it to operate
100 years provided that RS > RP and optical core does not have any Visual defect.
Any increase in attenuation coefficient due to the vibration of high frequency or low frequency conforming (fatigue
tests) and Assembly tasks that conforms to (test reel), recorded during the life of the operation, will be less than 0,
01dB/ km.
2.7.4.16. Marking and packaging

Each drum will have an indicator plate. The nameplate will be legible signs (in English) and properly protected from
the weather. Indicator plate will contain at least the following information:

contract number;

the name of the Contractorand manufacturer;

the registration number of the delivery order;

the code of conductor; the number of the drum; the length of the conductor;

net weight of condutorului and brutăşi of the drum;

the main dimensions of the drum.


Each length of conductor will be wrapped onto separate spools. The upper layers of the reels will be protected with
waterproof waxed paper or plastic wrap.
Will fix the wooden slats to prevent damage to the cable during transport, handling and storage.
All type OPGW wire will be stored and transported on wooden spools. Each drum will be tough enough to prevent
damage to the cable during storage, handling and installation. The minimum diameter of the drum will be 30 times
higher than the outer diameter of the conductor.
The ends of the conductor will be available for testing and will be attached to the drum to prevent deterioration. Each
end of the conductor will have caps to prevent ingress of moisture in the conductor.

2.7.5. Tests and checks

2.7.5.1. Overview

All optical tests will be conducted in accordance with the standards mentioned and for the minimum wavelength of
1550 nm.
In the event of discrepancies between the two standards, will have priority to the interpretation.
The contractor will record the results of all tests and inspections, we will authorize and archive. Test and verification
protocols will be made available to the beneficiary for consideration.
The finished plug can constitute subject to random inspections at the factory acceptance drawn up on behalf of the
beneficiary; However, as a rule, will not be tested by more than 10% of the drums. The beneficiary will be entitled to
test if any of the conductors shall comply with the requirements imposed by this document. The results of the tests
carried out by the manufacturer and must be also checked twice. If these checks indicate discrepancies compared
with the data in such a way as to impose fresh tests, inspectors may require inspecting all the cables in question.

2.7.5.2. Assay variation in temperature (Temperature cycling test)-according to THOSE 794-1-


F1 is used For testing a sample of at least 500 meters of cable. In its original state, the cable will be
maintained at a temperature of 10 0C for eight (8) hours. Minimum temperature during the test will be 20 0C and the
maximum, 50 0c. "t1" Parameter will be eight (8) hours, and the temperature will vary with ± 10 0C, every hour.
During the test, will be recorded in the signal propagation delay variation in optical fibers according to temperature
variation.
2.7.5.3. Test atmospheric discharges
The test will be conducted atmospheric descărcărcarea on a sample of cable suspended. Electrical unloading in the
form of lightning (total load of approximately 110 Coulomb) will consist of an initial brief duratăşi a final discharge.
The test will be conducted at least twice in two distinct points, spaced five meters. 1.3.1. the separation Distance
between electrodes in the air will be less than 1 cm and downloading will be oriented to the center of a invelişul steel
outer conductor. During the test they will record the values of the signal attenuation snapshots in optical fibers.

2.7.5.4. creep Test according to CEI-61395

Duration of the test shall be at least one thousand (1000) hours. During the test, they will record the temperature
and elongation of the cable. When these values cannot be taken continuously, the recording will be done
approximately every four (4) hours, for the first one hundred (100) hours and approximately every twelve (12)
hours, for the remainder of the test. Thrust to achieve test is 15% of the STU and the temperature 15 ° c.

2.7.5.5. The test for deformation and elasticity-61089 ONES; THOSE 60794

Test of deformation:
-Method: 61089, section 6.5 test of resiliency:
-Method: 60794-1-E1A for mitigation and IEC 60794-1-E1B for elongation of the fibres.
-Assembly: the sample is suspended, using clamps and fittings as referred to in Chapter 4. The ends of the
conductor will be arranged in such a way that the various components may not move inside. The length of
the sample will be suspended for at least 10 metres. Transmission performance of optical fibres will be
measured with optical connection concatenated. Optical link shall be at least 500 m.

-Load:NQ, QMQP

2.7.5.6. fatigue-tests according to IEEE 1138


For the proposed method, there are no further specifications.

2.7.5.7. Tests of reel according to IEEE-1138


For the proposed method, there are no further specifications.

2.7.5.8. The radius of curvature-according to THOSE 60794-1-E6, E11


The test repeated windings:
Method: 60794-1-E6;

Diameter of winch: 20 times the outer diameter of the cable;


Number of windings: 100; Thrust: 100 N.
Cable winding test under load:
Method: 60794-1-E11;

Mandrel diameter: 20 times the outer diameter of the cable;


Number of cycles 10; the number of revolutions per cycle 6; 5 seconds per rotation. Thrust: 100 N
2.7.5.9. Test temperature of filling compound optical core-81A-according to EIA455

It will suspend a sample of cable vertically at a temperature of 65 C for a period of seventy-two (72) hours. After this
period, at least 90% of the initial quantity of filling compound must Uămână within the sample.

2.7.5.10. Test temperature of the composition of the filler tube-according to EIA-455-81A shall suspend
a vertical sample tube at a temperature of 65 ° C for seventy-two (72) hours. After this period, at least 90% of the
initial quantity of filling compound must remain inside the sample.

2.7.5.11. the longitudinal permeability test-in accordance with EIA/TIA-455-82B


It will use a sample of approximately two (2) meters which will include a waterproof wrapper, if at the design stage it
has been provided. The sample will be placed horizontally and at one end will be connected to a column of water.
During the test, the column will be of 100 ± 5 cm above the waterproof sheath.
The water column will be mixed with a brightly colored substance, that in the event that the cable is flooded, with
water to penetrate; also, this substance should not be to change the composition.
After twenty-four (24) hours, 75% of the length of the sample must not have the color of the substance.

2.7.5.12. lost Tube

If the tube lost was welded, it will check if welding indoors burrs. It will also be inspected the interior surface of the
tube end.

2.7.5.13. dimensions-according to THOSE who 811-1-1

Refers to the lost and waterproof shell tubes (if one exists). They will also be inspected, diameter deviation
from circular form and welding cords (if any).

2.7.5.14. Large mantle-61089 according to THOSE who will carry out the following tests:

-the ACS wires: tensile strength, elongation, electrical properties, dimensions, strength
at încolăcire;

-outer diameter: layers of each layer; step of winding.

2.7.5.15. short circuit test


An OPGW will be subjected to cycle of three tests with different test parameters as shown in table 2.
Oscilogramele short-circuit currents and voltages applied during the tests shall be recorded. Photos will be provided
to demonstrate that the test has not produced the deterioration of the protective conductor.
That will feed the circuit current fault, as well as the arrangement of conductors subjected to testing, will be
approved by the principal.
The test shall be performed on a single type of OPGW with fastening clamps and făUă at the pole.

2.7.5.16. Visual inspection

The components will have no sharp edges, burrs, etc. The properties will be determined using appropriate devices.
The following aspects should be pursued:
-the materials used;
-technical project compliance overall;
-constructive (manufacturing);
-assembling;
-the type of components;
-the method of finishing;
-How to identify the product;
-păUŢile missing;
-damage (if any); -packing.
2.7.5.17. Method "BACK-SCATTER"

It will specify the refractive index and refractive index of optical fibers.
Fiber optics will be tested in both directions. The tests will be carried out under the following conditions:
-Pulse will be no higher than the level of 50ns 10dB at 1550nm and 1 meter resolution;
-the noise level will be below 0, 02dB;
-registration will be effected for values over 0, 4dB/cm and 800 m/cm;
-the length of the source spectral width undăşi will be marked with an error of up to 5 nm;
-they will record the status of the test fibre, agenda/operator/data/device and device parameters, and
return results.

2.7.5.18 Dispersion.

Test method-according to ITU-T Rec. g. 650 Chapter 2.5.

2.7.5.19. Dispersion of wave (polarization mode dispersion) test method-

according to the EIA-455-113; 122; 124.

2.7.5.20. Emitter blocked (cut-off wavelength)-according to CEI60793

Tests will be performed on the same portions of fiber using the same parameters and the same documentation. The
following parameters will be measured on all sample components of fibre cable:
-cc of fiber, the 793-1-C7, the basic configuration 1. The sample will have 22 m.
-cc of fibers affected THOSE 793-1-C7, the basic configuration 2. The sample will be that of the previous
point.

2.7.5.21. identification and measurement of optical core components

Test results and identifying data will be available both under the digital and printed form.

2.7.6. Presentation of results

2.7.6.1. quality assurance Programme

The quality assurance programme shall contain at least the following:


-type tests;
-inspection of materials purchased;
-routine inspection (routine inspections);
-reception tests from manufacturer "Factory Acceptance Test"

INSPECţIIILE MATERIALS Purchased


Within the quality assurance Programme shall verify the following:

-fiber: fiber tests (100%); the sample coefficient of attenuation;

colouring fibers (1 sample);


-waterproof coating (certificate or 1 sample);

-filling compound (or certificate 1 sample).

TECHNICAL DATA ROUTINE


TESTS
REQUIRED GUARANTEED Within the quality
OPGW160/95 assurance Programme
shall verify the
1. Outer diameter (mm) 20,75
following:

2. the total Cross-section (mm2) 260,2 colouring fibers (> 5%)


sample
3. specific Mass (kg/km) 1218
-longitudinal
permeability (> 10%)
4. Wiring sample

-Aluminium Threads (number/diameter) -excess fiber-optic


52/2,0
tubes in lost (> 10%)
-Steel Wires (number/diameter) sample
19/2.55
5. elasticity (N/mm2) 107553 -> sample test OTDR
(25%)
6. Coefficient of thermal expansion (1/0C) 1.52 * 10-5

7. Characteristics of short-circuit

- Rated short-time current (kA)


16,5
- Duration of the short-circuit (s)
1
-holes tubes (100%) sample size the sampling tubes (100%)

2.7.6.2. Technical Data conductor equivalent

1.8. Maximum load breaking (UTS) (N) 138544

1.9. Minimum radius of curvature < 20 x diameter

1.10. maximum permissible Thrust at clamp:

- at0-5 C + wind + Frost,


50% of the STU

- at-300C, făUă,
50% of the STU

- 150C + maximum wind


50% of the STU
TECHNICAL DATA

REQUIRED GUARANTEED
OPGW 95
1.1. External diameter (mm) 12,5

1.2. the total Cross-section (mm2) 93,3

1.3. specific Mass (kg/km) 751

1.4. Wiring

-Steel Wires (number/diameter)


19/2.5
1.5. How elasticity (N/mm2) 196000

1.6. Coefficient of thermal expansion (1/0C) 1.15 * 10-5

1.7. Features of short circuit

- Rated short-time current (kA)


10
- Duration of the short-circuit (s)
1
1.8. Maximum load breaking (UTS) (N) 120.540

1.9. Minimum radius of curvature < 20 x diameter

1.10. maximum permissible Thrust at clamp:

- at0-5 C + wind + Frost,


50% of the STU

- at-300C, făUă,
50% of the STU

- 150C + maximum wind 50% of the STU

accordance with 2.7.6.3. additional information


Will be provided the following additional information:
-Drums: sizes and designs;
OPGW-backup: dimensions and design drawings of the reels; -Detailed installation Instructions including:
a method of installation;
a conditions for handling of OPGW in order to punish, clemuirii and his preparation for connecting
junction boxes; an accepted or indicated clamps, fittings and splice boxes;
a grant of special attention to the conditions of use of the tires, anti-twisting devices and diameter of
winch.
-Indication of the diluent used for removing the filler compound, which should not affect the
properties of optical fibers.
-Indication of the preparation of the ends of the conductor/tubes to prevent leakage of the compound
filling inside the junction boxes and the splice;
-Splice equipment that will be used;
-The technical data for the manufacture of OPGW;
-The contractor will also provide data in the form of graph or table, of the minimum radius of curvature for
pull-ups, ranging from zero up to the maximum permissible thrust, for which retains the optical performance of
OPGW.
-tables of pull-ups and arrows:
-rated openings for 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 m, in the form of chart or table, for OPGW wire used, for
temperatures-300, 00,0+ 15 and 400c.
-pull-ups and arrows in the conditions stipulated in norm NTE 003/04/00 weather for areas B and C, and
the Panel specifically referred to in the conditions of the crossing for
2.8. Technical specification for OPGW ACCESSORIES

2.8.1. General considerations


2.8.1.1. Order delivery

This document encompasses the composition, characteristics and mechanical properties, optical and electrical,
marking, packing and transport of Accessories for protective Conductors with fiber optics.
Additionally this document contains requirements relating to the implementation of the quality assurance Programme,
which shall be deemed an integral part of the delivery.
optical paths are intended for data transmission in areas with wavelengths ranging from 1550 nm and 1625 nm.
The contractor shall control and check all the requirements of this specification, and will ensure that in
addition to everything you need for a satisfăFătoare operation and long-lasting installation.
This specification concerns the following types of attachments:

Sets for OPGW;

Order expanse OPGW sets;

Antivibratoare for OPGW;

Junction boxes;

Allocator (termination box);

Intermediate cords and connectors;

Monitoring equipment for the optical system;

OPGW link clamps at the pole;

Clamps for fixing of colacilor OPGW on reserve;


2.8.2. CerinŢe funcŢionale

2.8.2.1. Sets for OPGW

A set of supports for OPGW will include at least:


-belt clip headband (OPGW wire retains up to 1850);
preformed protection-spire
-clamp and rope earthing (between OPGW and mast)
-any other necessary component to allow installation on pole support sets will be adequately protected
against:
-corrosion
-temperature range from-300 C and + 80 0C
-radiation ultra violet (UV)
-ozone
-pollution
- short-circuit currents
Support clamps will be how lighter and will contain a protective covering against vibration.
Construction of the terminal will be such that it forms a fully articulated support for conductors. The body of the
clamp will be swung, and the central axis of rotation of the clamp will be at much the same level as the axis of
conductor, never above it. The body of the clamp will be able to swing by at least 45 degrees over and below the
horizontal line. Special attention should be paid to the moment of inertia of the clamp to avoid resonance ensemble-
conductor clamp vibrations produced by the wind. From this point of view, the contractor will provide the support
clamps suitable for the conditions you specify.
No. crt Set protective conductor OPGW 95 Technical data

Required Guaranteed
Support for OPGW wire set 95

1.1 The task of sustaining the slip clamp (d) Max. 1850

1.2 Diameter of surubului reinforcement binding to mast (mm) 20

1.3 Surubului clamp diameter ropes, electric, the mast (mm) 12

Support clamp components will be dimensioned and will take shape so as not to appear or bending
deformation of conductor. Neither the relative displacements of the wires and wire layers. An appropriate
design of the clamps will avoid friction, etc.
Conductor support area (bed clip) will be curved at the ends, in the vertical plane, with a radius of curvature of not
allowing păUăsirea conductor clamp under the maximum angle of inclination of 20 °.
Favorite type of clamp clamp support is supportive with spire preformed (AGS).

2.8.2.2 are performed. Sets stretching for OPGW


A set of stretching for OPGW will contain at least the following:
-clamping system with helical spirals preformed, clamp ring;
preformed protection-spire
-earthing clamp (between OPGW and mast)
-any other necessary component installation on pole
Order expanse OPGW sets will be adequately protected against:
-corrosion
-temperature range from-300 C and + 800 C
-short-circuit currents
Grips will correspond to the type and dimensions of the OPGW wire. Preformed spirals will protect large values of
OPGW against radial forces produced by the tracŢiunile that occur during operation or installation. For this reason,
the spirals will be preformed longer than preformed clamping heads spirals, allowing safe installation of one or
two antivibratoare.
Helical spirals system will be made of the ACS high strength.
Preformed spirals will be made from AA or ACS.
Table 2.8.2.2.1. Requirements for OPGW wire sets 95
1.4 Minimum breaking load (daN) 6000

Set stretch for OPGW wire 95

2.1 The task of slipping up stretching clamp (d) 11450

2.2 Diameter of surubului reinforcement binding to mast (mm) 20

2.3 Surubului clamp diameter ropes, electric, the mast (mm) 12

2.4 Minimum breaking load (daN) 16000

Table 2.8.2.2.2. Requirements for OPGW wire sets 160/95


No. Set protective-conductor 160/95 OPGW Technical data
crt
Required Guaranteed

Set support for OPGW wire 160/95

1.1 The task of sustaining the slip clamp (d) Max. 1850

1.2 Diameter of surubului reinforcement binding to mast (mm) 20

1.3 Surubului clamp diameter ropes, electric, the mast (mm) 12

1.4 Minimum breaking load (daN) 6000

Set stretch for OPGW wire 160/95

2.1 The task of slipping up stretching clamp (d) 13160

2.2 Diameter of surubului reinforcement binding to mast (mm) 20

2.3 Surubului clamp diameter ropes, electric, the mast (mm) 12

2.4 Minimum breaking load (daN) 16000

2.8.2.3. Antivibratoare for OPGW


OPGW will be protected against fatigue caused by wind vibration by using antivibratoarelor type
Stockbridge.
Antivibratoarele will only be on OPGW wire protected with spiral preformed. Depending on the length of the opening,
it will mount two or four antivibratoare per opening.
Antivibratoarele will be adequately protected against:
-corrosion
-temperature range from-300 C and + 800 C
Antivibratoarelor clamps will be so designed that the mounting damage of the OPGW to be minimal. Antivibratoarelor
installation will be done using ordinary tools.
Antivibratoarelor counterweights shall be so designed as to avoid accumulation of water. the screws will tighten by a
method approved.

2.8.2.4. Junction boxes


Construction and mechanical, optical and electrical junction boxes for OPGW and other fiber-optic cables (OPUG) are
listed below. These specifications apply to cables installed.
The junction boxes are used for connecting optical fibers of two or more cables with fiber optics.
Junction boxes shall perform the following functions:
-Protection of înnădirilor fiber optic cables in accordance with climatic conditions defined in THOSE 61073
-Protection of matisărilor (înnădirilor) mechanical and fusion for fibers and fiber optic cables. -Ensuring access for
modification and maintenance of the cables during their lifetime, făUă damage any components.
Usually the junction boxes between OPGW and OPUG from entries in the mount stops at + 3 m above the ground.
Junction boxes of OPGW frames will mount end cap statilor.
In the vicinity of the junction box will store a backup cable. This book will allow cable complete reassembly of
a junction boxes.
Conception junction boxes will provide:
-Local Protection fibers and inadirilor
-Extra-protection installation on appropriate use and high-voltage lines.

-Extra-protection appropriate to the properties of the cables will be connected.


A junction box installed will contain the following components:
-Fixing Clamps to prevent mantle mantle dezvelirii OPGW.
(Armor fixatuin)
-The fixing of the cable Clamps to get traction from the conductor.
(Grip)
-Hook hanging Hook for hanging the junction box on the pole.
(Hoisting Eye)
-Tube adapter Device for connecting a core cable with one customized standardized (Loose tube adapter).
-Mounting Frame Structure used to allow installation on pole housing box (Mounting frame) junction
-Housing of the outer carton in order to protect the core of the cable and the post-synaptic junction. (Housing
Splicebox)
-Protection of the enclosure sealed box containing the appropriate labels and joins. junction
(Housing Splicebox)
-Junction Box Drawer containing junction boxes, book of fibrăşi tube.
(Splicebox)
Final installation will meet all requirements for proper functioning over a period of 50 years. The manufacturer shall
indicate all methods and modalities for ensuring proper equipment underestimated throughout the reference period.
The estimated life span of optical fibers and joints will be ensured in good measure:
x use of drawers junction resistant to vapour apăşi;
x the presence of hygroscopic substances in the drawers of the junction; x
use of materials which serve several purposes; x protection of optical fiber
joints.
Electrical and mechanical concept will meet the requirements of en standards in force (for overhead high voltage).
Between cable and reserve junction box, OPGW will be tied to the mast using the appropriate means to support
the electrodinamic effect of short-circuit currents.
Hygroscopic substance will be replaced or supplemented whenever the junction box will be opened for inspection or
repair.
Junction box will ensure access to fiber-optic cables through the access covers located within the base,
properly sealed to prevent ingress of moisture. Junction box will provide the possibility to merge at least four
fiber-optic cables. Access lids will be appropriate for different types of fiber-optic cables, through the use of seals.
Unoccupied premises wiring shall be sealed by means of threaded fasteners, seals and caps to allow subsequent
accesses use special tool făUă.
Each junction box will be fitted with an arrangement of connections and will be marked. The necessary information
allowing the schemes will be provided by the beneficiary.
The frames in junction boxes, OPGW-OPUG, optical fibers will be merged pursuant to a plan of connections. Junction
boxes that unite more than two cables will be equipped with individual connections diagrams that will be made
available to the recipient in a timely manner.
Junction diagram will allow organization joins, keeping under control the radii of curvature of the cables.
Opening, closing and sealing the junction box and the enclosure will require power tools and the use of a small
number of special tools.
TThe junction will be equipped with a latch.
Protective sheath of the junction will be adapted to thermal protection.

2.8.2.5. distribution Frames-ODF


To connect to the equipment from OPGW electric 400 kV g. Ialomita And Npp, OPGW will be joncŢionat with a OPUG.
From there, the OPUG will be used as an extension of the OPGW cable towards connecting to distribution Frames
(ODF). OPUG cable is provided in the documentation for your workstation.

2.8.2.7. Measuring equipment caracterisicilor optical fibers optical measuring equipment will allow the
beneficiary as follows:

x You determine the optical performance along the entire length of the installed optical; x You check the

continuity of the optics; x Monitor your ageing and degradation of optical paths.

2.8.2.8. binding to mast Clamps

From vârfar up to the junction box, OPGW will fix with clamps on the frame. No additional holes are permitted on the
bars over the column.
The clips will be dimensioned to be able to fix the pillar elements on the bars. In addition, clamps used to secure the
fiber-optic cable will be dimensioned so as not to damage the cable with fiber optic cable.
OPUG will be fixed to the frame with terminal clamps special features more similar to those mentioned above. On a
stretch of 3 meters above the ground, OPUG will be protected with the help of a steel tube, covered in its upper part
to prevent infiltrations of water.

Clamps for attaching 2.8.2.9. decision making process up OPGW on pole


After connection, the conductor will be remained coiled OPGW using circular template with a diameter of 1 m from
Various layers of OPGW lifeline will be placed in such a way as to ensure a space of 2 cm between them. Each layer
will contain a minimum of two loops of OPGW.
The hoop will be fixed to the mast above the junction box.

2.8.2.10. Packing, dispatch and transport


All packing, shipping and transport from the place of manufacture, as well as insurance, loading, unloading and
transport in ROMANIA, in the indicated by the client, will be performed by the Contractor. Components damaged
during these operations will be replaced at the expense of the contractor.
Equipment and materials will be packed in crates of reusable timber in a manner you prevent damages during
transport and handling. Small-sized equipment will be packed in jute bags weighing up to 25 kg inside containers.
Over 25 kg containers will be delivered with a view to their handling pallet by means of fork lift trucks.
On each package shall be marked with indelible paint citeŢşi the following information:
Contract title and reference number;
The Name Of The Manufacturer;
Instructions and limitations on the operation of the hoist; The type and quantity of the products.
Conditions of packaging, shipping and transportation will be described in the technical Offer.
After completion of the work, all the empty crates will be delivered to the recipient.
2.9. Technical specifications for DEVICES ANTIGALOPARE PENDULUM TYPE
2.9.1. Purpose
Pendulum-type antigalopare device was designed to be placed on the overhead power lines, especially the portions
thereof, where there is an increased risk of concurrent conditions of galopare phenomenon of the conductors. By
using these devices in line will reduce the amplitude of galopării up to 0.85-0.9 from conductors in the opening
arrow.
These specifications contain data relating to manufacture and supply distanŢierilor antigalopare pendulum type II
400 kV ACSR conductors equipped with 3 350F/60 on the stage, step of 400 mm. fasciculare
Contractor will comply with these specifications and exactly within its tender will include study of the
manufacturer demonstrating that the requirements of these specifications are complied with in full.
Antigalopare device type 3 wire for ACSR pendulum 350F/60 to install conductors equipped with armour-rods length
1500 mm. armour sets-rods must be included in the delivery. It specifies that the înăOŢimea pendulum motions was
considered in calculating the dimensions of conductors versus soil or other objectives attainable.
Distances (in position) And the number of devices on the open, will be checked to the manufacturer together with
FRANTZ devices.
2.9.2. Documents and preconditions
All material relating to the delivery of this pendulum type device must be in accordance with the following standards:
-IEC 61284, ed. 2, Overhead lines-Requirements and tests for fittings, Publication data: 19979-17;

-IEC 61854, ed. 1.0, the Overhead lines-Requirements and tests for spacers, Publication dates:
1998-9-23;
-IEC 61897, ed. 1.0, the Overhead lines-Requirements and tests for Stockbridge type aeolian vibration
dampers, Publication date: 1998-9-11.
As long as the antigalopare device type pendulum does not own the Standard will take into consideration the relevant
requirements contained in IEC 61284 standards, IEC 61854 and IEC 61897 or other standards that could meet the
requirements described below.

2.9.3. Design requirements


Antigalopare device type pendulum must be made to prevent and limit the effects of galopării conductors covered
with ice.
Pendulum-type devices should be realizaŢe so that:
-to maintain the distance between the subconductoare, regardless of the operating regime;
-preventing, in subdeschiderile of the spacers, physical contact between the subconductoare, with the
exception of the occurrence of short-circuit currents when can achieve is supported by ensuring that the separation
space to be reattached immediately after the defect;
-to withstand mechanical tasks imposed during installation, maintenance and operation (including short
circuit regime) făUă to produce their damage or permanent deformations that are not permitted;
-to avoid damage during subconductoarelor operating regimes;
-to be suitable for an easy installation sigurăşi;
-maintain its functionality throughout the entire range of operating temperatures; -to
avoid acoustic noise.
Tightening clamps must be made from aluminium alloy with a breaking strength 200 MPa (20 kg/mm2) and an
elongation of 0.5%.
Pendulum counterweights must be made of steel and shall be protected against corrosion by hot-dip
galvanizing. If they are made of a metal or alloy that does not require heating, anticorrosive protection "will
be eliminated.
Damping elements must be made from synthetic rubber, with a tenacity on the Shore of 5060 conventional units and
will need to provide a cushioning characterized by a logarithmic decrement of at least 1.6., proven through tests.
clamp screws and washers are made of steel and protected by hot galvanizing or stainless steel.
Antigalopare pendulum type devices will be installed into the openings, the unequal intervals on the basis of studies
known as "Damping Efficiency Study", with that opportunity will validate the number of pendulum motions according
to the openings and mounting distances thereof.

2.9.4. Materials used in manufacturing


Antigalopare pendulum type devices should be made of any material that is suitable for their purpose. The materials
must be in accordance with the requirements of the standard IEC 61284.

2.9.5. Marking
In accordance with the requirements of IEC 61284, marking will be done on the device on a flat area of it, for
example on one or both rigid spacers pendulum with labels that do not explode or depress for exposure outside
temperatures-30 a C ÷ + 50 oC and UV.

2.9.6. Installation instructions


The manufacturer will provides the complete description of the installation procedure and will indicate the place of
mounting devices antigalopare pendulum type, opening in. ..
Prior to the commencement of the work, the contractor will have a team of Surveyors to measure each opening and
measure at the same time the arrows in each open conductors. These data will be transmitted to the designer of the
device, so it can analyze the situation on the ground and to indicate the places where the final mounting of the
devices in each opening, within the framework of technical assistance from the designer .

2.9.7. the requested technical requirements


2.9.7.1. mechanical Stresses
Antigalopare devices must ensure that the distance between the two conductive fasciculare of a stage, avoiding
touching the two subconductoare in any condition of mechanical loading subconductoarelor (wind, Frost, hail, wind)
and amortize these oscillations subconductoarelor disipând energy of oscillations.
1. Maximum accepatate for mechanical forces to:
-Compression subconductoarelor to the center of the beam: 8.7 kN-subconductoarelor,
Laying from the Center beam: 4.4 kN.
2Momentul tightening torque (torque) of the screw of the clamp device antigalopare: 95 Nm ± 5%. 3Clemele
spacers must resist longitudinal forces arising from the difference in thrust (at least 2 kN). Maximum allowed in each
sliding clamp should not exceed 1 mm;
4. Clips spacers must resist without slipping at a time a twist that comes from Uăsucirea 25 subconductoarelor
N * m;
5. destroy spacers Clips conductor at a moment of torsion of 110% of the nominal value. The effectiveness of the
link should be Kept below 10 cycles. Raising torsion moment at 1.5 times the nominal value must not reduce the
clamp elements;
6. depreciation of properties Deviations system damping of a pendulum must be within the limits of ± 20% of
nominal value;
7. antigalopare Device must not destroy the subconductoarele nor on himself, in the following operating conditions:
-Longitudinal Movements of a subconductor towards each other to be within ± 8 mm;
-The movement of a cone the other clamps up to an angle of up to ± 30 °;

8. The movement of the horizontal cross-section of a conductor to the other up to 8 mm.


9. antigalopare Device must be able to withstand the oscillations:
In subdeschideri, 107 cycles of oscillation with amplitude of 6 mm (p-p), the frequency 1-2 Hz; wind, 108
cycles of vibration with angular amplitude of 0, 20, from frequency 1grade Hz; at galopare, 106 cycles of
oscillations at a frequency of 0.1 to 1 Hz.
After these tests, the amount of time the tightening of the screw of the clamp must be greater than 50% of the
original value.
10. Parameterii antigalopare device type pendulum must be in the range of 0.1 to 1 Hz frequency.

2.9.7.2. electrical Requests


Antigalopare pendulum type devices must be compiled in order to be able to resist permanent deformation, făUă,
very high radial forces electro arising at the time of a short circuit and not to cause damage subconductoarelor in the
area of Terminal clamps on the conductor.
To avoid partial discharge on metal elements to the potential (clamps).
1. Design and execution of the pendulum type antigalopare device must be făUă the upper corona
downloads a maximum phase voltage service multiplied by 1.1 x 1.1 (= nominal voltage/ 3).

2. The pendulum must not produce at a frequency of 1 MHz, a value greater than measured RIV 50 dB/NjV at 1.1
x maximum service voltage/ 3.

2.9.8. Testing and inspections. Quality control


Quality control
The contractor must provide "follow-up Plan to ensure quality" which should reflect their arrangements of
"Quality Control" demands standards and consider the requirements specified. It must be comprehensive in
that it will contain all proposals for accompanying measures of quality control for all equipment supplied. Shall be
drawn up in accordance with the ISO 9000 standards. All materials, components and equipment delivered in this
Contract and related works will be inspected by the customer. The contractor has the first responsibility for ensuring
the quality of equipment supplied under the Contract and is responsible for the jobs that give them towards
subcontractatare. The works are to be only subcontracting companies actually "Quality Control". Quality should be
monitored by the contractor through participation in the tests.
The contractor, at the proper time, it will prove that the material and/or its responsible equipment requirements of
this chapter. This is achieved only through the success of the tests and inspections.
Apart from individual testing and routine, before contracting shall submit the beneficiary certificates of the tests.

2.9.9. Classification tests


2.9.9.1. type Tests
Establish design features. Normally they are made once and repeated only when designing or changing device
material
These checks shall be carried out in order to determine the characteristics of the design. Each of the tests laid down
shall apply, as a rule, three specimens of each type. It is mandatory that all specimens tested to comply with the
conditions of the test.

2.9.9.2. batch tests


Tests are performed on lot lots of products and are intended to verify the performance tests specified in type. Also
you want to check the quality of the materials and quality of manufacture.
For each consignment to be delivered must be carried out in tests 9.5.1. ÷ 9.5.5. on a number of specimens,
depending on the size of the lot. Thus, the number of specimens must be 2 lots, for up to 300 pieces, 4, for
consignments of 300-2000 pieces, 8, for batches of 2000-5000 pieces and 12 for batches of more than 5000 pieces
in accordance with the test procedure ISO 2859-1 ISO 2859-2 and ISO 3951.
These tests will take place at the manufacturer's laboratory with representatives of beneficiary and the designer.
If tests measure a antigalopare device does not match, it restores the test for a new device. If the latter is not
reuşHşte or where two specimens do not correspond, the batch shall be rejected, being sent to analizăşi sorting,
grading new low batch being subjected to batch testing triple number specimens.
At the request of the beneficiary, can accept optional tests have been carried out in this category and can enter
optional tests referred 9.5.13. but the associated costs will be borne by the customer additionally.

2.9.9.3. routine Tests


Routine tests must prove their conformity to the requirements of this specification on each device separately.
Tests should not destroy the device.
The whole batch of devices must pass the test routine.
Acceptance tests shall be made at least 3 parts according to the table.

Clause Test Test method


Antigalopare device
Name the test and verification Number of samples
Test type Batch test Routine test Table 9.1.
Checking dimensions inspection 100%
Acceptance
Verification,
9.5.1 delivery,
Visual packing and marking inspectionx
examination 100%x x tests
9.5.2 Checking the dimensions, material and x 0.5%xof the lot but not
a less than
Checking the main requirements of Measuring
weight 3 pieces (when there are more
mechanical, electrical and environmental instruments The required
9.5.3 Corrosion protection test (if applicable) x than 50
x pieces.) a
tests are
presented in
Mechanical tests
the table
9.5.4 -Sliding Tests of the clip x x below.

9.5.5 -Tightening of tests the bulonului clamp x x Table 9.2.


Tests on
9.5.6 -Simulation Tests of short circuit current a a
and compression and tension tests

9.5.7 -Elastic and damping Characteristics x a

9.5.8. -Flexibility tests x a

9.5.9 -Fatigue Tests a

Electrical tests

9.5.10 -Corona voltage Tests and radio x


and interference
9.5.11
9.5.12. Tests of electrical resistance x a

9.5.13. -Non-destructive Testing a a a


antigalopare Devices
2.9.9.4. Test methods
Test methods of antigalopare Devices must be in accordance with this technical specification.
Test conditions in accordance with this specification.
Visual inspection, checking of delivery, packaging and marking will be done by inspection.
Checking the main dimensions and mass of the pendulum shall be done with instruments with accuracy.
Verification of the material from which it is manufactured the device will be based on the basis of certificates of
factory material.

2.9.9.5. Specification tests


2.9.9.5.1. Visual inspection
Visual inspection consists of Visual examination of specimens shall be tested for the purpose of observing compliance
with the project from the point of view of the manufacturing process, of the forms and the roughness of surfaces.

2.9.9.5.2. Verification of three-dimensional, materials used and the


Check for all sizes, comparing them with those projects, if the deviations observed fall into the tolerances.
Checking of materials used is done by comparing the material specifications and certificates acquired quality
related with the project specifications.

2.9.9.5.3. checking the protection against corrosion


This check must be done for counterweights type bar linking the two clamps of the damper spacer located. Will be
done according to ISO 1461 as indicated in standard spacer

2.9.9.5.4. the Test clip of slip on the wire


The clips are tested by mounting on a sample of the same type as the conductor at the line, with a length of 4 m,
lying with a thrust of 20% of the nominal thrust. Mount clamp clamp screw through fund-raising with the time
prescribed. The application of longitudinal forces gradually increasing up to 10 d/s, until the minimum amount of slip,
which remains for 60 s, făUă You appear slipping (1 mm is considered gliding). It increases longitudinal force until
slipping (1 mm). Note the value that appears in the labour slipping.
You can also test the slip from twisting. Will apply a twist that will be increased slowly until the value provided by the
Manufacturer, while at the time of 60 seconds. Then it will increase the time until the advent of slipping (diameter of
a wire from the outer layer of the conductor), with the value of this time.

2.9.9.5.5. Test tightening of the screw clamp


This check is done staging a portion of the clamp on the conductor. Must not occur warping or cracking of the clip
and no damage to the conductor in the contact zone, if the gathering with a time greater than 10% than that
specified.

Further, handshake moment will be increased up to twice the value of the project or up to the maximum amount
provided by the manufacturer of the Assembly bodies, taking into account the lower of these two values. Does not
appear to be damaged and any other thread păUŢi clamp components.

2.9.9.5.6. Test simulation of short-circuit


The test shall be carried out by both the forces of tension and compression forces.
Compressive strength will be increased slowly until the indicatăşi value will remain at this value for 60 seconds.
Compression test will be performed twice, the first time in the normal position of spacer located and the second time
in a situation where one of the clamps is displaced. The tension force applied will be increased slowly until you reach
50% of maximum compressive force applied.

2.9.9.5.7. Determination of elastic and damping properties


This test is a test which characterizes the role such devices in terms of reduction of galoparii parameters of
conductors.
Testing is based on application of algorithms and computer programs applied previously, but experimental results
that have been achieved in terms of the transfer function of the pendulum in the range of most probable
construction of galoparii conductors on the line.
To be sure, such acceptance shall be made only if the amplitude of its galopării conductor or deformation resulting
from the calculation, than the reference values specified by the manufacturer.
The first phase of this test procedure is experimental phase, subduing the device at different frequencies of
oscillation by intermeniul uni special device described in THOSE 61854 pag. 37 (article. C-Damping method), as well
as in Appendix C of the standard-pag. 71. The variation frequency of training is done with the help of uni-frequency
converter that feeds the engine drive. Register video oscilatia pendulum corresponding angles to extract the first 4
amplitudes (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4).
Determine the transfer function or logarithmic decrement, which characterizes the damping capacity using realtiei
(61854).

LN«
Y1 Y ·
ª12 §¨¨ Y 3 Y 2 4 you you quod ¹»» ¼ t 1.6
«¬ ©
2.9.9.5.8. flexibility Test
1. pendulum-type device is installed on the beam, these conductive wire being stretched to 20% of their nominal

maximum effort. Clamps will tighten the screws by applying the specified time. Apply the vertical longitudinal

movements, Assembly, taper and cross in accordance with the second subparagraph of article-61854. 7.5.6.

There must be noted conductors or damaged device type pendulum Visual examination after
removing him.

2.9.9.5.9. Tests in fatigue


These tests must certify the behavior of devices type pendulum oscillations in both subdeschideri at a frequency of
between 1 and 2 Hz for 10 million cycles, and in the case of wind, vibration at a frequency of 20 Hz, for a number of
100 million cycles, and in the case of lungăşi wavelength oscillations frequency of 0.1-1 Hz (106 cycles).
These properties shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of THOSE 61854-Art. 7.5.7.2 and THOSE
61854 Art. 7.5.7.3

2.9.9.5.10. Determine voltage of corona discharge


These tests conducted in camera obscurăşi we recommend using glasses with optimum performance with
minimum 7x50 or amplificatorilor image amplification factor of at least 40,000, according to the standard
ONES 61284.
Voltage of corona discharge must be maximum phase voltage service multiplied by 1.1 x 1.1 (= nominal voltage/
3)..

2.9.9.5.11. Determining the disruptive voltage


According to the same standard, the voltage level, disruptive 61284 is determined at a voltage of phase at least
equal to the phase voltage multiplied by the factor of 1.1, the measured value must be less than the value of 50 dB/
microV/300 ohms.

electrical resistance Test 2.9.9.5.12.


This test is necessary to be able to draw conclusions regarding the fact that the emergence of currents in the
components type pendulum will not damage them. Measure the potential difference between the clamps or electrical
resistance spacer located between these two elements.
Electrical conductivity between any pair of elements of the pendulum will cause storms and their absence between
elements. Non-metallic elements of the pendulum will cause an electric resistance between any of the actual păUŢi
not greater than 20 Mƻm.

2.9.9.5.13. Optional non-destructive Tests


You can perform additional testing and non-destructive, but neimpuse, such as tests, measurements of Foucault
currents, ultrasound tests, x-ray checks, penetrant testing, hardness testing, etc.

2.9.10 Dec. supply technical Documentation accompanying


This will be mandatory within the technical tender.
Technical comparison of tenders, the Tenderer shall submit the following documentation:
A complete set of test papers;
The list of references for the type of device antigalopare offered;
The complete table of the technical data of the corresponding device type antigalopare offered, including
the calculation of the total number of antigalopare devices, which must be less than or equal to the one provided in
the quantities of works of CS.
2.9.11. rejection Criteria
The Offeror must present its technical offer all features resulting from the tests. Constitute grounds for rejection of
the offer to the lack of a single type of test criteria in table 9.1. If the values shown and guaranteed by the technical
offer shall not be complied with during the batch tests from table 9.2. The recipient will reject unsuitable batches at
the expense of the contractor.

2.9.12. GaranŢii, postgaranŢii, facilităŢi


The warranty Term will be in accordance with the contractual terms. The life span of the pendulum type dipozitivelor
must be greater than 20 years.
Beneficiary reserves the right, after the expiry of the guarantee, in the event of repeated shortcomings, to request
the presence of a delegation of Contractor/Manufacturer with which to analyze the causes and Păsurile of fix.
Contractor/Manufacturer is likely to provide technical, commercial facilities and materials included in the offer price,
which will take into account the award, acceptance obligations făUă by the beneficiary.

2.9.13. Mark, packaging


Marking devices antigalopare type pendulum is made on labels, which stated: manufacturer name, product
type, month and year of manufacture; type subconductoarelor phase, when the tightening of the screws. Labelling
should not degrade or depreciated in terms of exposure, temperature range-30 oC to + 50 oC and UV
Antigalopare devices shall be packed so as to not be able to produce their scratching during transportation and
handling, nor splayed on a duration of more than 12 hours of mansonaleor shock absorbers.
The antigalopare devices have a label stating:
- weight of the box;
- the name of the product;
- number of pieces;
- an indication that the box lies the accompanying documentation for the goods.
On the box is going to put a label that mentions the Attention FRAG. The box has a label control, the manufacturer's
code.

2.9.14. Livrare, transport şi depozitare


Antigalopare pendulum type devices are delivered in such a way as to ensure protection from shocks and bumps.
Delivery antigalopare pendulum type devices will do batch job. Packages can be of type, etc., and will ensure
adequate protection during transport and storage and appropriate handling.

All packing, shipping and transport from the place of manufacture, in the places indicated by the client, will be made
by the contractor. Merchandise damaged during these operations will be replaced at the expense of the contractor.
The following information will be written clearly on the boxes if multiple devices will be shipped in a crate:
- Contract title and reference number;
- The Name Of The Manufacturer;
- Instructions lifting and handling restrictions;
- The type of material;
- Brutăşi net weight;
- The main dimensions of the packages.
2.9.15. assistance to the beneficiary and the designer
Beneficiary and the designer will send experts to the manufacturer or its representatives, to participate in the
inspections and tests in our factory.
The specialists of the beneficiary and the designer will have open access to the manufacturer to verify the
manufacture and quality of pendulum-type devices are compliant with this specification.
The manufacturer's specialists will carry out tests of the beneficiary, together with representatives of the batch and
the designer. If the antigalopare are manufactured in pendulum-type exterior, the contractor shall bear all costs
arising from the movement of the beneficiary and the Designer specialists Manufacturer, for the conduct of tests at
its laboratory.
Examinations and tests will be carried out after a program proposed by the Bidder in the tender, and accepted by the
client upon signing the contract. The program will feature periods and the number of people of the beneficiary and
the designer who will participate in the tests.
Quality inspections carried out by the specialists of the grantee and do not replace the Designer Manufacturer
inspections and tests and do not reduce from the responsibility of the contractor, which according to the contract,
you will be responsible until the expiry of the guarantee.
The manufacturer shall ensure payment făUă the necessary technical documentation specialists beneficiary and the
designer.

2.9.16. Documents accompanying the delivery devices antigalopare Devices antigalopare pendulum type delivered
will be accompanied by:
-Certificate of quality;
-Set of newsletters that will batch tests shall include the results of tests carried out; -Set of bulletins
reception attempts;
Technical book or leaflet antigalopare pendulum-type device, in Romanian language, which will include:
-nominal characteristics;
-drawings indicating all functional and mounting dimensions;
-instructions for installation, operation and maintenance;
-machines, tools and accessories required for mounting and operation;
-Table distances.

Table 16.1. The main characteristics of pendulum-type device antigalopare


Nr. Features Păsură Te data nstruction
unit Required Guaranteed

1. The conductor type - ACSR 350F/60 mm2 ,


3 phase conductors
distance of fasciculare
400 mm
2. Diameter of mm 25.15
subconductorului
3. Maximum length of the mm 900
pendulum
4. Grip type - Screw and clamp on armor
rods
5. The length of armor rod mm 1200

6. The guarantee after Monday 30


delivery
7. The guarantee after Monday 24
commissioning
TABLE 16.2. Technical characteristics for the galopare type pendulum 400 kV.
Technical data
No.
Description U.M.
crt. Required Guaranteed

1. Manufacturer -

2. country of manufacture -

Standards for: - CEI 61854


electrical characteristics - THOSE 61284
3. mechanical - THOSE 61897
characteristics testing -
Manufactory material -
4. The maximum voltage of the network kV 420

5. Short circuit current for 1 second Ka 31,5

6. RIV at level 1 DB 50

7. Life time (minimum) years 30

8. Terminal type spacer - CEI 61854

9. Constructive achievement -

Material
Any material that is suitable for the
purpose
their running. -
10. THOSE 61284
Damping elements must be -
made from silicone rubber clamp -
screws and washers are -
made of stainless steel -
The length between points of attachment-
11. mm 400
conductor
Preformed clamps
12. Clamping way -
on spirals
Corrosion protection of metallic hot IEC 61284
galvanizing păUŢilor standard - Yes
13.
zinc layer thickness (average) -
Njm 86
14. Pendulum-type device weight (including spirals) kg
Fastening torque recommended to THOSE
15. B. m - listed in
table
Mode of delivery device
16.2, are
16. number in the package PCs. Packages
required.
number of packages PCs.
Markup mode
17. pendulum -
package -
18.
The tension of the corona effect kV > 1.1 x 420/1.73

Longitudinal slip allowed the solar energy device mm 1


type pendulum: mm 2,5
19 Metal clamp mm 12,0
Clamp with rubber
Clamp with spire preformed
20. Damped frequency range Hz 0,1-1

21.
Disruptive voltage level kV > 1.1 x 420/1.73

22. The electrical resistance between any nonmetalic Mohm <20


element of distantierului
2.10. Technical specifications for SYSTEM MONITORING on-line
This specification contains minimum requirements about the mounting and operation of the monitoring system on
line 400 kV's CENTURY Plant-and fitting Stâlpu Gura IalomiŢei station.
2.10.1. GeneralitaŢi
Device components "real time system" include:
- Main unit in an aluminum enclosure, which houses a base plate and a mode of communication.
- In a housing unit of aluminum that holds the batteries and a solar charger. Two photo-voltaic panels 20 W
are fitted to the chassis.
- Two dynamometers with shielded cables.
- A temperature sensor, placed in protected environment
- Two sensors of net solar radiation, which measures the effect of solar radiation on the conductor -
directional Antenna and antenna cable
2.10.2. Power Unit
Two solar panels 20 W and spare batteries of 12 V and 30 Ah energy ensures the functioning of the main unit. For
the area situated at latitudes or climate characterized by weathering is needed contacting the manufacturer for
information regarding the use of external batteries or solar panels suplimantare.
Solar panels are capable of providing a current of 3A at 12V voltage for an angle of incidence of the sun rays of 90 °.
Solar panels must be installed so that the light that reaches them may not be obstructed.
They are usually installed on the South to a latitude tilt angle properly. The panels are shipped from the factory with
marked on the bracket for connecting to the optimum position for mounting pole (optimum angle of inclination)
specifically for the place of installation.
The panels are fixed to the lower stands you. When you are facing South, it may be necessary as the two
photovoltaic panels to be pitched to each other by a few degrees.
2.10.3. the ambient temperature sensor
An ambient temperature sensor is delivered with the system and up together is installed inside a ventilation device,
which is attached to one of the stands of the module. Registers registers of the device simultaneously with the
temperature of the dynamometer. Precision temperature sensor will be 0.1 ° c. Temperature records may be viewed
by means of a few software commands. Note: Ambient temperature records are not essential for thermal
calculations. Recorded temperatures are mainly used in the calibration process, to detect situations of shadows that
may affect the accuracy of the system.
2.10.4. NET radiation sensor (NRS)
Sensor of net radiation (radiation sensor net-NRS) is a replica of the conductor, having approximately the same
surface emissivity, absorption cooling, and time constant. The difference between net radiation temperature (net
radiation temperature-NRT) and ambient temperature is called the Gain (Net Radiation Gain-NRG). This value
ensures that the estimate of the proportion in which the effect of the radiation affects the temperature/resistance
arrow.

Sensor of net radiation is an aluminum cylinder equipped with a temperature sensor, so as to ensure an emissivity of
0.7 (or another value, at customer's request), fixed in the upper right side of the main unit and parallel to the the
conductor. It will use a thermal insulation to ensure isolation of sensor compared to the support on which it is fixed.
The use of two temperature sensors, these isolates and one other girl. Cablulrile, connectors and ports on the
module that plugs are color coded so you ensure linking each sensor port.
Temperature net radiation is measured with a precision of 0.1 ° c. Net radiation sensor records can be
viewed with various software commands.
2.10.5. Sensor speed/wind direction (optional)
For recording wind speed/direction for statistical purposes and correlation with other parameters using propeller
anemometer Young. Is provided and a 15 metre long cable. Adaugăşi is a port with 10-pin amphenol type behind the
module. Anemometrul is installed atop a pipe 1 inch (2.54 cm).
IMPORTANT: Wind sensors are sensitive to high voltages. For details of the earthing must be contacted by the
manufacturer. The sensors need replacing as far as possible towards the conductor (not above the lowest înăOŢime
of the conductor at the arrow).
2.10.6. Technical specifications
Data t ehnice

Required Guaranteed

Modem Bell with 4 strips or similar.

Power consumption From 85 to 260 V AC, at 110 V


DC at 340, 25 W (optional 48 V
DC)

Antenna connector Type 'n' Jack "parent", or similar

Operating temperature -30 to + 60 ° C

Temperature of -40 to + 70 ° C
storage

RS-232 port EMS/SCADA DB-9 "parent" or similar

Diagnostic port radio DB-9 "parent" or similar

System management ISO 9001 certification


quality

FCC Approval FCC Part 15

Frequency band From 902 to 928 Hz

Protocol Narrowband frequency


pseudorandom with jump

Power delivered 1.0 W (+ 30 dBm)

Input impedance 50 ƻ

2.10.7. Technical specification for dynamometer functional


Description:
The dynamometer used uses a load cell of stainless steel with integral hardware. These load cells were specially
designed and manufactured to withstand the environmental conditions of high voltage line. Load cells have high
accuracy, stability, factor of safety, as well as 300% and transient protection All load cells have a minimum 2 year
warranty.
These load cells are transducers based on shear steel plate, with a separate external enclosure. Active elements load
cell strain is isolated from the load cell and body protected by a spark of 40V.
Load cells are available in standard ratings, 5,000, 10000, 25000, 50000 lbs (22.25,
44.5, 111.25, 222.50 kN). Other sizes can be manufactured on request special. Load cells are supplied with
cable, except where otherwise stated.
Dinamometrele (Load Cells) and input circuits in the main unit will be designed to provide protection against electrical
and magnetic fields and transient.
Functional description: the dynamometer used uses a load cell of stainless steel with integral hardware. These load
cells were specially designed and manufactured to withstand the environmental conditions of high voltage line. Load
cells have high accuracy, stability, factor of safety, as well as 300% and transient protection patented. All load cells
have at least two (2) year warranty.
These load cells are transducers based on shear steel plate with an external enclosure.
Table Technical Specifications 2.10.7.1 dynamometer

Technical data

Required Guaranteed
Load
Nominal range 5/22.25, 10/25/44.5, 111.25
cells are
(1000lbs/kN)
available

7.5/15/33.78, 66.75, 37.5/166.88 in


standard
(1000 lbs/kN)
Maximum interval
ratings,
15/30/67.2, 134.4, 75/336 (1000 5,000,
lbs/kN)
Strength evaluation 10000,
25000,
Accuracy class, name 0.03, D3
50000 lbs
Excitation nominal 10 VDC, maximum 15 VAC (22.25,
rms 44.5,
Output rating 3 ±. 003 mV/V 111.25,
222.50
Zero balance 1.0% FS
kN).
Other
Endurance: Entry 350 ± 3.5 ohms
sizes can
Output 350 ± 3.5 ohms

Insulation 5000 megohms @ 50VDC

Combined Error 0.05 %FS

Non-Repeatability 0.02 %FS

Flow 0.03% Ld/20 min

Temp effect: 2 Output 0.0008% Ld/0.0072 ° F,% LD/5 ° C

Zero 0.0015% FS/° F, 0.014% FS/5 ° C

Temp Rating: Compensated 0 to 150 ° F,-15 to 65 ° C

Operation -65 to 200 ° F,-50 to 90 ° C

Barometric Effect Negligible

GS02-145-SP-001 Cannon connection


with dust cap
Electrical Termination
be manufactured on request special. Load cells are supplied with cable, except where otherwise stated.
Dinamometrele (Load Cells) and input circuits in the main unit will be designed to provide protection against electrical
and magnetic fields and transient.
2.11. SPECIFICAЭII SPACERS for MANUFACTURE

2.11.1. GeneralităŢi
Purpose
These specifications contain data relating to the manufacture and supply of spacers in shock absorbers for 400
kV, equipped with three conductors type 350F/60 on the stage, step of 400 mm. fasciculare
Contractor will comply with these specifications and exactly within its tender will include study of the
manufacturer demonstrating that the requirements of these specifications are complied with in full.
Conductors will be protected against average wavelength oscillations (oscillations induced in subdeschideri)
spacers dampers. Definitions
Spacers for 400 kV dampers fitted with 3-conductor AlOL 350F/60 per phase, will be elastic.

2.11.2. Documente şi condiŢii preliminare


The spacers provided shall comply with the dampers the provisions of standard EN 61854:2003, Overhead
lines-Requirements and test for spacers.
Of the main standards referred to in this standard are:
- IEC 60050: International Electrotechnical vocabulary-1990
- EN 61284:2000-Overhead lines-Requirements and tests for fittings (IEC 61284)
- THOSE 1994 60888: SR, Zinc-coated steel wires for stranded conductors
- SR ISO 2,859-1:2009:2009, C91/Sampling procedures for inspection by attributes-Part1: Sampling
plans indexed by acceptable quality level (AQL) for lot by lot inspection
- SR ISO 2859-2:1998, Sampling procedures for inspection by attributes-Part2: Sampling plans
indexed by limited quality level (LQ) for isolated lot inspection.

2.11.3. General requirements


Design requirements
The spacers have to be made so antivibratoare:
- You maintain distance between subconductoare, regardless of the regime, with the exception of short
circuit regime;
- You prevent, in subdeschiderile of the spacers, physical contact between the subconductoare, with the
exception of the occurrence of short-circuit currents when can achieve is supported by ensuring the
separation space Do to be reattached immediately after the defect;
- You resist mechanical tasks imposed during installation, maintenance and operation (including short circuit
regime) făUă to produce their damage or permanent deformations that are not permitted;
- You avoid damage subconductoarelor during operation regimes;
- Be suitable for an easy installation sigurăşi;
- You maintain its functionality throughout the entire range of operating temperatures; - You avoid the
acoustic noise.
The spacers shall be installed shock absorbers openings at set intervals on the basis of studies known as
"Damping Efficiency Study". This study will justify the number of spacers depending on mounting apertures and
distances. It will not, however, distance 60 cantilever m where reported attacks of subconductoarelor.
Attaching spacers in shock absorbers at the active conductors will be done with the fastening clamps Rotary
screw or armour-rods. In both cases, the conductor will be protected through a layer of silicone rubber or neoprene.
Materials used in manufacturing
Spacers must be made of any material that is suitable for their purpose.
The materials must be in accordance with the requirements of the standard IEC 61284.
Body central, articulated arms and tightening clamps must be made from aluminium alloy.
Damping elements must be made of silicone rubber. clamp screws and washers are made of stainless steel.
Protection against corrosion
In addition to the requirements of IEC 61284 if steel parts are used, they shall be protected against corrosion by
hot-dip galvanizing with zinc coating (minimum 86 µm).
Marking
In accordance with the requirements of IEC 61284, marking will be done on all spacers subassemblies.
Installation instructions
The manufacturer will provide for a clarăşi full description of the installation procedure and will indicate the place
of mounting devices.

2.11.4. CerinŢe tehnice solicitate


Mechanical stresses
Spacers dampers must ensure that the distance between the two conductive fasciculare of a stage, avoiding
touching the two subconductoare at any load condition the mechanics of subconductoarelor (wind, Frost, hail, wind).
Furthermore, spacers must amortize the vibration dampers subconductoarelor, disipând energy of these
oscillations in elastic limbs fixture of spacer located anchor arms.
Request electric
Standoffs the dampers must be calculated in order to be able to resist permanent deformation, făUă, large radial
forces electro arising at the time of a short circuit and not to cause deterioration of subconductoarelor in terminal
area sign screw.
To avoid partial discharge on metal elements to the potential (clamps).

2.11.5. Testare si inspecŢii. Controlul calităŢii


Quality control
The contractor must provide "Quality Control Plan" which should reflect their own Păsuri of "quality control",
considering the requirements and standards requirements specified. It must be comprehensive in that it will contain
all proposals for accompanying measures of quality control for all equipment supplied. Shall be prepared in
accordance with standards ISO SR 10000/2007.
The plan, among other things, will contain information concerning:
-inspection of purchased material;
-routine inspections;
-factory test plan for acceptance; for the production of mufflers for spacers
provided in this Contract.
All materials, components and equipment delivered in this Contract and related works will be inspected
by the customer. The contractor has the first responsibility for ensuring the quality of equipment supplied
under the Contract and is responsible for the work that you Think towards subcontracting. The works are to be only
subcontracting companies actually "quality control". Quality should be monitored by the contractor through
participation in the tests.
The contractor, at the proper time, it will prove that the material and/or its responsible equipment requirements
of this chapter. This is achieved only through the success of the tests and inspections.
Apart from individual testing and routine for all equipment will be presented with certificates of type testing.
Where they do not exist will proceed to testing in accordance with the standards in force.
Type tests
Establish design features. Normally they are made once and repeated only when designing or changing device
material
These checks shall be carried out in order to determine the characteristics of the design. Each of the tests laid
down shall apply, as a rule, three specimens of each type. It is mandatory that all specimens tested to comply with
the conditions of the test.
Individual tests. Batch checks
Individual tests are carried out on lots of products and are intended to verify the performance tests specified in
type. Also you want to check the quality of the materials and quality of manufacture.
For each consignment to be delivered must be carried out tests on a number of specimens, depending on the
size of the lot. Thus, the number of specimens must be 2 lots, for up to 300 pieces, 4, for consignments of 300-2000
pieces, 8, for batches of 2000-5000 pieces and 12 for batches of more than 5000 pieces in accordance with the test
procedure ISO 2859-1 ISO 2859-2 and ISO 3951.
These tests will take place at the manufacturer's laboratory with representatives of beneficiary and the designer.
If tests as a spacer damper does not match, it restores a new test for spacer damper. If the latter is not reuşHşte
or where two specimens do not correspond, the batch shall be rejected, being sent to analizăşi sorting, grading new
low batch being subjected to batch testing triple number specimens.
At the request of the beneficiary, can accept optional tests have been carried out in this category and can enter
optional tests referred 8.6.14. Associated costs will be borne by the contractor.
Routine tests
Routine tests must prove their conformity to the requirements of this specification on each device separately.
Tests should not destroy the device.
The whole batch of devices must pass the test routine.
The required tests are shown in the table below:
Tests on spacers dampers
Clauza Test Spacer damper
din EN
61854 Test type Individual test. Routine test
Batch test

2.6.1 Visual examination x x a

2.6.2 Checking the dimensions, material and x x a


weight

2.6.3 Corrosion protection test (if applicable) x x

Mechanical tests

2.6.4 -Sliding Tests of the clip x a

2.6.5 -Tightening of tests the bulonului clamp x x

2.6.6 -Simulation Tests of short circuit current x a


and compression and tension tests

2.6.7 -Elastic and damping Characteristics x a

2.6.8. -Flexibility tests x a

2.6.9 -Fatigue Tests x

2.6.10 -Tests on elastomers x a

Electrical tests

2.6.11 -Corona voltage Tests and radio x


and interference
2.6.12
2.6.13. Tests of electrical resistance x a

2.6.14. -Non-destructive Testing a a a

2.6.15 Verification of vibration behaviour


- Wind vibration
a
- Oscillations in open a

2.11.6. Test methods


Visual inspection
Visual inspection consists of Visual examination of specimens shall be tested for the purpose of observing
compliance with the project from the point of view of the manufacturing process, of the forms and the roughness of
surfaces.
Dimensional verification, the materials used and the
Check for all sizes, comparing them with those projects, if the deviations observed fall into the tolerances.
Checking of materials used is done by comparing the material specifications and certificates acquired quality related
with the project specifications.
Verification of the protection against corrosion
This check must be done for counterweights type bar linking the two clamps of the damper spacer
located. Will be done according to ISO 1461 as indicated in standard spacer.
Sliding clamp test on conductor
The clips are tested by mounting on a sample of the same type as the conductor at the line, with a length of 4
m, lying with a thrust of 20% of the nominal thrust. Mount clamp clamp screw through fund-raising with the time
prescribed. The application of longitudinal forces gradually increasing up to 10 d/s, until the minimum amount of slip,
which remains for 60 s, făUă to emerge slipping (1 mm is considered gliding).
It increases longitudinal force until slipping (1 mm). Note the value that appears in the labour slipping.
You can also test the slip from twisting. Will apply a twist that will be increased slowly until the value laid down
by the manufacturer, while at the time of 60 seconds. Then it will increase the time until the advent of slipping
(diameter of a wire from the outer layer of the conductor), with the value of this time.
Test of bolt tightening clip
This check is done staging a portion of the clamp on the conductor. You need not occur warping or cracking of
the clip and no damage to the conductor in the contact zone, if the gathering with a time greater than 10% than that
specified.
Further, handshake moment will be increased up to twice the value of the project or up to the maximum amount
provided by the manufacturer of the Assembly bodies, taking into account the lower of these two values. Does not
appear to be damaged and any other thread păUŢi clamp components.
Simulation of short-circuit test
The test shall be carried out by both the forces of tension and compression forces.
Compressive strength will be increased slowly until the indicatăşi value will remain at this value for 60
seconds. Compression test will be performed twice, the first time in the normal position of spacer located and the
second time in a situation where one of the clamps is displaced. The tension force applied will be increased
slowly until you reach 50% of maximum compressive force applied.
Determination of elastic and damping properties
These properties shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of THOSE 61854-Art. 7.5.5.
Flexibility test
Support is installed on the beam, these conductive wire being stretched to 20% of their nominal maximum effort.
Clamps will tighten the screws by applying the specified time. Apply the vertical longitudinal movements, Assembly,
taper and cross, in accordance with the second subparagraph of article-61854. 7.5.6. There must be noted
deterioration of conductors or spacer located at Visual inspection after disassembly of spacer located.
Fatigue tests
These tests must certify the behavior both spacers oscillations in subdeschideri at a frequency of
between 1 and 2 Hz for 10 million cycles, and in the case of wind, vibration at a frequency of 20 Hz, for a
number of 100 million cycles.
These properties shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of THOSE 61854-Art. 7.5.7.2 and THOSE
61854-Art. 7.5.7.3
Elastomer testing
Testing must be performed to all elastomer samples indicated in table 2 of the standard ONES 61854, on
samples taken on. It will test the ozone resistance of elastomers in accordance with the provisions of art. 7.6.3 61854
standard ONES.
Determine the voltage of corona discharge
These tests carried out in the darkroom and we recommend using glasses with optimum performance with
minimum 7x50 or amplificatorilor image amplification factor of at least 40,000, according to the standard ONES
61284.
Voltage of corona discharge must be maximum phase voltage service multiplied by 1.1.
Determination of disturbing tension level
According to the same standard, the voltage level, disruptive 61284 is determined at a voltage of phase at least
equal to the phase voltage multiplied by the factor 1.2, the measured value must be less than the value of 50 dB/
microV/300 ohms.
Resistance test
This test is necessary to be able to draw conclusions regarding the fact that the emergence of currents in the
spacer located will not damage them. Measure the potential difference between the clamps or electrical resistance
spacer located between these two elements.
Non-destructive tests
You can perform additional testing and non-destructive, but neimpuse, such as: magnetic tests, Păsurători tests
of Foucault currents, ultrasonic, x-ray checks, penetrant testing, hardness testing, etc.
The reaction to the vibration of the wire-spacer system
These properties shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of THOSE 61854-Art. 7.8.
2.11.7. DocumentaŢii însoŢitoare ale ofertei tehnice
This will be mandatory within the technical tender.
Technical comparison of tenders, the Tenderer shall submit the following documentation:
 A complete set of test papers;
 The list of references for the type of spacer damper provided;
 Information from major users concerning the behaviour of the spacers supplied dampers;
 The complete table of technical data appropriate to the type of spacer damper offered, including the
calculation of the total number of spacers necessary dampers, which must be less than or equal to
the quantities of works CS.

2.11.8. Criterii de respingere


The Offeror must present its technical offer all features resulting from the tests. Constitute grounds for rejection
of the offer to the lack of any of the conditions referred to in 2.11.5. If the values shown and guaranteed by the
technical offer shall not be observed during the testing, the recipient will reject unsuitable batches at the expense of
the contractor.

2.11.9. GaranŢii, postgaranŢii, facilităŢi


The warranty term will be in accordance with the contractual terms. Life span of spacers in shock
absorbers must be more than 20 years.
Beneficiary reserves the right, after the expiry of the guarantee, in the event of repeated shortcomings, to
request the presence of a delegation of Contractor/Manufacturer with which to analyze the causes and to determine
appropriate remedial action.
Contractor will comply with the terms of the contract in its entirety.

2.11.10. Livrare, transport şi depozitare


Packaging spacers are carried out in shock absorbers wooden crates, so as to provide protection from bumps and
bruises.
Delivery will be made spacers dampers batch job. Packages can be of type, Oăzi, etc. and will provide adequate
protection during transport and storage and appropriate handling.
/ăzile are cases during transport and storage, on up to 4 lines, where there are arranged and up to 6 rows when
the crates are palletised.
All packing, shipping and transport from the place of manufacture, in the places indicated by the client, will be
made by the contractor. Merchandise damaged during these operations will be replaced at the expense of the
contractor.
The following information will be written clearly with paint on each package:
 Contract Title and reference number;
 The Name Of The Manufacturer;
 Instructions lifting and handling restrictions;
 The type of material;
 Brutăşi Net Weight;
 The main dimensions of the packages.

2.11.11. Assistance of the beneficiary and the designer


Beneficiary and the designer will send experts to the manufacturer or its representatives, to participate in the
inspections and tests in our factory.
The specialists of the beneficiary and the designer will have open access to the manufacturer to verify the
manufacture and quality of dampers to conform to this specification.
The manufacturer's specialists will carry out tests of the beneficiary, together with representatives of the
batch and the designer. If spacers are made outside shock absorbers, the contractor shall bear all costs
incurred by the beneficiary and specialists moving from Designer to Manufacturer, carry out tests at its laboratory.
Examinations and tests will be carried out after a program proposed by the Bidder in Ofertăşi accepted by the
beneficiary from signing the contract. The program will feature periods and the number of people of the beneficiary
and the designer who will participate in the tests.
Quality inspections carried out by the specialists of the grantee and do not replace the Designer Manufacturer
inspections and tests and do not reduce the responsibility of the contractor, from which according to the contract, will
be in charge until the the warranty runs out.
The manufacturer shall ensure payment făUă the necessary technical documentation specialists beneficiary and
the designer.

2.11.12. Documents accompanying the delivery of dampers spacers Spacers shall be delivered absorbers
accompanied by:
 Quality certificate;
 Set of newsletters that will batch tests shall include the results of tests carried out;  Set of bulletins
reception attempts.
Technical book or leaflet damper spacer located in the Romanian language, which will include:
 all nominal characteristics;
 drawings indicating all functional and mounting dimensions;
 instructions for installation, operation and maintenance;
 machines, tools and accessories required for mounting and operation;  table of distances.
Main features of spacers in shock absorbers
Nr. Features Păsură Technical data
unit
Required Guaranteed

1. The conductor type - ACSR 350F/60

- 3 phase conductors
2. Diameter of conductor mm 25.15

3. Distance between mm 400


subconductoare
4. Grip type - Screw and clamp

No. Technical data


Description U.M.
crt. required guaranteed

1. Manufacturer -

2. country of manufacture -

3. Standards for: - CEI 61854


- THOSE
electrical characteristics
- 61284
mechanical characteristics -
material -

testing Manufactory
4. The maximum voltage of the network kV 420

5. Short circuit current for 1 second Ka 31,5

6. Level RIV DB 50

7. Life time (minimum) years 30

8. Type spacer - With


thimble
9. Constructive achievement -

10. Material - THOSE


- 61284
- any material that is suitable for their purpose.
-
- Body central, articulated arms and tightening clamps -
must be made from aluminium alloy. -
- Damping elements must be made of rubber
silicone
- clamp screws and washers are made of stainless steel

11. The length of spacer located between the fastening points mm 400

12. Clamping way - Screw


13. Corrosion protection of metal păUŢilor - IEC 61284
- Yes
hot-dip galvanizing
m
standard 86
zinc layer thickness (average)
14. Weight spacer kg

15. Fastening torque B. m -

16. Mode of delivery Packages


PCs.
spacer in the parcel number
PCs.
number of packages

Technical characteristics of dampers for 400 kV spacers.


17. Markup mode -
-
spacer
package

18. Voltage of corona discharge kV > 1.1 x


420/1.73

Longitudinal sliding damper spacer located admitted to


- Metal clamp 1
mm mm
- Clamp with rubber 2.5

20. Damped frequency range Hz 1-2

21. Disruptive voltage level kV > 1.2 x


420/1.73

22. The electrical resistance of the Parthian Empire recycling Mahmood <20
m
2.12. SPECIFICAЭII TECHNICAL BALIZAJUL NIGHT
2.12.1. GeneralităŢi
This document encompasses the composition, characteristics and mechanical properties, optical and electrical,
marking, packing and transport systems for channel buoying at night used at 400 kV crossing II of Cernavoda-Calafat
Stâlpu and arm Baer.
Additionally this document contains requirements relating to the implementation of the quality assurance
Programme, which shall be deemed an integral part of the delivery.
The contractor shall control and check all the requirements of this specification, and will ensure that in addition
to all the necessary for a functioning satisfăFătoare and long-lasting installation.
2.12.2. Reference Standards
All materials related to the supply system of buoyage and the necessary accessories, must be consistent
with the force of the following editions:
1. International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Regulations annex 14, chapter 6
"Visual aids for denoting instant replay";
2. Regulatory framework for the construction of overhead power lines with voltage over 1000 V, NTE
003/04/00;
3. IEC 60721-2-4-"Environmental conditions. Solar radiation and temperature "
4. SR CEI 60050 (161): 1997-"Electromagnetic compatibility"
5. EN 61140:2002/C91:2008-"Protection against electric shock (IEC 61140)
6. THOSE 60050-195 SR: 2006/A1:2006-"Earthing and protection against electric shock"
7. SR 60050-446:2005 ONES-"Electrical relays"
8. SR-EN 60086 Primary batteries "
9. EN 61960:2005-"Secondary cells and batteries"
10. IEC 60748-"Semiconductors devices and integrated circuits"
11. IEC 60904-"Photovoltaic devices"
12. EN 61173:1994-"Overvoltage protection for photovoltaic devices power generating systems"
(THOSE 61173)
13. EN 61345:2004-"UV test for photovoltaic modules" (61345)
14. EN 61427:2006-"Secondary cells and batteries for solar photovoltaic energy systems. General
requirements and methods of test (IEC 61427)
15. IEC 60747-"Semiconductors devices and integrated circuits"
16. EN 61721-"Susceptibility of photovoltaic modules to accidental impact damage (resistance to
impact test)" (IEC 61721)
17. EN 61701:2004-"Salt mist corrosion testing of photovoltaic modules" (61701)

 NTI-TEL-010-2010-00-technical requirements for component II allowing LST;


 Guidebook for choosing optimal solutions for channel buoying the pillars and the construction of century 1.RE-
IP 69-91;
 EN 10029:2001-steel hot rolled thickness equal to or greater than 3 mm. Tolerances to dimensions, formăşi at
the table;
 SR ISO-8991/1999; SR EN ISO 898-1:2009; EN 20898-2/1997-fasteners; the quality of metal apparel will
be according to SR EN 10025 + A1/EN 10025, S-355 and S 235 JO JO (37 52 OL and OL) and EN 10056.

2.12.3. Documents accompanying the technical tender


For comparison of technical tender, the Tenderer shall submit the following documents:
 Full report of the type-approval tests;
 Full report of tests;
 Test reports of other tests performed;
 The overall Plans of all system components;
 Details of the design of sub-assemblies;
 Lists of references for supplies of similar systems;
 Information from major users about behaviour in service of the systems supplied.

2.12.4. Documents accompanying the shipment Delivery equipment will be accompanied by:
 quality certificate;
 reports of sets of tests, including their results;
 sample reports from the front desk;
 technical book or leaflet equipment which will include:
 all nominal characteristics;
 plans with all functional and constructive directions;
 installation and maintenance instructions;
 equipment, components and devices necessary for installation and operation.

2.12.5. CerinŢe funcŢionale

Buoyage systems nightclub are intended to reduce the risk of aircraft accidents by marking of overhead power
line.
Buoyage systems night installed on overhead power lines when they are located in areas with high risk of
collision for aircraft.
According to the NTE 003/04/00, with înăOŢimea over 25 m which crosses the main water courses must be
balizate as follows:
x plug in the opening of the crossing with the centerpiece of the day;
x the pillars of the traverse, with the centerpiece of the day (painting), and when their înăOŢimea depăşHşte 45 m
and with the centerpiece.
Considering the înăOŢimea pillars of the traverse, the centerpiece of the night will be referred to in all the pillars
on the two sailings.
The system must provide automatic illumination lamps centerpiece throughout the night with a minimum
luminous intensity in accordance with the provisions of ICAO Annex 14-regulations, Chapter 6 for lamps of low-
intensity buoyage.
Considering înăOŢimea, balizarea will be achieved by installing several systems of buoyage on each pole.

2.12.6. CerinŢe tehnice

Technical conditions for balizajul night must comply with the following conditions:
x buoyage system will respect the regulations of the ICAO-Annex 14, Chapter 6, relating to the means of the
Visual barriers.
x Buoyage system of night will be with power from photovoltaic energy sources. It will be installed on the
structure of the pillars mention previously.
x The position and the number of points you will make night balizarea will be in accordance with the provisions
of ICAO Annex 14, head-6, relating to the means of the Visual barriers. In addition it will tag and lower
extremities consoles pillars.
x Marking of each light point balizat night will be done via two signal lamps, each fed from photovoltaic energy
sources different for back-up. It is permissible to use an energy source to power a maximum of four signal
lamps.
x The system must be functional and complete in all respects, i.e. must meet the technical requirements
contained in their entirety in this specification and must be provided with all necessary information for the
proper installation and operation.
x If any parts or subassemblies are not mentioned in the specification, but are necessary for the operation of the
system in terms of safety, or for its maintenance, they should be expressly mentioned in the tender offer,
the cost of which be included in the price displayed.
x The successful tenderer for the system should comply strictly with the requirements of this specification. In
addition, the tenderer must follow all rules and standards regarding the manufacture and supply of such
equipment and also comply with all instructions of the beneficiary and to other competent authorities.
2.12.7. Manufacturing
Overview
Buoyage system of night completely, including all necessary accessories for the mounting will be in accordance
with the following.
Channel buoying system will be powered by solar energy, the light source being LED (Light Emmiting Diode) red.
Buoyage system of night must correspond with the system described in this specification. Alternative systems can
only be accepted if the offeror may dovedii that are functionally similar, and provides the performance required by
this specification.
The system must be guaranteed for a period of at least 5 (five) years, in conditions of exploitation maintenance
IăUă.
The main components of the system are the centerpiece of the lamps, photovoltaic module for converting solar
energy (solar panels), electronic control system (which includes automatic pornireoprire system of lamp and control
regulator accumulators) and energy storage system (battery).
General performance of the system:
1. Supply energy independent. The system must operate and the conditions of removal under the tension of the
line on which it is installed or the network medium or low voltage in the area;
2. Low power consumption of the Assembly;
3. The system must be adapted to the specific climate conditions. The system must work in all weathers and
illuminance;
4. The system will be adapted to the specific level of pollution in the area that will be the centerpiece of the
system installed;
5. The light source will be split into independent groups for protection in the event of failure of a single LED;
6. All components of the system should resist corrosion in marine environment (materials to ensure the
"corrosion");
7. All components of the system shall be so designed as to function throughout maintenance făUă guaranteed.
System manufacturer must submit detailed drawings for all system components.
All electronic components of the system must function under the conditions of existence of the electro-
magnetic field produced by the overhead electrical line.
Buoyage system of the night along with the necessary for installation of the parts must be designed and
manufactured in such a way as to ensure continuous operation in both normal and special conditions of operation of
the power line aerial.
Weight and wind-exposed areas of the system should be reduced as far as possible to avoid raising additional
loads acting on the pillars.
Buoyage system components installation will be done according to the specific configuration of the type of pillar
II would be installed.

/ămpile of buoyage
buoyage/ămpile must be of type LED (Light Emitting Diode) with red light and extremely low consumption of
energy.
The lamp must be designed for the installation of buoyage on metal pillars scarce overhead power lines. The
manufacturer must provide the necessary accessories for the mounting of lamps on columns. These enhancements
should provide a sympathetic sigurăşi installation of the lamp on the pole.
Horizontal and vertical angle of vision of the lamp, as well as its luminous intensity shall be directed to the
provisions of the ICAO regulations about the buoyage lamps of low intensity.
Light source lamp centerpiece should be split into independent groups for protection in the event of failure of a
single LED.
Photovoltaic module
Electrical characteristics of photovoltaic module must match with those of the main centerpiece, with energy
needs to charge the battery and with the specifications electronic control system.
Photovoltaic module must be adapted to weather conditions and minimum solar radiation in the area where it will
be installed.
The upper part of the solar panels must be fitted with systems to prevent settlement of SăVărilor. Bird system
must also be wholly protected against corrosion.
The mounting of the photovoltaic module will be designed in such a way as to enable mounting on metal
pillars to cross the Danube and Borcea arm. This structure must be adjustable so as to allow installation,
irrespective of the type of the column on which it is installed. This device must ensure that the installation of the
photovoltaic sigurăşi joint module on the pole.

Energy storage system


Energy storage system needs to be făUă, meaning that it must not require refreshing electrolyte throughout its
life.
Energy storage system must be sized so as to guarantee the autonomy of the buoyage system during adverse
weather conditions during winter (solar radiation and low-temperature diminuatăşi).
Batteries must be capsulaŢi. The wrapper must be so designed as to prevent any kind of leakage of electrolyte.
Inside the battery cells must be placed such a way as to be protected against vibration.
Batteries, together with the loading control system (or entirely control system) and the electrical connections
required will be placed in a closed enclosure.
The premises must be made of stainless steel balusters. A device for securing the enclosure opening should also be
provided and delivered by the manufacturer.
The mounting of the enclosure will be designed in such a way as to enable mounting on metal pillars you have
overhead power lines. This structure must be adjustable so as to allow installation, irrespective of the type of the
column on which it is installed. This device must provide a sigurăşi installation the enclosure pole joint.

Buoyage systems configurations


Buoyage system and flood will be provided, each set being photovoltaic consist of 2 lamps, which will be installed
on the vârfarele pillars, overhangs And hop poles on uppers, respectively, on the vârfarele And final columns
consoles. Each of the two lamps of a set will be powered from independent sources of power, one being in operation,
the second by ensuring your reservation.

Composition principle of a buoyage system


- buoyage lamps
- installation bracket lamps
- two solar connections cables (each station consists of photovoltaic module and system storage) -
solar station installation support
The contractor will prepare a proposal concerning the placement and installation of main components which will
be forwarded to the Recipient for approval.

2.12.7.1. Technical characteristics table of the buoyage system of solar-powered night (a buoyage
system).

Technical data
Description U.M.
required guaranteed
1 2 3 4

1 General

1.1 Manufacturer

1.2 Experience Years 5 min.

1.3 country of origin

1.4 Minimum Temperature 0 (C) -30

1.5 Maximum Temperature 0 (C) + 55

1.6 Maximum relative humidity at 20 0C % 100

1.7 Maximum operating latitude (North) 0 49

1.8 Minimum latitude (North) 0 43

1.9 Maximum wind Dan/m2 65

1.10 Maximum simultaneous wind Frost Dan/m2 26

1.11 The maximum thickness of the layer of frost mm 30

in accordance
1.12 Pollution level guaranteed with the
CEI 60815
Protection against degradation system under
1.13 Yes
the influence of atmospheric factors
5 year warranty in continuous operation
1.14 Yes
conditions
Spare parts for the maintenance of the
1.15 Yes
system on 30 years
2 Lamp centerpiece

LED, divided, low


intensity
2.0 Type
with continuous
operation
2.1 Centerpiece lights number 2
ICAO
2.2 Standard aircraft
Annex 14
2.3 Nominal intensity CD > 10 Cd

2.4 The effective intensity CD > 10 Cd

2.5 Angle of visibility in the horizontal plane 0 3600

2.6 Angle of visibility in the vertical plane 0 > 350

2.7 Maximum current absorbed Ma

2.8 Rated voltage V

2.9 Diameter mm

2.10 ÎnăOŢime mm

2.11 Weight kg

2. Photovoltaic module

2.1 Type

2.2 Voltage (nominal) V

2.3 Maximum nominal power W

2.4 Current (at maximum power) The

2.5 Voltage (at maximum power) V

2.6 Bird protection Yes


2.7 Length mm

2.8 ÎnăOŢime mm

2.9 /ăŢime mm

2.10 Weight Kg

2.11 Number of modules/system 2

3. Batteries

Encapsulated)
3.1 Type ăUă
maintenance
3.2 Voltage (nominal) V

3.3 Capacity Ah

3.4 Length mm

3.5 ÎnăOŢime mm

3.6 /ăŢime mm

3.7 Weight Kg

3.8 Number of modules/system 2

4. Cargo control system

The battery
4.1 Type performance

4.2 Voltage (nominal) V

4.3 Current The

4.4 Compensation with temperature (approx.) MV/0C

4.5 The limit of the low blood V


Delay disconnection at low blood
4.6 Min.

4.7 Reconnect limit to lower blood V

4.8 Limit the increased blood V

4.9 Reconnect to limit increased blood V

4.10 Maximum current absorbed Ma

Lamp control system of buoyage


5.

Commissioned
5.1 Type by
lighting/regulator
5.2 Nominal voltage V
5.3 The limits increase the illumination Lux

Connection limits to decrease illumination


5.4 Lux
3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS of installation and Reception II

3.1 PURPOSE
This document contains installation and technical conditions for reception:
Foundations.

Columns

Active conductors and protective, classical and OPGW;

Accessories for active and protective conductors

Chains with insulating glass composite material


Monitoring devices-on line

Antigalopare devices

Balizaje night
The document also contains, and requirements for the implementation of quality, considered part of the
Chapter Assembly.
3.2. Reference STANDARDS, rules, recommendations, Priorities
The application of standards, norms and recommendations will be made in the following order of priorities:-
Romanian Standards;
- The present technical specification
- IEC Recommendations
- Other standards, norms and recommendations

3.3. Technical conditions, Obligations of the CONTRACTOR

Before starting any installation operations, the contractor will need to make an investigation of the area and mode of
work.
The contractor shall be responsible, in accordance with the obligations incumbent on the quality of the execution of
the works, in full compliance with the requests contained in the purchaser's specifications, and standards and
regulations in force, with reference to quality management.
In accordance with ORDINANCE No. 95/11.07.2002 and SMALL Order No. 293/erection works for approximately
8.11.1999 machinery, technological equipment and facilities will be subject to a system of checking the quality.
It must comply with:
— SR EN ISO/CEI 17000:2005-Evaluating compliance. Vocabulary and general principles.
— SR EN ISO/CEI 17050-1:2010-conformity assessment. Declaration of conformity given by the
manufacturer. Part 1: General requirements
— SR EN ISO/CEI 17050-2:2005-conformity assessment. Declaration of conformity given by the
manufacturer. Part 2: support Documentation
SR ISO-10005/2007 quality Plan regarding development.
-HGR 306/2011 measures of market surveillance of products covered by European Union legislation which
harmonises the conditions of their trading
10/1995-Law-the law regarding the quality of construction, with all subsequent amendments and additions
-440/2002 Law-Law approving Ordinance No. 95/1999 looking for quality equipment and technological
industrial installations, with all subsequent amendments and additions
-Order 20/2010 laying down certain measures for the uniform implementation of European Union legislation
which harmonises the conditions for the marketing of the products.
-Regulation (EC) No. 765/2008 of the European Parliament setting out the requirements for accreditation and
market surveillance in relation to the marketing of products.
-HG 1022/2002 relating to the products and services that can put in danger the lives of VăQătatea, safety at
work, and environmental protection.

How to work with overhead power lines, including those removed, crossed under tension, will be
provided through:
- Electrical isolation of the work area by undoing the strings bypass of pillars stretching from both
ends of the work area and
- Making Earth conductors.
-All the components will be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for the
components concerned.
The following paragraphs describe the further installation instructions given by the client. These guidelines
complement the manufacturer's instructions. The contractor will have to meet both of these instructions.
Beneficiary's instructions have priority over the instructions given by the manufacturer.
The contractor is responsible for the installation of components in accordance with the installation instructions.
If components need to be greased, in accordance with installation instructions, can be used only gresajul supplied
with the components in question, or the gresajul proposed by the beneficiary.

3.4. INSTALLATION Requirements

3.4.1. GeneralităŢi
The following subsections shall contain the technical conditions for execution on site required reaching CENTURY
400 kV d.c. Cernavoda-Stâlpu.
The contractor must draw up a full schedule of execution of the works and to share the work of execution in
several groups (sites) to be treated, both separately and together, with a view to the completion of their term
requested.
Execution of construction-Assembly works will be supervised by form masters of the beneficiary.
The contractor shall make available to the project supervisors dock an Office furnished and equipped with all
amenities (phone, computer, printer, etc.) as well as a sleeping room and means of travel.
They can only be used by the recipient (form masters of construction site, inspectors, etc.) throughout the
duration of the work.
All related expenses will be included in the tender.
Prior to the start of construction-Assembly works the contractor shall submit the beneficiary related technologies
work for approval.
3.4.2. preliminary Works and surveys

3.4.2.1. preliminary Works

Technical project has been established and trail have been conducted preliminary topographical measurements.
Based on these measurements were located on the longitudinal profiles and pillars were set coordinates of each
pole.
The following documents are necessary for the execution of works, can be found in the technical Project, part of
the tender documentation:

- Route map 1:25000 scale.

- Longitudinal profiles scales (1:2000; 1:500) with the location of the pillars.

- Pichetaj lists.

- Summary lists of piling and foundations.

- The coordinates of the pillars from the cross.


3.4.2.2. topographic Measurements and verifications
It said that it is the obligation of the contractor the full verification of measurements and pichetajului topo II. Any
discrepancy between the values assigned to the project, and those will be brought to the attention of the recipient.
Checks must be carried out topographic topometrii experience, equipped with high-performance devices. At least 15
days before the commencement of the verification must submit Contractor topographical Beneficiary list with
proposed personnel and experience (RESUME) as well as the list of English teaching in order to be approved.
Where the contractor discovers discrepancies compared to the project or the emergence of new targets on the LEA
will inform the recipient in writing to take the requisite measures.
All expenses related to topographic checks will be included in the Contract.
The contractor must begin immediately after signature of the topographical checks the contract for completion of the
necessary quantities of material execution work.
3.4.3. checking the lists of masts
The contractor must confirm the type of pole on each site.
Where at certain locations, or supraînăOŢarea type column no longer matches due to topographical
measurements, geology, new objectives, etc.., the contractor will propose that variant will be approved by the
principal.
All the changes in locations of columns on the profiles, except for any amendment route, will be included as the
"topographical measurements Checks".
3.4.4. Picketing
PicheŢi will provide reference to all pillars.
The contractor must verify the existence of these picheŢi and to provide adequate protection during execution of
the works.
3.4.5. path Changes
Route changes are not permitted on the beneficiary's consent And făUă Designer.
3.4.6. geotechnical Investigations
Geotechnical investigations are dealt with extensively in the Geotechnical Study prepared by SC ISCE SA.

3.4.7. Run foundations

3.4.7.1. GeneralităŢi

The implementation of the foundations will consider the following:


a Foundations must be approved according to the design by the client/Consultant a Before starting
betonării will check the positioning of the Foundation towards the project approved
a It will provide sprijiniri shores/partitions, if needed, to avoid mixing Earth with concrete.
a Don't pour concrete if the pits are filled with water. Epuismente will be used, if applicable.
a The concrete will prepare concrete station mechanically, will not accept concrete preparation.
a Casting and compacting the concrete will be done continuously and uniformly.
a It is preferable to run simultaneously at two feet while concreting, situated on the diagonal.
a The four feet of the Foundation must be checked before starting the shooting, during the shooting and
after completing the shooting.
a Compacting with Earth will be achieved with the same type of soil.
a Sprijinirile shores/firewalls will pull out after filling the cavities with soil.
Concrete classes minimum imposed in execution of foundations II are as follows:
x Plain Concrete C8/10-for concrete leveling x Reinforced concrete C25/30-order columns drilled, erasers and
baskets of Foundation
3.4.7.2. General conditions of the execution
Concrete works are carried out in accordance with the provisions of rules 012-1:2007, 012 US US-
2:2010, 029-97, GE has "practical guide concerning technology aided pilots for foundations" and
"Technical Instruction relating to the procedures for remedying the defects to elements of concrete and Ferro-
concrete"-C 149-87.
The concrete made in Opera will be procured from the cooking stations, equipped with mechanical testing
laboratories authorized issuing quality certificates. Certification of the quality of the concrete must be submitted by
the manufacturer, in accordance with established procedures and methodology based on 10/1995 Law of quality in
construction and the regulation on the certification of quality in construction.
For the determination of the material components of the Gravimetric dosing is recommended concrete (with
balance-spring with levers, or with highly precise tensometric doses).
For mixing concrete mixer truck can be used with forced mixing or with free fall. When using assemblies with
larger granules 31 mm, it will only use the mixer with free fall.
By mixing must obtain a homogeneous distribution of material components and provides a constant.
It is recommended that fresh concrete temperature at the start of the shooting to be between 5 ° C and
30 ° c.
Concrete must be put in maximum 15 minutes Opera from bringing it into the dock (or within 1-1 ½ hours from
loading).
Operation Foundation will be headed directly by the head of the technical work.
It will be permanently at the site and will supervise the strict observance of the provisions of the procedure
execution.
From pouring concrete will comply with the following general rules:
-Wooden and concrete casings, which will come into contact with fresh concrete, will be buciardate, dust
cleaning, oil and old concrete, doused with water (2-3) hours before and immediately before pouring concrete;
-Fixtures will be clean of dirt, rust and old concrete;
-Unloading concrete from means of transport shall be done: bene, pump, gutters or directly into work;
-If concrete brought to the place of entry in the work does not fall within the permitted segregation or
consistency, will be denied being prohibited its entry into work; is
admits îmbunăWăŢirea consistency only by using a special plasticizer;
-ÎnăOŢimea by freefall of the concrete must not be higher than 3.00 m if items with a maximum of 1.00 m,
1.50 m in all other cases, including the surface elements;
-Concrete should be spread evenly across the element, aiming to achieve horizontal layers not exceeding 50
cm înăOŢime, făUă as the previous layer to get into AC outlet;
-It will follow you to carefully complete concrete reinforcement, in accordance with the thickness of the
coating, in accordance with the requirements of the project;
-You may not frame or shaking obliterated during the betonării and no squatting of the vibra fittings.
The maximum permissible concrete disruptions, for which there is no need to take
Special Păsuri to resume shooting, must not exceed the take-off time of commencement of concrete; in the absence
of laboratory measurements, it is 2 hours of preparation of the concrete, in the case of cements with additives and
1.5 hours in the case of cements făUă added.
Before starting betonarii, is executed in the cleaning of the hole drilling for removal of deposits on the sole. This
operation is running after a time 1 ... 2 hours of drilling, while settles most of the particles on the sole drilling.
To prevent the formation of new deposits on the sole, drilling must begin pouring concrete in a short time
after completion of the cleaning foot. 15 .. 30 minutes. Where delays occur at the start pouring concrete,
greater than 30 minutes must be repeated cleaning of the drilling pad.
The main feature of drilled concrete intended and cast-in-place using pipe is laborness. In this respect, to
increase lucrabilităŢii of concrete and time of use, plasticizers and întârzietori Sockets with conducting preliminary
tests.
After completing his betonarii check by direct observation of concrete status at the end of the pilot, moving away
concrete from the surface, where the concrete does not match to be completed with casting concrete or dirt
contaminated făUă. This operation shall be recorded in a protocol concluded between constructor and project
supervisor.
During the pilot, betonării is running miŞFări slow lifting and descent of burlanului Foundation, as well as the
rotation of the miŞFări, with conditions:
- concrete tubes must be perfectly air tight, so that the water does not run into them;
- the bottom of the burlanului Foundation to maintain permanent dipped in concrete of 2, 0 m ... 3, 0
m, in order not to produce disruption in the body of the driver;
- concreting will be done in steady stream until complete concreting of the pilot, thus ensuring the
continuity of the concrete in the body of the driver;
After concreting and reinforcing concrete columns, before mounting the radierelor reinforcement, will be breaking
the head of columns, and fittings shall be in the longitudinal răsfira erasers. This operation will be performed after
the execution of concrete equalizing, but no later than two days after pouring the last pilot. At the same time it will
make verification of the continuity And concrete in columns And column testing drilled to compression and chunking.
Compacting concrete is mandatory and can be done through different processes, depending on the consistency
of the concrete, type of item, etc. Generally, mechanical compaction of the concrete is done with a vibrating dildo,
chosen according to the Endowment, the element size yard and their introduction among the armature bars.
Concrete must be compacted only so long as it is lucrabil.
Concrete elements can be decofra as soon as the concrete has attained sufficient strength to be able to retrieve
all or part, as appropriate, the tasks for which they were designed.
It is recommended that the following resistance values at which it can be done decofrarea:
x SăUŢile sides of the formwork can ward off after the concrete has attained a resistance of not less than
2.5 N/mm2so that the faces and edges of the elements may not be damaged;
x If during the strengthening of concrete temperature lies below at ° C, then it is recommended that the
minimum duration of demoulding agents to be extended by approximately the length of frost.
In order to obtain the potential properties of concrete, especially the area of the surface to be protected tratatăşi
a certain amount of time, depending on the element type, environmental conditions from the time of the shooting
and the conditions of exposure during operation of the structure.
The treatment and protection of the concrete must be started as soon as possible after the compaction.
The main methods of treatment are:
x the shuttering; x cover with protective material, kept wet; x spraying with water periodically; x
application of protective films.
3.4.7.3. Execution of foundations
Diameter Columns drilled 1000 mm diameter runs reinforced concrete C25/30 stack section walled with
longitudinal bars from 52 PC (with a minimum diameter of 20 mm) delayed by weld, merged in the Dşa way that
înnădirile to be offset in accordance with condition: i (d) 0.50 (where ri is the ratio between the area of the armatures
in the spliced "i" and the area of all the same fittings section) as defined in EN 1992-1-1:2004, and after breaking the
head longitudinal columns, reinforcement may be Uăsfiră the cancellation, according to NP 123, on minimum length
of 40 diameters.
For verification of ultrasonic pulse method of pouring concrete into columns continuity, according to Normative
C200:1981 "technical instructions for quality control of concrete construction method of buried sonic", it will mount
the outside perimeter, each armature carcasses, 3 Pipes with ‡ 63 mm equilateral, arranged along the length of the
pipes will have housing. sections joined together by threading, and at the lower end will be sealed with a stopper
from resistant epoxy resins, dop which will be removed by milling before starting verification betonării columns.
To check the continuity of the concrete pouring in columns and may use other methods of verification (e.g.,
mechanical impedance method).
The transverse Reinforcement of columns with fretă ‡ 10 mm concrete Reinforcing steel. At the top of the casing,
reinforcement over a length of 3, 00 m, fretei step is 15 cm, and
the rest step is 25 cm fretei, being in freta closely wrapped the carcass exterior reinforcement.
To ensure efficient housing in centring hole drilling on the bars at longitudinal outwardly fit the spacers in the
form of concrete Reinforcing steel skates, willing 4 in each section from 2.00 2.00 m, on the circumference of the
casing, reinforcement starting at the bottom of the housing.
Radierele and supraînăOŢarea (baskets) Foundation runs from hydraulic engineering concrete C25/30 (concrete
cement having the minimum dosage of 300 kg/m3; under the regime of exposure and technical conditions XF1
concrete in order to ensure sustainability, in the "Code of practice for the execution of concrete, reinforced concrete
and prestressed concrete"-012-1 US: 2007.
Concrete coatings with fittings will be 7.5 cm to 10 cm, drilled for columns flasks and baskets of 7.5 for the
Foundation. Other joints are not allowed to execute casting foundations apart from those specified in the US to 1
012:2007.
PăUŢii upper supraînăOŢării concreting of the Foundation will be made only after mounting legs in rolled
products the Foundation position, using a suitable Foundation frames, checking gauges, Iăcându with teodolitul.
Maximum permissible deviations from the positioning of Foundation legs are laminates:
r 1 mm/m length sides and diagonals of the base column; r 1.5 mm
vertically; r 1/1000 to tilt.
Foundation legs are laminates steel S 355 JO (52 OL)-and will be the same as the basic alloy verticals new pillar
installed.
Mentioning the technical project of the Foundation M.L.P.T.L. Verifier is mentioning of rezistenŢăşi stability "A1",
"A2".
3.4.7.4. Tolerances
The purpose of the good behaviors foundations must match both in terms of the quality of the performance of
concrete, as well as in terms of dimensions and vertical shares, respectively.
Thus, topographical measurements carried out in the field, make sure the Foundation falls within the permissible
tolerances.
The tolerances permitted for the leg of the Foundation are as follows:
x The opening at the tip of the foot of Foundation: Ʃb ± Ʃa, 0.1% of the "length of a or b; x The
opening at the base of the column, "ƩB: ƩA ± 0.1% of the length A or B; x Diagonal Distance of PF: Ʃd '
± 0.1% of length D;
x The upper level of the foot of Foundation: Ʃz ' ± 0.1% of the length A/4 or B/4; x Deviation (rotation)
of ungiulară cornierului ƩĮ: "PF ± 0.50 al DŽ angle; x The deviation along the center line

column: ' Ʃǃ ± 30 from the centerline line (column);

x X and y Eccentricities: Ʃe ' ± 0.5% of length D;


It must comply with the permissible deviations from the normative data in C-56-85 "to verify the quality of the
Regulatory and the reception building and installation works relating thereto".
3.4.7.5. Check the quality of concrete for the Foundation
Determination of the quality of the concrete foundation will be made according to SR EN 1504-1:2002: "products
and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures. Definitions, requirements, quality control and
evaluation of conformity. Part i: Definitions "And EN 206-1:2002". Part 1, performance Specifications, Ы and
compliance. ".
Non-destructive tests means tests that provide information on the properties of strength or size of a material,
item or structure of făUă resistance to subject them to determine which requests modifying the internal structure or
tearing the material, item or structure of resistance.
Some of the methods set out in the standards are not strictly nondestructive, them producing local item
degradation, who tried not to affect the load-bearing ability.
Such methods are called semi-and non-destructive.
All non-destructive methods for which there are specific technical prescriptions in force shall be applied only
under the conditions laid down therein.
Interpreting the results of non-destructive tests shall be carried out according to specific technical requirements.
For methods that do not have such prescriptions, interpretation of the results is done only by specialized
laboratories of institutes of higher education or research establishments.
In seeking concrete nondestructive testing methods may be used for the following purposes:
x determination of thickness of layers degraded; x concrete flaw detection;

x determination of reaction to aggressive chemical actions-(acids, bases, salts); x determination of the


reaction to physical actions-aggressive (high temperature, Frost-dezgheŢdizolvare);
x estimation of mechanical resistance of concrete in the work; x determining the position and diameter of
concrete fittings;
x determination of areas where concrete suffered structural damages during requests (usually
extraordinary requests).
Determination of thickness of layers of concrete under the action of physical agents, degraded or chemical can
be done through the following methods of non-destructive ultrasonic pulse.
Determination of the chemical reaction of concrete actions-aggressive can be done with non-destructive
methods: x resonance methods; x methods by the shock; x ultrasonic methods with momentum.
Determination of the reaction of concrete physical actions-aggressive can be done with one of the following non-
destructive methods: x ultrasonic pulse methods (preferred in situ); x resonance methods (preferred in laboratory).
Assessment of mechanical resistance of the concrete work will be done with one of the following non-destructive
methods:
the) relatively high precision methods:
x the combined method of propagation velocity of recoil index; x the combined
method of propagation velocity-force pulling; x methods with ultrasonic pulse.
b) illustrative methods: x methods of recoil; x avulsion method; x local blast method.
Determining the position and diameter of armatures in the concrete can be made with one of the following
methods:
x radiometric methods with radiation gamma or beta; x pachometrului method.
Behavior of concrete under repeated loading simple or can be recorded with one of the methods:
x acoustic emission method; x classical methods
with ultrasonic pulse; x resonance methods; x
methods by shock.
Material The place of sampling and the
minimum frequency
The
No. The feature is Concrete station Place of implementation place of
crt. verified in Opera entry into
1 Fresh Laborness, according -twice the exchange -one sample for each type of Opera, the
concrete to of work and type of concrete and exchange it,
checks shall
EN 12350-2:2009 concrete but at least one sample to 10
m3 concrete be recorded
in the
documents
Temperature (on time -four determinations -four determinations for each
sensitive or if it is Exchange of work and type of underlying
for each Exchange of
provided as a technical concrete the
condition) work and type of
reception of
concrete
works.
2 Reinforced resistance to - a sample at trial on the cube, according Through
concrete compression) on test- max 2 days for each to
the place of
pieces type of concrete for EN 12390-6:2010 and EN
release
12390-2:2009 runs on three
cubical at the age of Bc t cubes to 20 m3 of concrete Opera
28 days, according to 10; poured and at least one for means the
each pilot executed
EN 12390-6: - two samples place of
per
2010 unloading of
Văptămână for
the concrete
Bc (d) 7.5
from means
b) resistance to trial on the cube, according
of transport
compression on pieces to
shaped for checking (bene,
EN 12390-6:2010 and EN
the resistance of the concrete
12390-2:2009 runs on three
control phase,
cubes to 20 m3 of concrete pumps,
according to SR
poured and at least one for
etc.).
each pilot executed
Sampling
shall be
carried out according to SR EN 12390-6:2010.
3.4.7.5.1 table Features what concrete verificăşi frequency of checks
EN
12390-6:2010

Concrete samples taken from leather jackets and from foundations themselves will be analyzed in specialized
laboratories for determination of resistance to compression, the porosity and alkalinity, as well as for chemical and
microscopic analyses.
3.4.7.6. Transportation and storage
Delivery of concrete must be accompanied by a delivery note-transport concrete in which are recorded the date
and time of arrival at the point of concrete work, confirming receipt of the concrete,
the concrete delivery temperature and ambient temperature.
After a maximum of 30 days from the delivery of concrete, the manufacturer is obliged to issue a quality
certificate for the concrete goods.
Improper results obtained for samples of reinforced concrete will be communicated to the user within 30 days of
the delivery of concrete.
The transport must be carried out by taking concrete measures needed to prevent segregation, loss or
contamination of the concrete. Means of transport shall be sealed to prevent loss of cement milk.
The maximum possible duration of transport depends on the particular concrete composition and atmospheric
conditions.
Table 3.4.7.6.1 maximum length of concrete with autoagitatoare.

Concrete mixture
Maximum duration (minutes)
temperature (° C)

class cements (d) 32.5 class cements t 42.5

10 and < t (d) 30


50 35
°

T < 10a 70 50

3.4.7.7. Operations and execution phases for foundations the foundations Achievement presumes the
following operations:
x Delivery-receipt location;
x Topometric Checks, establishing the quota-phase determining 0.00; x Land Arrangement and working
platforms; x Detecting possible underground facilities; x Drawing foundations; x Execution of
excavation/drilling;
x Manufacturing, installation and launching of the fittings; x Verification of reinforcement; x Concreting;

x Check the quality of the concrete by nondestructive methods;


x The test pilots from pulling and compression (for foundations on piles); x SăSăturii Execution
radierelor for achieving supported (for foundations on piles); x Checking of dimensions in plan;
x Breaking the head longitudinal reinforcement and evazarea columns in order to încastrării columns in
flasks (for foundations on piles);
x Manufacture and installation of reinforcement for radierele/baskets Foundation;
x Mounting of Foundation legs in rolled products position, using the Foundation frame before betonării
radierelor/baskets Foundation;
x Cofrarea radierelor/vents and concreting of the Foundation; x Decofrarea concrete elements, after

strengthening, proper; x Execution of plaster and paint shops with protective role of the concrete of the
Foundation; x Filling, compacting and leveling the land.
For the proper conduct of the work, in order to ensure the requirements of siguranŢăşi stability, is constituted as a
decisive phase in the programme of works covered by quality control phases carried out by determining on the
contractor and approved by the Beneficiary.

3.4.8. Mounting earthing Sockets


3.4.8.1. earthing Sockets standard
The continuity of the earthing of the protective conductor the sockets is done in metallic structure of pillars and
there's no need for a separate connection of conductors.
0ăsurarea soil resistivity will be included in the geological report.
Under these conditions the natural outlet of the Foundation reinforcement can help minimize resistance 10 făUă
Ÿ additional items (rods, flat).
All pillar legs will be provided with holes for connecting the earthing strip of artificial made of galvanised steel
40x6 mm.
Prior to the commencement of work on the stretch of the arrow protective conductors will measure the
resistance of earthing Sockets at each location. The measured resistance of these sockets must correspond to those
shown in the chapter "earthing Sockets" depending on soil resistivity.
If the results of the measurements exceed the values imposed additional elements are added up to compliance
with the provisions of this specification.
3.4.8.2. Additional items
Extra items that are added to the PTO engagement under specifications consist of galvanised Strip for artificial
outlets.
All related items earthing sockets will be laid at a minimum depth of-0.5 m above ground level.
Assembly elements and accessories will need to be approved by the client especially in terms of resistance to
corrosion and corrosion protection.
After mounting the additional elements will be made new measurements of resistance of earthing Sockets.

3.4.9. Mounting poles


3.4.9.1. GeneralităŢi
The contractor will assemble pillars and their accessories according to plans approved runlevel. The pillars will be
completely refit with all buloanele including buloanele of scale properly tightened before operation of the expanse of
the conductors.
Metal pillars will mount on the foundations at least 28 days after pouring concrete and only after the filling of the
Earth has been carried out properly. Minimum time to 14 days may be approved by the customer depending on the
brand used concrete and local conditions.
During installation of the pillars will take account of the following:

- Installation must be done in accordance with pillar design, panels/sections.

- Should be checked căşuruburile, nuts, washers and gussets are delivered in accordance with the approved

drawings.
- After installation of each section to be verified level and Plumb, and correcting eventual mistakes, if any.

- If the column is not finished building someday, it will anchor properly at night.

- After completing each screw pillar building will be closely checked. After checking the mechanical

deformation of the screw to prevent its dissolution and the realization of such a theft system.
- Not admitted damaging the layer of corrosion protection of pillars (zinc or paint).

- If you are found of protection layer damage of rustproof of pillars, it will be reworked, repair costs going

back to the contractor.


3.4.9.2. Handling and storage
Storage of metallic pillars on site elements will be made so that the metallic elements should not be in direct
contact with the ground, to be adequately protected and adjacent roads. It is forbidden contact with the metallic
elements of the pillars and meteoric waters with other substances that might affect the zinc layer.
Handling and storage elements will be made pillars so as to avoid damage to their structure and of the zinc
coating. You are prohibited from storing metal components into one another, directly on the ground.
All surface rust stains, corrosive salts or other deposits that appeared on metal elements during storage or
installation must be removed făUă column to produce damaging anti-corrosive protection.
Any deposits that adhere permanently to the structure must be removed.
3.4.9.3. Installation Procedure
The contractor shall ensure that the procedures for assembling a pillar, manipulation of laminates and constrains
the lifting will be done in conditions of maximum safety of the personnel participating in the Assembly and those who
supervise the execution.
The pillars can assemble on ground sections, fitted, on-site or you can mount the bumper bar directly on the site.
If the collation designators from the ground and lifting vertically from position of their project will be done in
accordance with the details of the column and the Foundation. If the column is fitted by tightening the fasteners,
screw machine products's cut during installation must be suitable for all forces and efforts that appear during the
installation and permit at the same time aligning elements.
After mounting and assembling complete screw machine products, they should not exceed by more than
10 mm beyond the outer edge of the nut.
During mounting pillar will avoid damage or deformation of its components.
Deviations during installation will fall into the acceptable limits. Not be allowed widening holes.
Elements of the pillars which get to hookup with deformities resulting from handling or transport will be directed
or replaced by the contractor at the expense of the latter.
Ladders may be used as appropriate during installation that will be eliminated (as buloanele already installed
scale) when mounting works are interrupted.
Before assembling the sections joints/areas will be issued by all elements that may hinder the correct alignment
of the sections.
After fitting the pillars will be curăŢDŢi of deposits or the excess paint from the pillars of the keyed day
centerpiece.
The contractor will use temporary support cut-before lifting them, if the beneficiary considers that differences
may occur during removal of sections.
Lifting devices attached to the mast will be only in approved positions.
The pillars will be fitted with plaques identifying signs, and warning. These plates shall be installed on the mast,
in the places indicated by the details of execution. Installation of these plates will be made after the completion of
work by stretching the arrow.
3.4.9.4. Deviations in mounting pillars
After the laying of wires deviation from the vertical support poles will be max. 1:100 at the înăOŢimea peak, the
permissible tilting pillar being in the direction of load.
Deviations from the dimensions of the sections (sides and diagonals) will be up to +/-0.001 of the length of the
side or diagonal but not more than 10 mm
Deviations in length units (vârfar, consoles, sections) shall be 10 mm for thickness of elements having up to 6
mm And 15 mm for items having higher thickness of 6 mm.
Deviations from the distance between the points of linking insulating chains will be +/-15 mm.
Deviations from rectilinear form of axis (side) subassemblies in the horizontal or vertical plane shall be +/-
the area damage length 0.001 but not more than 10 mm
6ăgeata of a local maximum with the Struts installed will be 0.01 of the length of the affected area, the
maximum length of the affected area will be a maximum of 5 widths.
3.4.9.4 table. Technical specifications for the realization of the pillars

Moving
profiles of
handrails composed towards the position of the project will be a maximum of 0.01 of the width of the elements.

Tightening the screws 3.4.9.5.

In general, the column will be assembled and erected with the screws tightened by hand.
Assembling the final screws tightening moments from imposed shall be implemented only after the Assembly of
all elements.
All screws must be fitted with the Grower washers.
After having performed the erection of the column will be tight bolts with torque wrenches only with specified in
the following moments:
Table 3.4.9.5.1 tightening Moments for bolts

0ărime (mm) Fastening torque (Nm)

12 60-80 Stiffening

16 100-120 elements used in raising


the pylons will be well
18 120-140
made and does not
20 140-180
affect the metal
24 310-370
structures and any
items.
After gathering the final screw machine products all related nuts at the base of the pillars designators will be
welded and screws heads will be distorted to avoid vandalism is.
Affected areas will be protected with anti-corrosive paints compatible (rich in zinc).
3.4.9.6. manufacturing Errors
In the event that it finds errors in manufacturing of metal components, the contractor will inform the recipient in
writing who will decide whether the errors can be corrected on the site (s) in question will be returned to the
manufacturer for replacement or fixes .
Deformed elements
Elements bent, twisted or other deformations during transport, storage, handling or lifting operations of the
pillars will be reconditioned or replaced, directed by the contractor with the approval of the beneficiary. Tightening
the screws will be achieved by methods that do not affect the rustproof protection by hot dip galvanizing.
The destruction of the galvanization plating)
Items brought on site columns with rustproof protection (electroplating) affected will be repaired using methods
approved by the client which will check the quality of repairs carried out. Restoration of anti-corrosive protection in
case of welds (applied with the approval of the beneficiary) will be made by applying to at least a coat of primer And
two coats of paint on the entire area affected by the weld.
Items rejected by the Beneficiary will be replenished from the manufacturer.
Tests on site b)
Rustproof protection layer thickness (galvanization) will be verified, so the arrival of materials on site and during
the removal of the pillars.
The zinc coating shall comply with the provisions of the Technical Specification.
The contractor must provide the necessary appliances on site measurements cover with zinc with an accuracy.
Measuring instruments will need to be available to the beneficiary, starting from the first delivery of metal
elements, up to the front desk.
All related costs will be included in the tender.
3.4.10. Laying the arrow of the active conductors and the protective conductors
The following requirements apply to the extent the active conductors and the arrow of the protective conductors
shall be complied with by the contractor:
3.4.10.1. Methodology for mounting wires
Be sure to use the pilot wire method, every panel of the CENTURY, with the exception of the cross, where specific
methods will be used, according to CS Crossings.
3.4.10.2. Handling and delivery
During preservation and during handling, reels with the active conductor and protection will be above ground and
in SăstraŢi places. Contact with any substance that can damage the reels and conductors will be avoided.
The contractor shall take all necessary measures during handling, storage and installation to avoid bending,
twisting, indenting or other damaged wires and reels. No account active and protective conductors shall not be
dashed on the ground or other surfaces.
Precautions will be taken when loading and unloading the reels of vehicles in such a way that the reels
do not be down.
3.4.10.3. Program of stretching the arrow
At least one month prior to the commencement of the work of stretching the arrow, the contractor will notify all
factors involved and the beneficiary shall submit for approval a detailed programme concerning the extent to Văgeată
stating the position of the reels and pulling together with the premises, tables of pull-ups and arrows and all other
relevant information needed for the stretch to the maximum including tracŢiunile arrow can be used during the pilot
and yarns active and protective conductors.
3.4.10.4. Tools and equipment
Tools and equipment shall be in accordance with IEEE-Standard 524 "Guide to install conductors" and under the
conditions which are described below.
The train of rollers
The train rolls (for condctorul/protection) will be made especially for the laying of wires and you will need to have
the shape and size of the grooves corresponding to requirements of IEEE 524. The rollers will need to be lined with
rubberized neoprene or other approved beneficiary. Tires will have a liberăşi motion will not cause any damage to the
surface of contact with the conductor. Rollers will not move or which blocks operation of the conductor will be
replaced immediately. Support rollers
Support rollers will be built and will be provided for the roller brakes.
Roller brake active and protective conductors during laying will be controlatăşi will be carried out in such a way
as to avoid damaging wires or rollers.
Thread pilot
The pilot will be thread from a thread of steel nerăsucibil. Thread pilot will be strong enough to enable stretching
the arrow. The contractor will provide two 3 m wide along the line to the pilot wire.
Pulling machine
Car pulling won't have a capacity that is less than maximum thrust from active and protective conductor. The
shooting system will have a winch fitted with box for changing gears during stretching the arrow of the conductors.
Stretching equipment
Reels of stretch neoprene or will be covered with teflon. The braking system will be done in such a way
that when the maximum voltage is reached, this should be kept constant as long as the brake is in this position.
Wheel diameter and coating material will be approved by Fătre. Teflon coating neoprene or having a minimum
thickness of 6 mm is acceptable. System for measuring the length of wires
You will be provided an apparatus for measuring the size of conductors during the arrow that can be part of
either the car pulled, either stretching equipment.
3.4.10.5. The crossing of roads, power lines and communications
Will be provided across the roads, fences, power lines and communications.
The execution of the installation of conductors over power lines and telecommunications, public roads, canals or
other obstructions, the contractor will be responsible for notification to the competent authorities in writing of the
date and duration of the who proposes to carry out the work.
Firewalls will be used to avoid the vicinity of wires less than 5 m and 1.5 m from the LEA 20kv or low voltage
during the conductors. The firewall will also observe distances mentioned above. When using metal screens at the
crossing over the lines of electricity, they will have to be earthed.
Firewalls will be long enough to ensure the necessary space in the case of conductors that can balance occur
during operations and will have the strength required to withstand wind pressure, vertical loads and other tasks that
can be anticipated.
The cost of all firewalls will be included in the cost of the work of stretching the arrow.
The contractor will make his own expense all necessary arrangements and will take all the necessary provision
where the route II special conditions.
Before starting the laying of wires the contractor will check the requirements of Authorities concerning the
Păsurile siguranŢăşi will be responsible for compliance with these requirements.
3.4.10.6. The extent of the protection conductor
The conductor will be spread out over the length of traversărilor and will be attached to the columns
according to the plans of execution. The methods used for the laying of protective conductors will be the
same as for active conductors, with differences specified in this paragraph.
Equipment and tools used shall be earthed.
The extent of the protective conductor of the arrow will be performed before laying the arrow of active
conductors.
Support clamps will be installed so that the connection of the grounding to be in the same direction, and the end
of the link to be caught by the pole in a manner approved by the client.
Antivibratoarele will need to be installed on the conductor, as shown in the plans approved runlevel beneficiary
based on manufacturer's documentation.
the extent of active conductors 3.4.10.7.
The extent of active conductors shall be done by the method of stretching through the tensioner, and the
contractor shall submit for approval to the details of the method of stretching and equipment used on the who wants
to use it. Conductors will be Kept above ground all the time when the conductor is moving. The method of stretching
required to install all conductors will be controlled at all times.
The three phase wires that form will be installed at the same time and will be maintained at the same traction
throughout the operation.
The laying of wires will not be made, but in no case less than 28 days after pouring concrete foundation or any
other approved beneficiary duration depending on the type of concrete used and local conditions, nor until the
Assembly and gathering screw machine products pillars has not been verified by terminatăşi.
The contractor will take special measures to ensure that both active conductors and the protective
conductor must not be dashed on the ground at any time during the course of operations or to come into
contact with any obstacles.
Reels of wires and protection will have to be examined closely before starting operations and all the nails or other
objects that may damage the conductors will be removed. During the operation the expanse will be looked after all
the reels during, and conductors will be inspected for possible defects observation while running on the drum. The
overseers will be positioned in critical locations to ensure proper scope of conductors.
Thrust into the conductors during laying will be as small as possible, so as to preserve a minimum distance
towards the ground conductor during playback. At no time shall not exceed thrust 75% of final thrust.
All equipment of stretching will be anchored and will be positioned in such a way that the Poles, pre-trial and
fittings should not be overloaded.
Shooting equipment of the conductors will be chosen in such a way as to ensure a continuous and steady
shooting. All provision will be taken to avoid damage to conductors. Clamps and other accessories used for
conductors during mounting will not allow slippage or movement or layers of coating and will not damage or deform
the conductors.
3.4.10.8. Making Earth conductors and equipment spread into areas of parallelism with high voltage

Conductors will be effectively earthed in a manner approved during the work, in all the places where the staff
works.
Earthing will be maintained until the completion of their respective operations.
The reels lined with neoprene or rubber will have an electrical connection between the suspension and the
conductor and will work with minimum friction.
When extension of operations taking place in conductors vicinity towards CENTURY under tension, the contractor
shall take all necessary measures to prevent accidents or injury to persons due to induction or physical contact.
3.4.10.9. Repair damaged conductors
Any damage to the conductors will be immediately reported to the recipient whose decision concerning
repair or replacement conductors will be final.
Repair damaged conductors will be carried out in accordance with the methodology specified or approved by the
client at the expense of the contractor. If the damage was not caused by the Contractor, the repairs will be paid as
additional work.
Damage means any unevenness of the conductor which can be detected visually or by touch. Damage includes,
but is not limited to these, notches, scratches, bumps, knots, torn out threads or threads.
Where, in the opinion of the beneficiary, can perform repairs, they will be carried out with care through
şmirgheluire or through repair clamps.
When depăşHşte not damage conductors 4 wires either broken or deeper notched a third of their diameter, use
repair clamps. Knots, bumps or severely damaged portions will not be accepted.
All damage caused by the fastening devices shall be repaired or removed, as indicated by the beneficiary before
the laying of wires at the arrow.
3.4.10.10. active and thus regarded as protective conductors
Înnădirile active and protective conductors shall not be permitted in the openings of the crossing over specific
targets (see the provisions of NTE 003/04) as CENTURY, roads, pipelines, buildings, water courses, etc.
Active and protective conductors shall be attached to the pillars of stretching with compression clamps, wire with
OPGW less.
3.4.10.11. the arrow Straighteners
Active and protective conductors will be stretched to the arrow according to tables of pull-ups and arrows made
by the contractor on the basis of the project and approved by the principal.
The contractor shall submit the beneficiary prior to the start of operations for the initial proposal to the extent
that will ensure that both active and conductors are installed so as to reach a final State required after 10 years in
the service. The system will be in a way that other elements of the line should not be overfilled during operation
stretching from arrow, and the conductors shall not be exposed to vibration due to wind damage in the period ahead.
We recommend checking the arrows in the panels, based on the number of openings.
Method and measuring instruments will be proposed by the contractor and approved by the principal.
The contractor will use a communication system for controlling the operation of arrow shooting. TracŢiunile from
conductors shall not exceed the values in the tables.
The entire stretch from the arrow of the conductors will be performed only during the daytime. Operations
stretching from the arrow will not be carried out in periods of high winds or other adverse weather conditions that
may affect the accuracy of the measurements.
After realizing the correct arrow arrow close to conductors, will remain on the rolls at least 3 days before the
arrow finalăşi the clemuirii support clamps.
Pulling and adjusting the conductors appropriate final position of the arrow will be made with a mechanical winch
and a manually operated or not by drawing with the tractor.
The contractor will not apply any final thrust conductor than in the presence of the recipient. Overall
responsibility for ensuring the correct Contractor returns tractions.
A tolerance equal to 0.01 * arrow, will be permitted provided that all conductors from opening Your arrow, and
have the same gauge electrical ground and distances to be provided.
Gauges between conductors and Earth and between the ropes and all structures will have to be checked during
installation and before the teaching line.
The contractor will keep a register in which to jot down the entire expanse the arrow showing details about
Panel, stretching from săgeatăşi apertures, ambient temperature, prestress (where applicable), the arrow iniŢialăşi
final date of laying and clemuirii.
This situation, together with the înnădirilor situation will be part of the final report of the line and will be handed
over to the recipient prior to issuance of the minutes. This report will be available for inspection at any time.
The contractor will check and will pursue the following requirements:

- Prior to the commencement of the operation of arrow will stretch to verify the achievement of the goals of

all pillars of the cross screws.


- The location of the pillars is that laid down in the draft and the crossing is in a straight line. It is not allowed

any deviation from a straight line between the two final columns you crossing.
- It will check the verticality and desks across pillars.

- The extent of the arrow will be achieved after the international norms and practices, with the use of

approved equipment.
- It will check protective conductor at anchorage pillar before pulling wires which shall be implemented from

the top down.

- It will strain the three conductors of a stage at the same time and will be kept to the same amount of thrust.

- It will avoid damage to the surfaces of aluminum conductors come into contact with the equipment pulled.

- Conductors must not come into contact with the ground or with crops.

- While dragging the arrow thrust in conductors must not exceed the working thrust for the respective

temperature.
- After the shooting, the conductors will not stay more than 36 hours before being pulled from the arrow. As
long as they are "free" conductors shall insure against damage of any kind, such as vibration, impact or
other causes.
For the final expanse of conductors shall comply with the following:

- Conductors will be drawn in accordance with the tables of arrows approved beneficiary before being

clemuite. Conductors will be held according to the arrow arrows and tables will be left on the rolls for at least
an hour after that will check and adjust if necessary before being transferred to the support clamps.

- Conductors must be clemuite not later than 36 hours after the arrow after arrow original tables.

- Dynamometers are used for setting the voltage in the wires.

- 6ăgeata will be checked after the passage of wires in support clamps.

- Operation the arrow will not run on wind, low temperature, or other conditions that prevent obtaining

satisfăFătoare results.
3.4.10.12. Clemuirea
Active and protective conductors shall be marked for clemuire to all the pillars on the same day after the final
operation stretching from arrow.
Places for clemuire will be calculated by the contractor and marked using a method approved by the client that
will not damage the conductors.
Support clamps will be installed and adjusted so that the chain of insulators to be supportive in an
upright position.
3.4.11. Mount protective conductor with embedded optical fibers (OPGW) and accessories
3.4.11.1 functional Conditions.
Protective conductor with embedded optical fibers (OPGW)
OPGW, clamping sets, junction boxes and fittings shall be installed according to the instructions given by the
installation Contractor/Manufacturer and with the instructions in this chapter.
The extent of OPGW and the arrow will be done according to the rules, with IEEE-Guide "Guide to installation of
Overhead Transmission line conductors" (IEEE, december 14, 1978) and with the requirements of this chapter.
When you wrap the wire reels with brake that intrăşi stands on the upper face of the reels in the direction of
dragging, conductor: will enter through the left drum and it will păUăsi through the right type of conductor, for "right
hand" (the last layer on înfuniat right) and will enter through the right drum and it will păUăsi through left, for
conductor type "left hand" (the last layer înfuniat on the left).
This procedure prevents desfunierea conductors passing through the brake drums.
All accessories, clamps, fittings that are required for mounting the OPGW will be installed as a service, and You
provide the optical tube, so and OPGW, a 50-year-old min.
OPGW should not be curved with the radius of curvature of not less than 20 times its diameter.
The condition must be respected, both in the case of permanent curbărilor and the accidental, the conductor
may be tense or relaxed.
Optical fibers in OPGW must not be tensioned during installation of OPGW.
Throughout the Assembly operation should be avoided strivirile OPGW and flicks.
Immediately after cutting, the heads will be OPGW protected against ingress of moisture, soiling, or gas by using
protective caps, cover with metal reinforcement tubes. The caps will have You isolate OPGW in accordance with
instructions given by the manufacturer.
OPGW should not be implemented on the ground.
You have pulled the OPGW arrow, such as arrows and OPGW tracŢiunile to be as close as possible to the arrows
and tracŢiunile protective conductor.
The extent of operations, OPGW arrow and clemuirea, must be carried out continuously.
Clamping kits and accessories for OPGW OPGW, junction boxes and antivibratoare
The contractor will inspect in detail all the materials that will be installed. If a component does not merge
properly, or is not, whatever the explanation, it's not going to be used for mounting.
Once all the components are assembled, the contractor will check the following:
- How to grip the connecting elements;
- the mode of attachment of junction compartment;
- the storage mode of protection tubes for junctions (not to be deposited pressed);
- micro Kit;
- module mounting of connectors for mounting of OPGW and junction boxes;
- sealing mode of junction boxes;
- securing tabs of the optical media;
- closing the housing junction boxes;
If the inspection shows that this fitting is inadequate, or that the materials delivered are non-conforming, the
contractor will carry out the installation, or will replace the non-conforming material at its expense.
Junctions
O the fibres will be made by means of an arc welding equipment (arc-fusion). Each fibre codificatăşi joncŢionată
will be marked with indelible ink to humidity (waterproof). The code will be written on the protection of the members.
In the junction will provide reserves of at least 100 cm of fibers (fiber-free buffer). The reserve is intended for
subsequent changes of joncŢionări or interchanges.
In order to protect the fibres umezealăşi pollutants, during installation, interruption of operations fiecăror OPGW
heads will be protected with protective caps, and junction boxes will be closed accordingly.
Whenever the junction box closes and opens again, it's dehumidification sets will be inspected and replaced if
necessary. Reception of optical fibers
Optical fibers must meet the requirements of the technical specification in respect of OPGW wire.
3.4.11.2. Technical conditions
Protective conductor with embedded optical fibers (OPGW)
OPGW will be installed by the "wired". Before launching the operation, the contractor will have to draw the
mounting procedure, which will be approved by the principal.
6ăgeŢile mounting will be adjusted for the acquisition of fluajului originally at working temperature.
Maximum Thrust for OPGW, Ti, p , is equal to the initial thrust of OPGW in the pull-ups at 20 q C lower than the
temperature of the installation.
6ăgeŢile and tracŢiunile will be determined for each Panel before installation.
For the installation of OPGW, tires will only be installed according to the instructions of the manufacturer of
OPGW. Running surfaces shall be clean and smooth to prevent scratches făUă/destruction of large RŢel aluminate of
OPGW.
In order to make it possible to use the tires, they will catch the pillars by means of appropriate
parts/devices that would prevent foreseeable/OPGW falls.
During installation, the radii of curvature of OPGW of OPGW must always be greater than the specified minimum
radius of curvature for OPGW.
Should be fixed on OPGW until junction boxes, terminals spaced at the distance 1500 mm above needs to be
adjusted, depending on the column items over the crossing (diagonal gussets)
During the installation of OPGW on pillars, its rotation, caused by handshakes in coils and flicks will be avoided.
Length of OPGW descent will be equal to the înăOŢimea column plus one spare mounting considerations
determined in each end of the OPGW Panel.
Clamping kits and accessories for OPGW, junction boxes and antivibratoare
All components will be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for the components
concerned.
The following paragraphs describe the further installation instructions given by the client. These guidelines
complement the manufacturer's instructions. The contractor will have to meet both of these instructions.
Beneficiary's instructions have priority over the instructions given by the manufacturer.
The contractor is responsible for the installation of components in accordance with the installation instructions.
If components need to be greased, in accordance with installation instructions, can be used only gresajul
supplied with the components in question, or gresajul shipped by the beneficiary. In principle, it will be used the
same type of greasing that used for OPGW. Junction boxes
Install junction boxes terminals on traverse, including junction fibers, consists of:
-Mounting the junction box housing on stelajul caught by pole;
-7ăierea armărilor both ends of OPGW;
-Introduction of OPGW in the junction box housing;
-OPGW cables fitting seal in
-Mounting fasteners bucşele OPGW in housing;
-Mounting of the guiding tubes (where appropriate);
-Guiding tubes with optical fibers in the junction box;
-Introduction of fiber optic cables in the engine;
-Installing grease opritorilor;
-O the fibers based on splicing diagram;
-Mounting the protective tubes of joncŢionărilor, including tagging them and dropping them into buckets;
-0ăsurători approval for each section;
-Junction box Assembly, including dezumidificatorul and "cable glants".
After the conductor is fitted (installed) in the securing clips and book of conductor is tightly wrapped, it must be
installed in the card bracket to the mast (grounded) to the junction box. Binding clips to pole must be tight OPGW
with a fastening torque specified by the executing (fastening torque: OPGW Link at the pole).
When a clip fastening at stanchion is suitable for OPGW conductor, but it's just an OPGW installed, fit well, and a
second fictitious conductor, of sufficient length. It must have the same diameter as that of OPGW. Fictional conductor
heads shall be fitted with protective caps.
The collection of OPGW carrying clip from pole is made with a fastening torque specified, set by the
manufacturer.
All components will be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for the components
concerned.
Junction box and/or fiber compartments will be closed whenever the work is interrupted. The contractor will have
to guarantee high resistance to humidity (waterproof) box when closing is final.
Set of stretching
3ăUŢi:

- clamping system with helical spirals preformed, clamp ring;


- Spire preformed protection
- earthing clamp (between OPGW and mast)
- any other necessary component installation on mast Tooling:
- No special tools are required.
Instructions : Make sure păUŢile are compatible with the type of OPGW. Special attention should be taken on the
type of clamp.
Spirals are manufactured specifically for preformed dataset, therefore only delivered with the rest of the spirals of
the kit must be used. All spirals set stretch must be installed once.
All the components of the kit must be wielded carefully due to low manufacturing tolerances.
WARNING : Set of stretching is done only for OPGW maintaining wire stretched.
Don't use resultant set of stretching for drag operations.
Set for OPGW will include at least:
3ăUŢi:

- two support clamps backed by a yoke;


- Spire preformed protection
- cord clamp and earthing (between OPGW and mast)
- any other necessary component to allow installation on a mast Tooling:
- tubular torque wrench
- insulating cloth (plastic not allowed)
- rubber mallet for laying spirals.
Installation : Make sure păUŢile are compatible with the type of OPGW. All spirals set stretch must be installed
once.
The contact surface between OPGW and neoprene semibucşele should be gresată. P iuliŢa must
close using the load cell scale, the value of the specified tightening torques.
The same is true for the tightening of the porcelain peg of PE if it connects through the bulonare of the body of
the clamp.
Antivibratoare Stockbridge
Antivibratoarele will only be on OPGW wire protected with spiral preformed. The number of antivibratoare will be
given to the study of vibration.
Antivibratoarele will be adequately protected against:

- corrosion
- temperatures ranging from-30 q C to + 40 q (C)
Antivibratoarelor clamps will be so designed that the mounting damage of the OPGW to be minimal.
Antivibratoarelor installation will be done using ordinary tools.
Antivibratoarelor counterweights shall be so designed as to avoid accumulation of water. the screws will tighten
by a method approved. Specification for OPGW antivibratoarele is found in part 7 of this document
Reception of optical fibers
Attenuation coefficient on a portion that is installed with OPGW OTDR measurements shall be determined by the
head, will be less than 0.24 dB/km for wavelengths of 1530 nm and 1625 nm.
Maximum attenuation of a junction will be 0.15 dB. The average value of atenuărilor if an optical will be a
maximum of 0.06 dB.
FC type connectors, attenuation-PC will not be greater than 0.30 dB.
Total attenuation at 1550 nm in an optical path will not be greater than:
NS · + 0.06 Mm · 0.24 + 2 · 0.30, with
NS: number of junctions in optical path
Ll: length of OPGW optical path, including.
Extent of protective conductors OPGW will make similar active and protective conductors.

3.4.12. Mounting and insulation fittings


3.4.12.1. Shipping and handling
Pre-trial and cladding must remain in their packaging (crates) until the time of installation and must be handled
carefully to avoid damage.
The pre-trial has to be cleaned before being raised on pillars with a fine material to be removed dust and
deposits. Do not use wire brushes or abrasive.
Lifting must be performed with a rusty whose type will be approved by the client in order to avoid
damage.
3.4.12.2. Installation
All fittings on line insulators chains and will be installed in accordance with the plans of execution, and all
systems (hooks, clamps) fixture will be installed correctly.
Insulating chains will assemble at the ground will not allow thin rods broken or ciobite.
Insulating chains must not be used as stairs and the contractor will need to provide suitable ladders for access to
conductors and insulators chains.
Antivibratoarele for protective conductors shall be carefully installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
When all the work of the Assembly of chains to a pylon insulators have been completed, you will be charged a
final cleaning with a fine material.
All the joints will be made in the presence of the recipient.
To merge the surfaces of contact of the conductors and connections will be polished, cleaned and covered with a
protective compound approved.
Antivibratoare spacers for 2-phase will be installed as specified in the manufacturer's Specification.

3.4.13. requirements concerning the installation of night's centerpiece ohtl


Requirements for the installation of systems of buoyage on ohtl listed below include both aspects of the main
buoyage system, and aspects of their installation on the pillars II. installing all components will be made According to
the manufacturer's specifications.
Drawing up all the details of construction and erection Contractor is pregnancy. The details of the execution will
be carried out on the basis of the description given in this documentation, in compliance with all legal provisions,
standards and requirements for the design, installation, environment and safety at work. The contractor shall submit
for approval to the details of running the client and Consultant.
Upon completion of installation, the systems must operate in accordance with the centerpiece and the
parameters of the manufacturer.
3.4.13.1. location of Schemes buoyage systems
The position and the number of columns that will make night balizarea will be in accordance with the provisions
of ICAO Annex 14, head-6, relating to the means of the Visual barriers. Buoyage system configuration that will be
installed on each pole nominated for balizarea night will be determined by the contractor and will be presented to the
recipient for approval.
3.4.13.2. buoyage systems Mounting
The fitting will be made using clamping (cutting data support) provided by the manufacturer and in accordance
with the manufacturer's specifications.
Marking of each light point balizat night will be done via two signal lamps, each fed from photovoltaic energy
sources different for back-up. It is permissible to use an energy source to power a maximum of four signal lamps.
3.4.13.3. Fitting lamps on buoyage
Fitting the lamp of buoyage on vârfar will be doing so at least the lamp body (defined as the part where they're
incorporated light sources) to overcome the protective conductor share and share of accessories protective conductor
to the pole, so that the beam of light of the lamp must not be blocked in any direction from a horizontal plane.
All lamps buoyage will be provided with an installation support.
Support should enable installing lamp on vertical or horizontal surfaces, by means of screws.
Fitting the lamp shall be such that the lamp body is upright.
Maximum deviation from the vertical axis of the lamp must be less than 3%.
Fixing the bracket lamp centerpiece at the pole by welding is not supported.
A solution for attaching the lamp pole clamp is type devices.
Is admisăşi catching the Poles through drilling laminates and fittings.
Threaded joints will be minimal with M8 screws, nuts and washers provided with the Grower.
Support grips the lamp will be protected against corrosion by hot-dip galvanizing.
Support grips the lamp will be designed by the Contractor and approved by the principal.
For mounting the lamp use the buoyage holes provided for by the manufacturer in the lamp holder.
It is permissible to execute the lamps support punching new holes.
The new drill holes will be positioned so as to permit the installation and operation of normally făUă damage to
components of the lamp or the connection cable from the solar station.
* ăurirea and catching the pole support will run făUă lamp installed so that the body Oămpii or other păUŢi
thereof shall not be affected.
Mount will make it 40x40x4 minimum profiles.
The contractor shall submit for approval to the client and Consultant plans on how to attach the front vârfarele
and buoyage uppers pillars II.
The contractor shall submit for approval to the plans on how to attach front pillars of the vârfarele CENTURY
centerpiece.
3.4.13.4 solar stations on mounting poles
Buoyage systems manufacturer will supply metallic structures (stands) will be installed on the station
components solar (photovoltaic module And energy storage system).
The optimum angle of inclination of the solar panels to the horizontal will be in accordance with the technical
specifications of the manufacturer. Constructive solution of steel structures will comply with this requirement.
Mounting the solar stations will be made so that the orientation of the solar modules (panels) to be on the South
(front equipped with solar cells).
Maximum permissible deviation from the southern direction is ± 20. For this reason metal structure fitting the
solar station will be made through a device allowing its orientation towards South direction.
And other variants are supported for device to attach to stations solar ohtl, under observance of the
requirements of this documentation, and only after their approval by the client and Consultant.
Mounting the solar stations will be made through a metal structures which ensure:
-fixing sigurăşi solar station joint the pillar structure;
-compliance with the optimum angle of inclination of the solar panels;
-possibility of orientation solar station (panels) in the direction of South.
Merge with minimum size M16 bolts with nuts and washers Grower.
The contractor will establish the type, dimensions and fastening of the module additional stiffening bars to
support solar stations. Sizing calculation will be done in accordance with the standard design II, NTE 003/04/00 and
conditions listed in this specification.
All metal parts used for attaching the solar stations will be protected against corrosion by hot-dip galvanizing.
The solar stations will follow keeping the integrity of anti-corrosive protection of pillars II.
In the case of local damage, corrosion protection will be rebuilt with corrosion coverage compatible with the
existing mast.
Clamping devices, solar stations for the pillars of the Danube and crossing arm Baer will be designed by the
Contractor and approved by the principal.
3.4.13.5. Mounting the enclosure protection
Mounting the enclosure protection metallic girders solar station will you make it through the screws supplied by
the manufacturer.
In addition, inside the enclosure, the screws will be provided with large diameter flat washers.
It will take into account the fact that the premises for two or three batteries are provided with highlights (table)
of aluminum for hardening păUŢii (fundurilor) enclosure. Their will be done simultaneously with the fixing bracket to
the solar station premises.
The premises are fitted with sealing off the connection cables with solar panels (Panel) and the lamp (lamps)
buoyage. The fitting of such systems is mandatory.
After fitting the battery (batteries) and electronic control system and connections
(internal and external) the premises will be closed using the lid. Insurance cover will be done by means of the screws
supplied by the manufacturer.
3.4.13.6 mounting solar panels
Mounting solar panels will make metal structure of the solar station.
All the solar panels will be of the same type.
The fitting will be done by means of the fastening systems supplied by the manufacturer and in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications.
3.4.13.7. making connections between buoyage system modules
Connections between buoyage system modules will be achieved through the cables supplied by the
manufacturer, after fixing the solar stations and buoyage lamps to the structure of the pillars.
It will strictly respect the polarities of cables and other requirements of the technical specifications of the
manufacturer.
"Inner" Connections (inside, between the battery (batteries) and electronic control system) will be carried out
according to the manufacturer's specifications.
"External Connections (between electronic control system and buoyage lamps, i.e. solar panels) will be carried
out in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, after realizing the inner connections.
Connection cables with the centerpiece will be attached to the metal structure of the pillars (uprights, tension
rods, etc.) through the clamping necklaces supplied by the manufacturer.
The connection cables must be stretched and placed on flat surfaces of the profiles of the a-pillar angle.
It will mount the clamping collars from 0.5 in 0.5 m.
External connections will be provided outside the protective enclosure with etanşarefixare devices supplied by the
manufacturer.
3.4.13.8. Sequence of operations on installation of systems of buoyage on traversărilor
The sequence of operations on installation of systems of buoyage on pillars of traversărilor is as follows:
-Establishing geographical orientation of a pillar;
-Collection and processing of the data needed to complete the cutting data support grip and the
orientation of the solar stations (dimensions and configurations vârfare, consoles, sleepers of the
pillar, etc.);
-Collection and processing of data necessary for carrying out captures of buoyage lamps;
-To establish the length of the connection cables and paths;
-Design of clamping and cutting data support and guidance of the solar stations (individually for each
pole and location);
-Submission for approval of the design documentation;
-Bornăşi transport material handling;
-Mounting structures for photovoltaic stations grip of buoyage on pole;
-Buoyage system modules installation on pole;
-Connections between buoyage system modules;
-Check the quality of the work;
-The reception and the commissioning of the plant of buoyage.
Shall comply with the technical specifications for the execution, pursuing in particular the following:
-Storing materials as provided by the manufacturer;
-Buoyage systems fitting to be done in accordance with the technical specifications;
-Ensuring and observance of special technologies in hazardous work points.
Mounting systems of buoyage will run with the mounting pillars.

3.4.14. Tests and checks for the reception of the works


Throughout the duration of the execution will be carried out the tests and inspections specified in chapters of
technical specifications for materials (poles, foundations, earthing Sockets, active and protective conductors,
insulators chains, OPGW, accessories This technical specification).
3.4.14.1. Checks columns
Will be carried out tests and checks referred to in section Mounting pillars.
Will be made also the following checks:

- Adjacent openings.

- ÎnăOŢimile columns at the points of attachment of the conductors.

- The method of removal of the pillars.

- The accuracy of their removal (' lead in percentage to the înăOŢimea columns).

- Approvals/beneficiary's Observations during the execution.

- Gathering appropriate screw machine products.

- Verifying that all the bars are used correctly and according to the latest approved drawings and do not show

deformities or other defects.


3.4.14.2. Checking foundations and earthing Sockets
There will be tests and verifications provided for in subsections Foundations and binding Plugs at Sământ.
Throughout the period of implementation of the foundations will be checked as follows:
- Geological characteristics of the soil.
- The type of Foundation and correspondence with soil type of the location.
- The dimensions of the base of the Foundation.
- Concrete characteristics (tests on cubes).
- The ambient temperature during the period of the concrete pouring.
- The type and strength of electrical outlets.
- Dimensions Foundation above ground
horizontal dimensions (length, width) in the concrete, top;
diagonal size;
Foundation legs;
the basket above the ground at each leg;
compatibility with the base of the column, which will be installed on the Foundation;
approvals/beneficiary's observations during the execution.
- Verification of impulse and land arrangement after completion of work.
- and the completion of work on the foundations they are finished with a protective layer and executed/dat.
It will also perform verification tests on samples of the materials used to execute the foundations in order to
determine whether the materials used shall conform to the requirements of this technical specification.
If the verification test results highlight the quality of the materials used, the beneficiary may request
mechanical tests on Foundation. Types of checks are:
- X-rays with Gamma Ray. The tests will be carried out in accordance with approved standards.
- Ultrasonic tests. These tests will be used to indicate the approximate reinforce concrete.
- Electromagnetic testing of concrete coating of the fittings. These tests highlight the positioning of the fittings
foundations compared to the project.
- The tapping with the hammer tests. These tests can be used for highlighting approximate strengthening
concrete.
3.4.14.3. Checks/tests for active conductors and the protective conductor classic will be carried out tests
and checks referred to in section 0.
Throughout the period of mounting will be tracked and recorded the following as well: - check for openings in
which arrows;
- VăgeŢile after clemuire;
- duration, and the temperature at which the arrows were measured;
- approvals/beneficiary's observations during the execution.
3.4.14.4. Checks/tests for insulating chains
During the installation of insulating chains will be tracked and recorded the following:
- The type of insulation including the number of columns.
- Verticality of chains after clemuire supportive.
- Approvals/beneficiary's observations during the execution.
3.4.14.5. Checks and tests for attenuation coefficient of OPGW EOS.
Attenuation coefficient of EOS is determined by the average of the measurements at the two ends
(two-side) with the AFL. Two-side measurements will be made on all optical path fibers from the 1550 nm and
1625 nm. The following requirements are specified:
- A pulse width less than 100 ns-1 µs, depending on length of optical path. How do I increase the width of
pulse results in a low resolution with distance, the contractor will implement an optimal resolution and
length.
- The noise level will be less than 0.03 dB
- The resolution will be less than 0.02 dB
- Linearity better than ± 0.05 dB/dB
- Refractory index correctly, it is necessary to obtain length measurements in "backscatter".
- Digital data "backscatter" will be recorded and transmitted to the Recipient.
The contractor will check and assess media OTDR measurements "two-site" and will report the following:
- Test procedure: equipment, accuracy, compliance with specified requirements; - Optical Length;
- Attenuation coefficient to 1625 nm: examining the curves function, discontinuităŢilor
- tronsonare, peaks of mitigation. Joins will be reported separately;
- Attenuation (patch-patch): checking the results based on those requirements.
Overall mitigation
General mitigation of patch panelele patch panel will be assessed on the basis of measurements of
power. The spectral width of the source will be less than 20 nm. Mitigation will result from measurements of
two-side type.
The attenuation members
Atenuarile thoracolombar junction are determined at 1550 nm OTDR test results of two-side type. Shall record
and report the following:
- Attenuation per junction per fiber
- Average attenuation in joins a link from EOS.
- Attenuation and the location of the junction with the maximum amount of attenuation per fiber in EOS.
Attenuation coefficient per sections
Average attenuation coefficient per fibrăşi per cable in the EOS will be determined by OTDR measurements of
two-side type. For cable from EOS will be recorded as follows:

- The location of the measurements and the coefficient of attenuated per fiber.
Dispersion
Per fibre from EOS will be recorded as follows:

- PMD forecast

- Chromatic dispersion forecast, derived from the specific dispersion adopted from the bulletin issued by the

manufacturer of fibres fibre (see technical specification: traceability of fibers).


Per EOS, the contractor will report the total dispersion also allowed for installation type STM-16 based on systems
and laser sources for 1550 nm ± 0.2 nm, within the General attenuation as an integral part of the reception.
Rotation Of OPGW
Rotating OPGW will be measured while dragging the arrow. A flag or a strip should be fixed at the end of the
shooting of OPGW. Through Visual observations, rotations will be counted in each of the openings in the panels.
The number of spins, reported at lengths of shooting (in km) indicated on km OPGW spins. pilot must be Thread
spin independently of OPGW when rotations over the amount allowed for 10 spins per kilometre. In this case, you
also OPGW with anti-rotating.
3.5. VERIFICATIONS and tests the PURPOSE of IFD
Upon completion of the construction works contractor will have to carry out final checks and tests and provide
the following:
- Tools, installations and materials necessary for the maintenance of the reserve line and detailed list of
quantities.
- All related technical documentation including "As Built" documentation.
Checks for PIF
Before putting it under tension is necessary to carry out the checks all items for approval of quality of execution
by the beneficiary.
The contractor will propose the schedule of the final checks and will submit the recipient for approval.
The contractor is solely responsible for carrying out these checks, and the corresponding procedure will be
approved by the principal.
The contractor is required to notify in advance the completion of execution of the works and the commencement
of tests and checks for the reception.
It requires a visual assessment of all equipment, installations and structures prior to notification of the
completion of the work.
These checks shall be as follows:
- Verification of completion of works-installation/mounting of all CENTURY, alarms, indicator plates plates,
bolts, plates, ground maintenance manual, etc.
- ConformităŢilor verification of all equipment, installations and structures with the designs and with norms
and standards.
- Visual assessment of the quality of materials used for highlighting flaws visible.
- Comparison of test certificates of Manufacturer with materials brought into Opera.
- Visual assessment of the foundations and pillars of metal on the quality of workmanship and Technical
compliance with Specifications.
- Visual assessment of the security and safety of the requests (anticăŢăUători, mast climb stairs, alarm pads,
plugs, etc.).
- Land release testing of all materials as a result of construction-Assembly works.
- Checking the electrical parameters (minimum induced voltages measurement. And capacitive currents in
parallel lines; checking identification phase; continitătii and determination of earthing of the line impedance
measurement of secvanŢă; direct current, inversăŞi- 116, according to NTI'S-
TEL-R-002-2007-00_12)
Checks for the end of the warranty period
C a ntractantul will propose the program checks for the end of the guarantee period and the recipient will submit for
approval.
The contractor is solely responsible for carrying out these checks, and the corresponding procedure will be
approved by the principal.
S e requires a visual assessment of all equipment, installations and structures before the end of the
deadline/warranty.
These checks shall be as follows:
- Visual verification for visible defects And remedy of highlighting them.
- Visual assessment of the foundations and pillars of the metallic quality of workmanship, compliance with the
technical specifications And performance warranty.
- Visual assessment of the security and safety of the requests (anticăŢăUători, mast climb stairs, alarm pads,
plugs, etc.).
- The location of the module antivibratoarelor And signalling beacon.
- Checking the functioning of the system of buoyage compliant.

3.6. Tolerance PERMITTED in the WORK

3.6.1. TOPOGRAPHIC CHECKS

The accuracy of the measurements of wires, gauges topo influence of openings, the lengths of the arrows and the
efforts applied to the structure transmission line (poles, wires, insulation, foundations).
x Accuracy of detail ('x 'y) profile line ' z (înăOŢimea land) must
either 'x ', y ', z d +/-15 cm.
x accuracy of longitudinal profiles for final documentation should be 'x 'or ' y 'z d
+/-0.3 mm x Accuracy angle between alignments is given by the relationship:

TD = 50cc, where:
TD -tolerance when measuring angles in seconds:
50cc -scoring error;
n-the number of measured directions (usually 2)
x Accuracy on measurements of distances between pillars is given by the relationship:
TL = 15 + L. 0.12 in cm, where:
TL -admissible tolerance to measuring distances between the centres of the two pillars
the gently rolling terrain in a row for "p" up to 10G.
L-horizontal distance in m
For slopes of land larger tolerances are increased by: T
x 29% for p between 10Gand 20G x 58 percent to p 20Gand 30G x 87 percent to p 30Gand 40G

3.6.2. Stâlpi
For linearity measured between nodes column elements, be totally level section or the whole pillar, the tolerance
permitted must be:

Permissible deviation from the vertical column 0.2% of its înăOŢimea.


Deviations from the right angle of the bracket should not exceed 0.5% of the length of the item, Păsurată up the
pillar centerline.

3.6.3. Conductors and accessories


When checking through direct targeting of the arrows or with teodolitul the following tolerances:
x against the arrows, the tolerances are permitted to be +/-2% but not more than 30 cm.
x Between stages, tolerances not be cumulated, but is allowed between two phases, a deviation of 10 cm.
x For fasciculare conductors where arrow differences cannot be measured, measured on the skew
permissible degrees of twist is 10% (which is about 7 cm) and not be cumulated with the deviations above.
To achieve the seams bypass, maximum permissible deviation (vertically) 'h ' must be 'h d 5% h, where h is
the vertical distance between the consolăşi cord.
x the maximum permitted Tolerance Assembly 'antivibratoarelor Stockbridge l d +/-5% l, where l is the
distance between clemăşi antivibrator. x the maximum permitted Tolerance of temperature measurement cable of
arrows +/-2 ° c.

3.6.4. insulating chains


Deviation from the verticality of the insulating chains along the CENTURY must be less than 0.25 m difference in
length of the branches of chains double and triple insulation must be less than 1% of the length.
The maximum permissible tolerance for fund-raising support clamp screw machine products with the key cell is +/-
5%.

3.7. SECURITY MEASURES and SĂ1ĂTATE in MUNCĂşI PSI


All of the works will be applied strictly, with specific provisions contained in the following normative acts:
- Law No. 40/2011 for the modification and completion of the law nr. 53/2003 Employment;
- Law and security săQăWăŢii, nr. 319/2006, with subsequent modifications;
- Hg 995/2010 for the modification and completion of the methodological Norms for the application of the
provisions of the law on occupational safety and săQăWăŢii No. 319/2006, approved by GD 1425/2006;
- Hg 355/2007 săQăWăŢii surveillance of workers;
Hg 300/2006 concerning minimum safety requirements and săQătate for temporary or mobile construction sites;
Hg 1029/2008 laying down the conditions for the placing on the market of industrial machinery
(replaces the GD # 119/2004);
Internal instructions of the Contractor/Subcontractor;
- Hg 971/2006 concerning the minimum requirements for safety signs and/or săQătate in the workplace;
- H.g. nr. 104 of 31 January 2007 to regulate specific procedure regarding the posting of employees within the
framework of provision of transnational services on Romanian territory;
- H.g. nr. 557 of 6 June 2007 concerning the completion of measures to promote safety and
îmbunăWăŢirea săQăWăŢii in the workplace for employees employed under an individual contract of
employment determinatăşi-term for temporary employees enclose the temporary employment agents
transposing Directive 91/383/EEC supplementing the measures to encourage security and îmbunăWăŢirea
săQăWăŢii at work in the case of workers with a fixed-duration employment relationship or temporary work,
published in the official journal of the European Communities No. L 206/1991;
- Order of 14 august 2006 621-Order repealing order No. 550/2004 approving the empowerment of individuals and
legal persons to provide psychological services in the field of labour protection;
- Decree No. 213 of 18 February 2009 for the modification and completion of the methodological Norms for the
application of law No. 346/2002 on insurance for occupational accidents and occupational diseases muncăşi with
subsequent amendments and additions, approved by order of the Minister of labour, social solidarity and family
and the Minister of public săQăWăŢii nr. 450/825/2006;
- Decree No. 3 from January 3, 2007 approving the form for recording work accident-VIKRAM;
- Hg 1048/2006 concerning minimum safety requirements and săQătate for the use by workers of personal
protective equipment at work;
- Hg 1051/2006 concerning minimum safety requirements and săQătate for manual handling of masses presenting
risks to workers, in particular of injury;
- Decree No. 1193/2006 approving the rules on the limitation of exposure of the general population to
electromagnetic fields 0 Hz to 300 GHz;
- Decree No. 1482/2006 approving signaling No. 004;
- H.g. nr. 804 of 25 July 2007 on the control of activities which present major-accident hazards involving
dangerous substances;
- Decree No. 162/2002 from 16/12/2002 approving the rules governing the activity of information and advice for
disabled people;
- Hg 1136/2006 concerning minimum safety requirements and săQătate regarding the exposure of workers to the
risks arising from electromagnetic fields;
Hg 1146/2006 concerning minimum safety requirements and săQătate for the use by workers of the equipment;
Hg 1028/2006 concerning minimum safety requirements and săQătate in work relating to the use of equipment
with the viewing screen;
Hg 1058/2006 concerning minimum requirements for the safety and protection of îmbunăWăŢirea săQăWăŢii
workers who may be exposed to a potential risk due to explosive atmospheres;
- Hg 1093/2006 concerning minimum safety requirements and săQătate for the protection of workers from the
risks related to exposure to carcinogens and mutagens at work;
- Hg 1092/2006 on the protection of workers from the risks related to their exposure to biological agents at work;
- Hg 1218/2006 concerning minimum safety requirements and săQătate to ensure that workers from the risks
related to exposure to chemical agents at work;
- Hg 493/2006 concerning minimum safety requirements and occupational săQătate the risks arising from noise;
- Law No. 49 from 08/03/2006 published in the Official Gazette nr. 246 from 20/03/2006 for the approval of the
Government Emergency Ordinance nr. 195/2002 movement on public roads;
- H.g. nr. 38 from 2008 - organisation of work time of persons performing mobile road transport activities,
transposing Directive 94/9/EC on the alignment of laws of the Member States concerning equipment and
protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, as published in the official journal of
the European Communities (ECOJ) No. L100 of 19 April 1994;
- Law No. 64 from 2008 on the functioning of the safe pressure installations, installations and appliances
consuming fuel;
- Law No. 371 from 21/12/2007 for the approval of the Government Ordinance. 37/2007 laying down the
framework for the application of the rules relating to driving periods, breaks and rest periods for drivers and the
use of apparatus;
- Order nr. 1260/1390/2013 approving detailed procedures for medical and psychological examination of staff with
responsibilities in transport safety and frequency of examination;
- O.U.G. nr. 91 from 2007 for the modification and completion of some legal acts in the field of social protection
has been published in the Official Gazette, part I, no. 671 on 1 October 2007. With the exception of art. V, the
provisions of this emergency Ordinance entered into force on 1 January 2008;
- Hg 1875/2005 săQăWăŢii protection and safety of workers against the risks due to exposure to asbestos;
- Hg 1876/2005 concerning minimum safety requirements and săQătate regarding the exposure of workers to the
risks arising from vibration;
- Hg 115/2004 laying down the essential requirements for security of personal protective equipment and the
conditions for the placing on the market;
- Hg 457/2003 on ensuring the safety of users of low-voltage equipment modificatăşi supplemented by HG.
1514/2003;
Law No. 346/2002 concerning insurance for occupational accidents and occupational diseases muncăşi, as
amended and supplemented;
Hg 1022/2002 relating to the products and services that may endanger life, săQătatea, safety at work and
environmental protection;
Prescriptions verification ISCIR and exploiting the mechanical installations under pressure and hoisting facilities;
- IPSM-IEE/2011, private Instruction safety for electrical installations in operation, revision 1, approved with
Opinion No. CTES-Wsp 406/02.12.2011;
- The regulation for the approval of electricians, project auditors, and managers in techniques, as well as
with the execution of expert quality and extrajudiciari techniques in the field of installations (order 11/2013
naer);
- Guidelines for testing the quality of erection works for machinery, industrial equipment and technological
installations, approved with LITTLE Order No. 293/approximately 8.11.1999;
- Own security instructions and săQătate the contractor on completion
- and/or implementation of security regulations and săQătate at work, Taking account of the particularities of
work;-
- Own security plan and săQătate in the work developed by the contractor; -Own security Instructions, developed
by the contractor.
- "Fact sheets" and "technological specific instructions" for each category of related works (for example: FL-1/80,
IT-4/81 (L), (L)-14/85, 2/80, FL (L)-10/85, FL 11/90, etc.).
The list is not comprehensive, it can be supplemented with all regulatory acts applicable to the various categories of
works necessary for the production of plants.
Against the beneficiary, the contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the provisions of these laws and their own
security Instructions and săQătate.
In the context of Laws and regulations on safety and săQătatea, the Contractor represents a legal entity that
operates as a personal delegate.
The contractor shall be liable for non-compliance, by any of his collaborators, or head, of the rules, in the framework
of the works, if you don't intervene to prevent or stop disrespecting them.
For smooth execution of work activities, in terms of security and maintaining VăQăWăŢii workers in the labour
process, it must comply with the following requirements:
0ăsuri security and săQătate at work
Execution is prohibited on adverse time (wind, rain, Lightning).
Contractor personnel must be permanently supervised by the head of the paper and Chief of echipăşi You meet the
following conditions:
- 6 possess professional qualifications required in Bible;
- 6 be trained, authorized and checked in terms of safety at work, which receive only tasks
corresponding to the level of authorisation;
- 6 to be equipped with appropriate technical means and the burden;
- Execution staff is obliged to use the necessary facilities, particularly those of labour protection;
- 6 be equipped with protective means corresponding to the risk of cumulative injury, particularly to
the workplace.
0ăsuri security and săQătate in areas of parallelism
Due to inductive coupling between lines induced voltages may occur in TH taken off under voltage at which it works.
To avoid tension in the lines that will be working sectoriza the line by undoing the strings at the ends of the Panel
and will be installed attenuators (scurtcircuitoare) on both sides of each pole.
Types of safety measures in the areas of parallelism are:
- 0ăsuri General safety; 0ăsuri - safety areas;
- 0ăsuri safety on the technological operations.
Execution is prohibited on adverse time (wind, rain, Lightning).
Contractor personnel must be permanently supervised by the head of the paper and Chief of echipăşi You meet the
following conditions:
- 6 possess professional qualifications required in Bible;
- 6 be trained, authorized and checked in terms of safety at work, which receive only tasks
corresponding to the level of authorisation;
- 6 to be equipped with appropriate technical means and the burden;
- Execution staff is obliged to use the necessary facilities, particularly those of labour protection;
- 6 be equipped with protective means corresponding to the risk of cumulative injury, particularly to
the workplace.
0ăsuri security and săQătate in special work
In order to reduce the length of parallelism is achieved significant line.
It will check the existence of connecting conductors to the protective earthing of the end stations and the outlets of
Earth (natural or artificial) from all pillars (except those carrying out optimisation to reduce the range of parallelism).
Will short circuit the phase conductors and connected to the Earth (or the sector in which I work) at both ends and in
the work area (at the ends of your work area and where staff can achieve the phase conductors).
0ăsuri security and săQătate on work areas
Delimitation of the zone work is done through the red tape with Pegs and signs prohibiting only for populated areas.
During the execution of the works, autoscările, autotelescoapele and other equipment or devices should be placed so
that during their handling to observe distances versus neighbourhood facilities remaining under voltage.
All the machines will be linked to the ground (a pillar or wall outlet socket with artificial Pegs) via a flexible copper
conductor 16 mm2.
The work done on the conductors shall comply with the specific fact sheets technological and safety standards at
work on specific operations in accordance with the safety data sheet.
In all working areas (at înăOŢime and on the ground) will strictly apply all appropriate technical and organizational
security of labour, in accordance with the legal provisions.
0ăsuri security and săQătate on technological operations
These measures consist in carrying out the work area and work space (environment and evaluated), through the
application of attenuators, scurtcircuitoare or at not more than 10 m from the working point, tied to a pillar or wall
outlet socket.
Cords from chain link stretching will also be linked to the pillars.
The Climbing poles to use boot or electrical workers will first climb on a platform to avoid Kraft touch and step
voltage.
Workers on the ground working with the conductor will be compulsorily equipped with two means of protection
(insulating gloves and boots) and will wear protective helmet.
The work done on the conductors shall comply with the specific fact sheets technological and safety standards at
work on specific operations in accordance with the safety data sheet.
Will loosen ties to the pillars of the protective conductors at the ends of the area of parallelism throughout execution.
Sectoriza line will be on the boards by unlinking the protective conductors to the poles at the ends of the
Panel, stages, depending on the work area.
In all working areas (at înăOŢime and on the ground) will strictly apply all appropriate technical and organizational
security of labour, in accordance with the legal provisions.
Before mounting works of stretching or eking out space shall be protected, through the installation of two
attenuators within 10 m of the working point, bound to a pillar or wall outlet socket.
Before starting clemuirii will be also working space protected by the fitting of a side of the roller to no more than 2 m
of two attenuators to the column outlet.
The scurtcircuitoarelor or attenuators is accomplished first touch at prizăşi then the line conductors, and the
disassembly proceed first to the dismantling of the wires and then to Sockets.
0ăsuri for defence against fire
All of the works will be applied strictly, with specific provisions contained in the following normative acts:
- Law No. 307/2006 for defence against fire.
- Order nr. 163/2007 General Rules for approval of defense against fires.
As general measures for prevention of fire mentioned as follows:

-exploiting technical means with failures, or corresponding improvisations făUă protection against combustible

materials from the space in which they are used is prohibited;

-execution of maintenance and repair by unauthorised personnel;

-keeping in good condition of the facilities and systems to capture and drain Earth of atmospheric electric
discharges of machinery and technological equipment;

-using devices, apparatus, tools and tooling protected or that may produce sparks through running,
tapping or rubbing in spaces or places with risk of explosion shall be prohibited;

-the products, materials and substances, combustible place away from front of heat sources or protect
so as not to be possible to their ignition;

-waste from solid materials such as rags, tow, cotton is collected in crates or metal pots with metal inner
liner with lid, placed in făUă fire hazard places and marked;

-the technical means of defence against fire must meet and provide criteria and performance levels laid
down by the applicable technical regulations and technical specifications.

-the technical means of defense against fires shall be certified with the CE marking, or certified in
accordance with the law.
-the technical means of defense against fires shall be placed or stored in places protected from the
weather, corrosive agents, temperature, or properly protect the environments in which it is used.

3.8. The reception of the WORKS

The reception of the work will be performed in accordance with the provisions of the GD 273/1994 in two stages:-
reception at the completion of the work;
-final acceptance at the expiry of the warranty period.
In the context of the reception at the completion of the works will be made and measurements of the
electromagnetic field, which will be quoted and embedded in the price offer.
The reception will be carried out by a Commission appointed by the investor, formed in accordance with the
provisions of law No.
10/1995 of at least 5 members, representatives of the designer and the contractor having the status of guests. It
said that the designer as author of the work shall întocmeascăşi to appear before the Commission of reception its
point of view concerning the implementation of (report regarding how the work was executed).
The investor will ensure that this work should be included in the contract.
The reception is made after the conclusion of all the activities laid down in the contract.
Where the investor requests the taking over of some păUŢi from the work before the end of the entire work
contracted will end a report receiving between teaching and executing investor.
The report concluded teaching and receive under these conditions does not constitute a receipt for the work
involved.
For the completion of the work, the contractor must notify the Beneficiary works completion date specified in the
Contract by means of a written document confirmed investor.
Binding will be part of the beneficiary's representative and a representative of the local government in whose
territory is situated the construction, the others being specialists in the field, all with higher education. Designer and
Contractor representatives are not part of the Commission, the latter having reception quality guests.
The designer as author of the work, the project will be prepared and will be presented to the Commission by the
reception his point of view concerning the execution. The recipient will ensure that this work should be included in
the contract. The Commission shall check the following documents:
- technical design and specification of the line, with changes and endorsed by the designer, and the necessary
permits;
- minutes for any hidden works;
- tables of reîntinderea arrows for the arrow of the protective conductors and VăgeŢile made by the manufacturer.
- list of deviations from the normative project and with the derogations in question.
- inventory backup materials.
For all work performed will be presented, centralized, technological job descriptions/instructions after which is
working on each element of the CENTURY.
To track the behavior of the CENTURY, the documents indicated above will be kept up to date with all the changes
involved in service, during maintenance and repair.
Admissions staff-reception (what will have secondary education) will follow the execution on the ground through
Visual inspection from the ground or by climbing on each pole.
The Organization of the work of the Commission of reception will be made in accordance with the provisions of the
GD 273/1994, cap. II.
After expiry of the guarantee, the beneficiary shall convene not later than 15 days after final acceptance. The final
acceptance will be attending:
- The beneficiary;
- The Commission appointed by the Beneficiary receiving;
- The designer of this work; -Contractor.
- The Organization of the work of the Commission of the final receipt will be made in accordance with the
provisions of the GD 273/1994, cap. III.

Você também pode gostar